The second part of the principles of art military, practised in the warres of the United Provinces consisting of the severall formes of battels, represented by the illustrious Maurice Prince of Orange of famous memorie, and His Highnesse Frederick Henry Prince of Orange, that is Captaine Generall of the Army of the high and mighty Lords the States Generall of the United Provinces : together with the order and forme of quartering, encamping, and approaching, in a warre offensive and defensive.
         Principles of the art militarie. Part 2
         Hexham, Henry, 1585?-1650?
      
       
         This text is an enriched version of the TCP digital transcription A43483 of text R18347 in the  English Short Title Catalog (Wing H1654). Textual changes  and metadata enrichments aim at making the text more  computationally tractable, easier to read, and suitable for network-based collaborative curation by amateur and professional end users from many walks of life.  The text has been tokenized and linguistically annotated with  MorphAdorner. The annotation includes standard spellings that support the display of a text in a standardized format that preserves archaic forms ('loveth', 'seekest'). Textual changes aim at restoring the text the author or stationer meant to publish.  This text has not been fully proofread 
       Approx. 219 KB of XML-encoded text transcribed from 78 1-bit group-IV TIFF page images.
       
         EarlyPrint Project
         Evanston,IL, Notre Dame, IN, St. Louis, MO
         2017
         A43483
         Wing H1654
         ESTC R18347
         12869195
         ocm 12869195
         94790
         
           
            This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Early English Books Online Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of
             Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal
            . The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission.
          
        
      
       
         Early English books online.
      
       
         (EEBO-TCP ; phase 1, no. A43483)
         Transcribed from: (Early English Books Online ; image set 94790)
         Images scanned from microfilm: (Early English books, 1641-1700 ; 715:2)
      
       
         
           
             The second part of the principles of art military, practised in the warres of the United Provinces consisting of the severall formes of battels, represented by the illustrious Maurice Prince of Orange of famous memorie, and His Highnesse Frederick Henry Prince of Orange, that is Captaine Generall of the Army of the high and mighty Lords the States Generall of the United Provinces : together with the order and forme of quartering, encamping, and approaching, in a warre offensive and defensive.
             Principles of the art militarie. Part 2
             Hexham, Henry, 1585?-1650?
          
           
             This text is an enriched version of the TCP digital transcription A43483 of text R18347 in the  English Short Title Catalog (Wing H1654). Textual changes  and metadata enrichments aim at making the text more  computationally tractable, easier to read, and suitable for network-based collaborative curation by amateur and professional end users from many walks of life.  The text has been tokenized and linguistically annotated with  MorphAdorner. The annotation includes standard spellings that support the display of a text in a standardized format that preserves archaic forms ('loveth', 'seekest'). Textual changes aim at restoring the text the author or stationer meant to publish.  This text has not been fully proofread 
           [16], p. 13-32, 21-24, 37-56 p., 20 leaves of plates (18 folded) : ill., plans.
           
             by Antony of Heusden,
             Printed at Delf in Holeand :
             1642.
          
           
             Reproduction of original in the University of Illinois (Urbana-Champaign Campus). Library.
          
        
      
    
     
       
         eng
      
       
         
           Maurice, -- Prince of Orange, 1567-1625.
           Frederick Henry, -- Prince of Orange, 1584-1647.
           United Provinces of the Netherlands. -- Staten Generaal.
           Military art and science -- Early works to 1800.
           Netherlands -- History, Military.
        
      
    
       A43483  R18347  (Wing H1654).  civilwar no The second part of the principles of the art military, practised in the warres of the United Provinces. Consisting of the severall formes of Hexham, Henry 1642    43101 41 0 0 0 0 0 10 C  The  rate of 10 defects per 10,000 words puts this text in the C category of texts with between 10 and 35 defects per 10,000 words. 
        2004-01 TCP
        Assigned for keying and markup
      
        2004-02 SPi Global
        Keyed and coded from ProQuest page images
      
        2004-03 Judith Siefring
        Sampled and proofread
      
        2004-03 Judith Siefring
        Text and markup reviewed and edited
      
        2004-04 pfs
        Batch review (QC) and XML conversion
      
    
  
   
     
       
       
       
         
           THE
           SECOND
           PART
           OF
           THE
           PRINCIPLES
           OF
           THE
           ART
           MILITARY
           ,
           Practised
           In
           the
           Warres
           of
           the
           United
           Provinces
           .
           CONSISTING
           OF
           THE
           SEVERALL
           FORMES
           OF
           BATTELS
           ,
           REPRESENTED
           BY
           THE
           Illustrious
           MAVRICE
           PRINCE
           of
           ORANGE
           of
           famous
           memorie
           .
           AND
           HIS
           HIGHNESSE
           FREDERICK
           HENRY
           PRINCE
           OF
           ORANGE
           ,
           that
           is
           Captaine
           Generall
           of
           the
           Army
           of
           the
           high
           and
           mighty
           Lords
           the
           STALES
           GENERALL
           of
           the
           Vnited
           Provinces
           .
           Together
           with
           The
           order
           and
           forme
           of
           Quartering
           ,
           Encamping
           ,
           and
           Approching
           ,
           in
           a
           Warre
           offensive
           and
           defensive
           .
        
         
           
             The
             second
             Edition
             newly
             corrected
             and
             amended
             by
             Captaine
             HENRY
             HEXHAM
             ,
             Quartermaster
             to
             the
             Regiment
             of
             the
             Honourable
             Colonell
             GORINO
             .
          
        
         
           Printed
           at
           DELF
           in
           HOLLAND
           ,
           By
           Antony
           of
           Heusden
           ,
           ANNO
           1642.
           
           
             Cum
             Privilegio
             .
          
        
      
       
       
       
         
           TO
           THE
           TRVELY
           HONORABLE
           ,
           AND
           HIS
           NOBLE
           LORD
           ,
           
             GEORGE
             GORING
             ,
          
           BARON
           OF
           HOSPERPOINT
           ,
           VICE-CHAMBERLAINE
           TO
           HIS
           SACRED
           Maiestie
           ,
           and
           one
           of
           his
           Majsties
           .
           most
           honorable
           privie
           Councill
           .
        
         
           
             MY
             LORD
             ,
          
        
         
           ACcording
           to
           my
           promisse
           and
           weake
           ability
           I
           had
           composed
           and
           finished
           this
           
             second
             part
             of
             the
             Principles
             of
             the
             Art
             Militarie
             ,
          
           for
           so
           much
           as
           consernes
           the
           duties
           of
           the
           Officers
           of
           Feild
           ,
           belonging
           to
           an
           Armie
           ,
           and
           the
           diverse
           orders
           ,
           and
           formes
           of
           embattailling
           of
           Horse
           and
           Foote
           represented
           in
           the
           feild
           at
           severall
           times
           ,
           and
           in
           sundry
           places
           by
           the
           two
           famous
           Generals
           of
           our
           age
           ,
           
             Maurice
             Prince
             of
             Orang
          
           of
           happie
           memorie
           ,
           and
           
             Frederick
             Henry
          
           his
           highnesse
           the
           Prince
           of
           Orang
           that
           now
           is
           our
           victorious
           Generall
           ,
           together
           with
           the
           order
           of
           
             Quartering
             ,
             Encamping
          
           and
           
             Approching
          
           in
           a
           Warre
           
             Offensiue
          
           and
           
             Defensive
          
           :
           This
           I
           vndertook
           with
           a
           great
           deale
           of
           labour
           and
           charge
           ,
           and
           gathered
           it
           out
           of
           diverse
           good
           Authours
           ,
           for
           the
           instruction
           and
           informing
           the
           Iudgments
           of
           such
           ,
           as
           are
           lovers
           of
           this
           
             noble
             Art
             Militarie
             ,
          
           &
           having
           heretofore
           bin
           dedicated
           to
           my
           honorable
           Colonell
           your
           Sonne
           ,
           having
           tasted
           of
           your
           Lo
           :
           bountie
           both
           for
           my
           
             Atlas
             Majours
             ,
          
           and
           some
           other
           of
           my
           
             Militarie
          
           bookes
           more
           then
           of
           any
           noblemans
           in
           England
           to
           shew
           &
           acknowledg
           a
           gratefull
           minde
           ,
           therefore
           this
           second
           Edition
           comes
           in
           most
           humble
           wise
           ,
           to
           craue
           your
           Lo
           :
           gratious
           
             Patronage
             ,
          
           as
           one
           to
           whome
           I
           acknowledg
           my self
           much
           bound
           vnto
           ,
           and
           so
           praying
           to
           the
           Almighty
           for
           your
           health
           &
           encrease
           of
           honor
           .
           I
           rest
        
         
           
             Your
             Lo
             :
             servant
             ever
             to
             Commaund
             
               HENRY
               HEXHAM
               .
            
          
        
      
       
       
         
           An
           Index
           ,
           Of
           the
           contents
           of
           this
           second
           part
           ,
           &
           how
           the
           Boockbinder
           is
           to
           place
           the
           Cards
           .
        
         
           
             OF
             the
             Provost
             Marshall
             of
             an
             Armie
             ,
             pag.
             1.
             
          
           
             Of
             the
             Marshall
             of
             a
             Regiment
             ,
             a
             Quartermaster
             Generall
             ,
             &
             a
             Quartermaster
             of
             a
             particular
             Regiment
             ,
             pag.
             2.
             
          
           
             Of
             a
             Trench-Master
             ,
             an
             Inginier
             &
             a
             Clark
             of
             the
             Victuals
             pag.
             3.
             
          
           
             Of
             a
             Carriage-Master
             ,
             and
             a
             Muster-Master
             pag.
             4.
             
          
           
             Of
             the
             Sarjant
             Maiour
             to
             a
             Regiment
             pag.
             5.
             
          
           
             Of
             a
             Lieutenant
             Colonell
             ,
             and
             a
             Colonel
             pag.
             6.
             
          
           
             Of
             the
             Sariant
             Maiour
             Generall
             of
             an
             Army
             pag.
             7.
             
          
           
             Of
             a
             Sariant
             Maiour
             of
             a
             Brigade
             ▪
             or
             a
             great
             Corporall
             of
             the
             feild
             pag.
             8.
             
          
           
             Of
             the
             Generall
             or
             Master
             of
             the
             Ordnance
             ,
             &
             of
             the
             Clark
             of
             the
             Munition
             and
             Matterialls
             pag.
             9.
             
          
           
             Of
             the
             Lord
             Marshall
             of
             the
             Feild
             pag.
             10.
             
          
           
             Of
             the
             office
             and
             charge
             of
             the
             Lord
             Generall
             of
             an
             Army
             pag.
             11.12.13
          
           
             In
             what
             order
             an
             Army
             ought
             to
             march
             over
             a
             Campagny
             ,
             narrow
             passages
             ,
             woods
             ,
             and
             Rivers
             pag.
             14.15.16
             .
          
           
             Of
             the
             Quartermaster
             Generall
             ,
             of
             a
             Commissary
             Generall
             ,
             &
             of
             a
             Lieutenant
             Generall
             of
             the
             Horse
             pag.
             17.
             
          
           
             Of
             the
             charge
             and
             Office
             of
             the
             Generall
             of
             the
             Horse
             pag.
             18
          
           
             Of
             the
             ordering
             and
             forming
             of
             a
             Devision
             ,
             or
             a
             Battaillon
             of
             Foote
             or
             Horse
             pag.
             19
          
           
             Of
             the
             Forme
             of
             an
             Armie
             of
             24.
             thousand
             foote
             &
             six
             thousand
             Horse
             ranged
             in
             Battell
             ray
             as
             the
             figure
             demonstrates
             pag.
             20.
             
          
           
             Next
             followes
             the
             seuerall
             formes
             of
             Battels
             of
             Horse
             and
             foote
             ,
             which
             have
             bin
             showne
             in
             the
             low
             Countries
             since
             Anno
             1600.
             till
             this
             last
             yeare
             1642.
             and
             are
             all
             to
             be
             placed
             Alphabettically
             from
             A.
             to
             X.
             one
             after
             another
             betweene
             pages
             20.
             
             &
             21.
             
          
           
             Of
             the
             order
             and
             forme
             of
             encamping
             of
             an
             Army
             pag.
             21.22.23.24
             .
          
           
             Of
             the
             quartering
             of
             a
             Devision
             or
             Regiment
             of
             foote
             according
             to
             the
             order
             of
             his
             Highnesse
             the
             Prince
             of
             Orange
             pag.
             25.
             
          
           
             Note
             that
             betweene
             the
             pages
             26.
             
             &
             27.
             the
             figure
             of
             a
             Regiment
             of
             foote
             is
             to
             be
             bound
             pag.
             26.27
             .
          
           
             Betweene
             pages
             28.
             
             &
             29.
             is
             to
             be
             bound
             in
             the
             figure
             of
             a
             Regiment
             of
             Horse
             28.29
             .
          
           
             Betweene
             pag.
             32.
             
             &
             43.
             which
             is
             false
             figured
             ,
             the
             figure
             &
             forme
             of
             a
             Campe
             quartered
             ,
             that
             is
             betweene
             letter
             H.
             &
             I.
             pag.
             32.33
             .
          
           
             Of
             all
             manner
             of
             Approches
             and
             their
             profiles
             pages
             33.34.35.36.37.38
             .
          
           
             Note
             that
             this
             sheete
             i.
             should
             have
             bin
             figured
             33.34.35
             .
             &
             36.
             
          
           
             Note
             that
             betweene
             pages
             38.
             
             &
             39.
             the
             figure
             of
             Approches
             is
             to
             be
             bound
          
           
             Of
             Counter-Approches
             pag.
             40.
             
          
           
             Of
             all
             sorts
             of
             Bridges
             pag.
             41.42
          
           
             Of
             Galleries
             and
             their
             Appurtenances
             pag
             ,
             43.
             
          
           
             Note
             that
             betweene
             pages
             44.
             
             &
             45.
             is
             to
             be
             bound
             the
             figure
             of
             a
             Gallerie
             .
             44.45
             .
          
           
             Of
             Mines
             and
             Counter-Mines
             pag.
             46.47.48.49
             .
             &
             50.
             
          
           
             Of
             all
             sorts
             of
             Palisadoes
             ,
             Barrocadoes
             ,
             quadrant
             Footnailes
             &
             Beares
             pag.
             51.
             
          
           
             Of
             turne
             Pikes
             pag.
             52.53
             .
          
           
             Of
             Retrenchings
             of
             Inward
             cuttings
             of
             pag.
             54.55
             .
             &
             56.
             
          
        
      
       
         
           
             Hoe
             de
             Boeck-binder
             sal
             de
             Caerten
             van
             dit
             tweede
             deel
             binden
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             Tusschen
             fol
             :
             20
             en̄
             21
             alle
             de
             Caerten
             van
             Slachorders
             ,
             van
             letter
             A.
             to
             X.
             Anno
             1642.
             
          
           
             2.
             
             Tusschen
             fol
             :
             26.
             ende
             27.
             de
             quartier
             van
             een
             Regiment
             te
             voet
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             Tusschen
             fol
             :
             28.
             en
             29.
             de
             quartier
             van
             een
             Regiment
             te
             Paert
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             Tusschen
             fol
             :
             32.
             en
             33.
             de
             quartier
             van
             een
             heel
             Legher
             .
          
           
             5.
             
             Tusschen
             fol
             :
             38.
             en
             39.
             de
             Caert
             van
             Approches
             .
          
           
             6.
             
             Tusschen
             fol
             :
             44.
             en
             45.
             de
             Caert
             van
             een
             Gallerye
             ende
             Mynen
             .
          
           
             7.
             
             Tusschen
             fol
             :
             54.
             en
             55.
             de
             Caert
             van
             Retrenchementen
             ende
             af-snijdinge
             .
          
        
      
    
     
       
       
         
           THE
           SEVERALL
           DVTIES
           OF
           THE
           OFFICERS
           OF
           the
           feild
           belonging
           to
           an
           Armie
           .
        
         
           
             And
             first
             of
             the
             Provost
             Marshall
             of
             an
             Army
             .
          
           
             BEcause
             in
             the
             nature
             of
             his
             Office
             he
             is
             to
             execute
             all
             directions
             and
             commandements
             ,
             that
             he
             shall
             receive
             from
             the
             Lord
             Generall
             ,
             or
             Marshall
             ,
             he
             shall
             be
             injoyned
             to
             give
             his
             attendance
             upon
             the
             Lord
             Marshall
             .
             Jt
             is
             then
             his
             office
             to
             publish
             all
             Proclamations
             ,
             Orders
             and
             Decrees
             of
             the
             Generals
             ,
             and
             all
             things
             else
             that
             are
             to
             be
             notifyed
             to
             the
             Troupes
             ,
             as
             the
             Lord
             Marshall
             shall
             command
             him
             :
             He
             shall
             see
             them
             published
             in
             the
             Generals
             Quarter
             ,
             and
             before
             the
             Head
             of
             every
             Regiment
             ,
             being
             attended
             upon
             ,
             by
             the
             Provosts
             of
             every
             Regiment
             .
          
           
             He
             shall
             have
             the
             keeping
             of
             the
             Prisoners
             in
             the
             Army
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             by
             himself
             and
             his
             men
             ,
             he
             shall
             keep
             the
             chiefe
             Prisoners
             which
             are
             to
             be
             brought
             to
             Justice
             ,
             and
             shall
             direct
             the
             Provosts
             of
             everie
             Regiment
             ,
             how
             the
             Prisoners
             in
             their
             charge
             shall
             be
             kept
             .
          
           
             He
             shall
             have
             thus
             far
             forth
             command
             over
             all
             particular
             Provosts
             of
             the
             Armie
             ,
             and
             they
             shall
             give
             an
             account
             to
             him
             of
             all
             their
             Prisonners
             ,
             of
             the
             quality
             of
             their
             offences
             and
             of
             the
             informations
             against
             them
             ,
             yea
             ,
             as
             often
             as
             he
             shall
             direct
             and
             give
             up
             a
             note
             aswell
             of
             his
             owne
             prisoners
             ,
             as
             of
             the
             rest
             ,
             once
             every
             weeke
             to
             the
             Lord
             Marshall
             .
          
           
             He
             shall
             attend
             every
             Court
             day
             at
             the
             Generals
             ,
             or
             the
             Lord
             Marshals
             ,
             if
             it
             be
             held
             there
             ,
             and
             shall
             bring
             his
             Prisoners
             that
             are
             called
             thither
             ,
             safely
             to
             the
             Court
             ,
             with
             such
             informations
             and
             witnesses
             as
             are
             to
             be
             brought
             in
             against
             them
             ,
             and
             shall
             after
             they
             have
             bin
             heard
             ,
             and
             proceeded
             withall
             ,
             bring
             them
             back
             in
             safety
             ,
             and
             so
             keep
             them
             till
             he
             hath
             attended
             and
             known
             the
             further
             will
             of
             the
             Generall
             ,
             or
             in
             his
             absence
             ,
             of
             the
             Lord
             Marshall
             :
             Also
             he
             shall
             be
             bound
             to
             have
             his
             Executioner
             ,
             a
             place
             of
             execution
             ,
             and
             all
             things
             belonging
             unto
             it
             ,
             whensoever
             ,
             or
             wheresoever
             he
             shall
             be
             commanded
             by
             the
             Generall
             or
             Lord
             Marshal
             ,
             and
             he
             shal
             see
             the
             said
             executions
             so
             commanded
             ,
             to
             be
             duly
             performed
             .
          
           
             The
             Provost
             Marshall
             shall
             have
             thus
             far
             commandement
             over
             the
             Victuallers
             of
             the
             Army
             ,
             that
             he
             shall
             assigne
             them
             their
             Quarter
             in
             every
             Regiment
             ,
             and
             shall
             appoint
             what
             Victuallers
             are
             to
             attend
             every
             Regiment
             .
             Also
             he
             shall
             give
             order
             to
             the
             particular
             Provosts
             of
             every
             Regiment
             ,
             that
             they
             see
             no
             victuals
             sold
             but
             at
             convenient
             houres
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             prices
             of
             victuals
             and
             beere
             be
             reasonable
             ,
             and
             every
             Kan
             of
             Beer
             ,
             sold
             at
             that
             price
             as
             he
             hath
             marked
             upon
             the
             Barrell-head
             ,
             and
             as
             it
             is
             appointed
             him
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             further
             incident
             to
             his
             office
             ,
             to
             have
             account
             brought
             unto
             him
             of
             all
             prises
             of
             Cattle
             ,
             and
             other
             victuals
             that
             comes
             into
             the
             Army
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             preyes
             ,
             assoone
             as
             they
             are
             brought
             into
             the
             Quarter
             ,
             shall
             be
             shewed
             to
             him
             ,
             and
             by
             him
             to
             the
             Generall
             ,
             or
             the
             Commissary
             Generall
             of
             the
             victuals
             ,
             because
             it
             may
             be
             known
             whether
             those
             preyes
             be
             lawfull
             ,
             and
             how
             they
             ought
             to
             be
             devided
             .
          
           
             He
             shall
             by
             the
             particular
             Provosts
             of
             every
             Regiment
             and
             his
             men
             ,
             cause
             all
             entrailes
             of
             Beasts
             that
             are
             killed
             in
             or
             near
             the
             Quarter
             ,
             and
             all
             other
             garbidge
             and
             filth
             to
             be
             buried
             without
             the
             Campe
             ,
             and
             to
             see
             in
             all
             things
             else
             ,
             that
             the
             Quarters
             be
             kept
             sweet
             from
             noisome
             smells
             ,
             and
             the
             places
             adioyning
             clean
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             places
             for
             easement
             be
             prickt
             out
             at
             such
             a
             convenient
             distance
             ,
             as
             he
             shall
             in
             discretion
             set
             down
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             himself
             ,
             as
             often
             as
             he
             can
             conveniently
             ,
             shall
             visit
             the
             whole
             Quarters
             ,
             and
             to
             that
             end
             ,
             he
             shall
             cause
             the
             provosts
             of
             every
             Regiment
             ,
             and
             his
             owne
             men
             ,
             to
             visit
             the
             severall
             parts
             of
             the
             quarters
             every
             day
             .
          
           
             He
             shall
             have
             all
             his
             fees
             ,
             aswell
             in
             preyes
             that
             are
             taken
             ,
             as
             for
             the
             oversight
             of
             the
             victuals
             and
             beer
             ,
             and
             of
             all
             things
             else
             ,
             which
             do
             properly
             belong
             to
             the
             provost
             Marshall
             of
             an
             Army
             .
          
        
         
         
           
             Of
             the
             Marshall
             of
             a
             Regiment
             .
          
           
             THe
             masshall
             of
             a
             Regiment
             is
             to
             receive
             and
             keepe
             safely
             all
             such
             prisonners
             ,
             as
             are
             committed
             to
             his
             charge
             by
             the
             Chiefes
             ,
             Captaines
             ,
             and
             officers
             of
             the
             Regiment
             ,
             and
             if
             they
             be
             called
             to
             Iustice
             ,
             shall
             bring
             his
             Prisoners
             to
             the
             Marshall
             Generall
             ,
             to
             be
             carryed
             from
             thence
             to
             the
             Councell
             of
             Warre
             .
          
           
             Jt
             is
             also
             the
             duty
             of
             the
             Marshall
             of
             a
             Regiment
             ,
             to
             take
             speciall
             care
             that
             all
             women
             ,
             lacqueis
             ,
             servants
             ,
             bread
             ,
             and
             
               Aqua
               Vita
            
             sellers
             belonging
             to
             the
             Regiment
             ,
             shall
             march
             after
             their
             owne
             Regiment
             ,
             and
             not
             before
             ,
             or
             upon
             the
             flancks
             thereof
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             his
             office
             likewise
             to
             set
             such
             prizes
             upon
             Beree
             and
             Victuals
             ,
             as
             the
             Lord
             Marshall
             or
             the
             Serjant
             Majour
             Generall
             shall
             appoint
             him
             ,
             which
             order
             he
             shall
             receive
             from
             the
             Provost
             Marshall
             of
             the
             Army
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             sees
             it
             be
             duely
             executed
             within
             the
             circuit
             of
             the
             Regiment
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             Sutlars
             do
             not
             sell
             their
             beere
             and
             victuals
             above
             the
             set
             rate
             ,
             least
             they
             should
             grate
             upon
             the
             Souldiers
             :
             After
             the
             Captain
             of
             the
             watch
             hath
             gone
             the
             first
             round
             ,
             he
             is
             to
             see
             that
             the
             Sutlars
             keeps
             no
             tipling
             or
             drinking
             ,
             to
             commit
             any
             disorder
             in
             the
             night
             ,
             but
             make
             them
             put
             out
             their
             candle
             light
             and
             fires
             :
             During
             the
             time
             of
             divine
             service
             he
             is
             to
             go
             the
             round
             ,
             and
             see
             that
             there
             be
             no
             tipling
             or
             disorders
             committed
             in
             the
             Quarters
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Office
             of
             a
             Quartermaster
             Generall
             .
          
           
             FIrst
             he
             is
             to
             be
             at
             all
             removes
             ,
             and
             before
             the
             taking
             up
             of
             any
             quarter
             ,
             is
             to
             attend
             the
             Generall
             ,
             or
             the
             Marshall
             of
             the
             field
             ,
             to
             receive
             his
             directions
             ,
             where
             ,
             and
             in
             what
             place
             the
             Army
             is
             to
             be
             quartered
             ,
             and
             how
             the
             Avantguard
             ,
             the
             Battle
             ,
             and
             the
             Reere
             ,
             shall
             be
             distinguished
             .
          
           
             Having
             received
             then
             his
             directions
             ,
             and
             the
             Army
             drawing
             neare
             to
             the
             place
             assigned
             ,
             he
             and
             the
             Quartermasters
             of
             every
             Regiment
             ,
             rides
             before
             with
             a
             Guard
             of
             Horse
             and
             some
             firelocks
             ,
             to
             view
             and
             make
             choise
             of
             the
             Ground
             ,
             where
             the
             Army
             is
             to
             be
             quartered
             ,
             and
             there
             ordaines
             a
             quarter
             for
             the
             Generall
             ,
             the
             chiefe
             Officers
             of
             the
             field
             ,
             and
             their
             trains
             ,
             together
             with
             the
             Regiments
             of
             every
             
               Tercia
            
             or
             
               Brigade
               ,
            
             and
             gives
             out
             the
             ground
             ,
             and
             houses
             to
             the
             quartermaster
             of
             each
             
               Brigade
               ,
            
             and
             they
             to
             the
             Quartermasters
             of
             the
             particular
             Regiments
             ,
             who
             drawes
             out
             the
             quarters
             in
             that
             order
             and
             forme
             ,
             as
             the
             Lord
             Generall
             hath
             prescribed
             ,
             and
             as
             the
             figure
             thereof
             following
             shall
             demonstrate
             .
          
           
             Jt
             is
             also
             his
             office
             to
             direct
             the
             Quartermaster
             of
             every
             Regiment
             ,
             that
             in
             laying
             out
             their
             quarters
             ,
             they
             observe
             that
             forme
             which
             the
             Generall
             hath
             commanded
             ,
             that
             is
             proportion
             for
             proportion
             ,
             and
             to
             see
             that
             all
             places
             of
             armes
             ,
             streets
             ,
             sallies
             ,
             and
             all
             things
             else
             ,
             be
             answerable
             ,
             and
             sees
             that
             every
             quarter
             be
             made
             according
             to
             that
             modell
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Office
             of
             the
             Quartermaster
             of
             a
             Regiment
             .
          
           
             THe
             quartermaster
             of
             a
             Regiment
             in
             all
             charges
             is
             to
             attend
             the
             quartermaster
             generall
             to
             receive
             his
             directions
             ,
             and
             takes
             the
             place
             ,
             ground
             ,
             and
             houses
             appointed
             by
             him
             for
             the
             quarter
             and
             lodging
             of
             his
             Regiment
             ,
             and
             then
             drawes
             out
             his
             quarter
             ,
             for
             the
             companies
             his
             Colonels
             ,
             and
             the
             officers
             of
             the
             field
             ,
             and
             for
             every
             Captaine
             of
             his
             Regiment
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             order
             of
             their
             march
             and
             their
             seignorities
             in
             the
             Regiment
             ,
             distributing
             and
             giving
             to
             a
             Sariant
             of
             every
             Company
             of
             the
             Regiment
             ,
             who
             are
             to
             assist
             and
             attend
             him
             ,
             the
             depth
             ,
             length
             and
             breadth
             ,
             of
             the
             quarter
             with
             the
             distances
             of
             the
             
               alarme
               place
            
             betweene
             the
             head
             of
             the
             quarter
             and
             the
             trench
             ,
             and
             the
             true
             distance
             betweene
             devision
             and
             division
             of
             the
             regiments
             ,
             as
             also
             when
             the
             regiment
             is
             to
             be
             quartered
             in
             Villages
             ,
             and
             houses
             ,
             he
             is
             also
             to
             observe
             that
             forme
             and
             directions
             which
             the
             quartermaster
             Generall
             shall
             give
             him
             .
          
        
         
         
           
             The
             Office
             of
             a
             Trench-Master
             .
          
           
             BEcause
             as
             Quarter-master
             he
             shall
             know
             the
             Ground
             that
             is
             laid
             out
             :
             so
             he
             is
             to
             exercise
             the
             office
             of
             the
             Trench-master
             in
             the
             Outworkes
             of
             the
             quarter
             ,
             as
             he
             doth
             of
             Quartermaster
             within
             ,
             these
             two
             offices
             having
             affinity
             the
             one
             with
             the
             other
             ,
             and
             therefore
             he
             must
             set
             out
             distance
             between
             the
             quarter
             and
             the
             Trench
             ,
             or
             Rampier
             ,
             with
             the
             breadth
             and
             depth
             of
             the
             ditch
             ,
             and
             the
             height
             of
             the
             Trench
             ,
             be
             the
             quarter
             altogether
             entrenched
             or
             in
             part
             ,
             as
             he
             shall
             receive
             his
             direction
             ,
             either
             from
             the
             Generall
             ,
             or
             the
             Marshall
             ,
             as
             also
             the
             proportion
             of
             all
             outworks
             ,
             as
             Flankes
             ,
             Mounts
             ,
             Batteries
             ,
             and
             other
             works
             that
             shall
             be
             appointed
             .
          
           
             As
             it
             is
             shown
             what
             is
             the
             duty
             of
             a
             Trench-master
             in
             encamping
             :
             so
             in
             marching
             he
             is
             to
             give
             direction
             for
             the
             making
             of
             waies
             or
             
               Explanadoes
            
             for
             the
             passing
             of
             the
             Troupes
             ,
             and
             marching
             of
             the
             Ordnance
             and
             Carriages
             ,
             according
             as
             he
             shall
             receive
             his
             order
             ,
             from
             the
             Generall
             or
             Marshall
             ,
             provided
             that
             in
             making
             wayes
             for
             the
             Artillery
             ,
             he
             take
             the
             Quartermaster
             along
             with
             him
             ,
             assigned
             by
             the
             Generall
             of
             the
             Ordnance
             for
             that
             purpose
             and
             that
             the
             Carriage
             master
             or
             conductor
             of
             the
             Artillery
             and
             carriages
             ,
             go
             also
             with
             him
             .
          
           
             In
             all
             Approches
             he
             is
             to
             take
             charge
             of
             the
             Trenches
             ,
             and
             other
             works
             made
             in
             them
             ,
             and
             after
             he
             hath
             received
             direction
             from
             the
             Generall
             or
             Marshal
             ,
             he
             shall
             give
             directions
             to
             all
             those
             that
             work
             ,
             and
             see
             that
             the
             works
             be
             made
             in
             such
             sort
             as
             they
             are
             appointed
             :
             In
             which
             service
             both
             Pyonniers
             ,
             workemen
             ,
             and
             commanded
             men
             shall
             obey
             him
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             an
             Inginier
             .
          
           
             AN
             Jnginier
             ought
             to
             be
             a
             man
             very
             skilfull
             and
             experienced
             in
             
               Arithmetick
               ,
               Geometry
            
             and
             the
             
               Mathematicks
               ,
            
             and
             before
             he
             begins
             to
             breake
             ground
             ,
             or
             runs
             his
             lines
             of
             Approches
             ,
             he
             ought
             to
             consider
             well
             the
             scituation
             of
             the
             place
             ,
             and
             to
             have
             regard
             to
             the
             propriety
             and
             nature
             of
             the
             place
             ,
             whither
             it
             be
             high
             ground
             ,
             low
             ,
             plain
             or
             hillie
             .
          
           
             By
             day
             he
             viewes
             well
             the
             ground
             ,
             that
             he
             may
             the
             better
             run
             his
             approches
             by
             night
             ,
             in
             setting
             out
             his
             sticks
             and
             markes
             ,
             that
             he
             may
             place
             his
             men
             ,
             to
             get
             speedily
             into
             the
             ground
             with
             the
             more
             safety
             ,
             and
             as
             he
             advances
             to
             make
             the
             Corpses
             of
             Guard
             ,
             and
             the
             batteries
             upon
             the
             most
             advantagious
             places
             ,
             for
             if
             he
             should
             mistake
             his
             ground
             ,
             and
             not
             runne
             his
             line
             and
             approach
             well
             by
             turning
             and
             winding
             it
             ,
             and
             carrying
             it
             from
             the
             Bulwarks
             ,
             Flanks
             and
             outworkes
             of
             a
             Towne
             or
             Fort
             ,
             he
             may
             endanger
             the
             lives
             of
             many
             men
             ,
             and
             therefore
             it
             behooves
             him
             to
             be
             very
             circumspect
             and
             carefull
             ,
             but
             of
             this
             we
             will
             speak
             more
             at
             large
             ,
             when
             we
             come
             to
             handle
             Approaches
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Office
             of
             the
             Commissary
             Generall
             of
             the
             Victuals
             .
          
           
             HE
             is
             to
             take
             charge
             of
             all
             the
             Victuals
             prepared
             for
             the
             Army
             ,
             aswell
             by
             water
             as
             by
             land
             ,
             and
             to
             see
             either
             by
             himself
             or
             his
             Ministers
             the
             proportion
             of
             Victuals
             to
             be
             duely
             distributed
             to
             the
             souldiers
             ,
             and
             Marriners
             ,
             as
             the
             Generall
             or
             the
             Admirall
             shall
             direct
             him
             .
          
           
             All
             Pursers
             ,
             Stewards
             ,
             and
             all
             other
             ,
             that
             shall
             in
             any
             ship
             have
             charge
             ,
             and
             the
             oversight
             of
             the
             Victuals
             (
             as
             also
             all
             under
             Commissers
             and
             Conductors
             of
             victuals
             by
             land
             )
             shall
             upon
             the
             discovery
             of
             the
             extraordinary
             wasting
             ,
             spoyling
             ,
             or
             miscarrying
             of
             Victuals
             ,
             presently
             give
             notice
             thereof
             to
             the
             Generall
             ,
             or
             to
             the
             Commissary
             Generall
             of
             the
             Victuals
             ,
             that
             he
             may
             presently
             take
             order
             about
             them
             .
          
           
             Wheresoever
             the
             Army
             shall
             land
             ,
             march
             ,
             or
             lodge
             ,
             all
             the
             victuals
             found
             in
             such
             places
             ,
             shall
             be
             seized
             upon
             by
             him
             ,
             and
             a
             proportion
             set
             out
             by
             him
             for
             the
             present
             use
             of
             the
             Troupes
             ,
             there
             quartered
             ,
             and
             the
             rest
             reserved
             as
             part
             of
             the
             generall
             store
             and
             Magazine
             of
             victuals
             ,
             and
             to
             that
             end
             ,
             he
             himselfe
             shall
             go
             ,
             or
             send
             an
             under
             officer
             ,
             or
             the
             clarke
             to
             attend
             the
             Lord
             Marshall
             ,
             or
             Quarter
             master
             generall
             ,
             when
             he
             goes
             to
             view
             and
             appoint
             him
             his
             quarter
             .
          
           
           
             He
             shall
             keep
             a
             list
             of
             all
             the
             Bakers
             ,
             Millers
             ,
             and
             Butchers
             in
             the
             Army
             ,
             and
             of
             all
             others
             that
             are
             used
             about
             the
             provisions
             of
             Victuals
             ,
             that
             he
             may
             set
             them
             on
             work
             ,
             as
             the
             occasion
             ,
             and
             the
             service
             may
             require
             .
          
           
             All
             ovens
             ,
             and
             instruments
             of
             mils
             ,
             for
             grinding
             ,
             baking
             ,
             or
             for
             preparing
             ,
             bestowing
             ,
             carrying
             ,
             or
             for
             the
             preserving
             of
             Victuals
             and
             provisions
             ,
             shall
             be
             under
             his
             charge
             ,
             and
             he
             shall
             have
             authority
             to
             use
             and
             dispose
             of
             them
             for
             the
             publick
             service
             .
          
           
             Jf
             any
             prizes
             of
             Victuals
             shall
             be
             taken
             at
             Sea
             or
             by
             Land
             ,
             the
             Commissarie
             Generall
             of
             the
             Victuals
             shall
             take
             a
             note
             and
             inventary
             thereof
             ,
             and
             appoint
             some
             officer
             of
             his
             to
             take
             charge
             over
             them
             .
          
           
             Jf
             any
             preyes
             be
             taken
             by
             Land
             ,
             he
             shall
             likewise
             keep
             an
             inventary
             of
             them
             ,
             and
             view
             them
             himself
             ,
             and
             shall
             make
             the
             devision
             ,
             as
             the
             Generall
             shall
             direct
             him
             ,
             or
             in
             his
             absence
             ;
             the
             Marshall
             of
             the
             feild
             .
          
           
             He
             shall
             give
             out
             no
             Victuals
             but
             by
             speciall
             order
             and
             warrant
             from
             the
             Generall
             ,
             and
             from
             time
             to
             time
             ,
             he
             shall
             give
             up
             unto
             him
             a
             perfect
             account
             of
             the
             Wast
             ,
             spoyling
             ,
             or
             miscarrying
             of
             Victuals
             ,
             either
             in
             the
             Armie
             by
             Sea
             ,
             or
             by
             Land
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Cariage
             Master
             his
             Office
             .
          
           
             HE
             is
             with
             asmuch
             authority
             to
             order
             and
             marshall
             all
             the
             Carriages
             of
             the
             Army
             ,
             as
             the
             Serjeant
             Majour
             Generall
             is
             to
             marshall
             the
             Troupes
             .
          
           
             He
             shall
             see
             the
             carriages
             of
             the
             Munition
             first
             placed
             in
             the
             best
             and
             safest
             places
             ,
             next
             the
             carriages
             and
             traine
             of
             the
             Generall
             ,
             and
             the
             chiefe
             officers
             of
             the
             Field
             ,
             the
             next
             by
             turnes
             :
             but
             because
             the
             incumbrances
             of
             Carriages
             may
             often
             times
             disorder
             the
             whole
             troupes
             ,
             he
             shall
             receive
             his
             directions
             from
             the
             Seriant
             Majour
             Generall
             of
             the
             Armie
             ,
             where
             his
             charge
             shall
             march
             ,
             though
             the
             particular
             disposing
             and
             ordering
             of
             the
             carriages
             be
             left
             to
             himself
             .
          
           
             He
             shall
             have
             three
             severall
             men
             ,
             or
             officers
             under
             him
             called
             Conductors
             ,
             to
             attend
             upon
             the
             severall
             devisions
             of
             the
             Carriages
             ,
             as
             sometimes
             upon
             the
             baggage
             of
             the
             Avantguard
             ,
             the
             Battle
             ,
             and
             the
             Reere
             :
             sometimes
             upon
             the
             Carriages
             of
             the
             munition
             and
             Ordnance
             ;
             the
             Generals
             and
             chiefe
             Officers
             carriages
             ,
             so
             that
             in
             the
             order
             of
             the
             march
             ,
             they
             shall
             be
             devided
             into
             three
             bodies
             ,
             and
             he
             shall
             have
             some
             smiths
             ,
             carpenters
             ,
             and
             wheel-wrights
             attending
             upon
             every
             severall
             division
             :
             His
             best
             order
             in
             marshalling
             the
             carriages
             ,
             will
             be
             to
             observe
             the
             same
             order
             ,
             as
             the
             Sariant
             Maiour
             doth
             in
             marshalling
             the
             Regiments
             which
             by
             the
             Provost
             Marshall
             of
             every
             Regiment
             ,
             he
             may
             give
             notice
             to
             all
             those
             that
             goe
             along
             with
             the
             carriages
             .
          
           
             His
             direction
             being
             given
             ,
             he
             shall
             oversee
             the
             whole
             order
             of
             March
             for
             all
             the
             carriages
             ,
             and
             shall
             cause
             the
             Provosts
             of
             the
             severall
             Regiments
             to
             keep
             the
             same
             order
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Muster
             Masters
             Office
             .
          
           
             HE
             having
             received
             his
             orders
             ,
             he
             shall
             make
             a
             generall
             muster
             of
             the
             whole
             Army
             before
             it
             be
             embarqued
             ,
             or
             marches
             ,
             and
             keep
             a
             perfect
             list
             of
             the
             number
             of
             Armes
             ,
             whereof
             he
             shall
             deliver
             a
             true
             list
             to
             the
             Generall
             ,
             that
             he
             may
             know
             the
             strength
             of
             the
             Army
             .
             He
             is
             to
             make
             reviewes
             ,
             as
             often
             as
             the
             Generall
             ,
             or
             in
             his
             absence
             ,
             the
             Marshall
             of
             the
             Feild
             shall
             appoint
             him
             ,
             and
             alter
             his
             list
             ,
             as
             he
             sees
             it
             alter
             in
             strength
             ,
             and
             to
             keep
             notes
             of
             the
             alteration
             ,
             betwixt
             every
             muster
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             diminishing
             of
             the
             strength
             of
             the
             troupes
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             when
             men
             are
             slain
             upon
             service
             ,
             and
             what
             are
             dead
             of
             sicknesse
             ,
             and
             what
             men
             are
             run
             away
             ,
             or
             diseharged
             by
             pasport
             .
          
           
             He
             shall
             be
             obeyed
             and
             respected
             in
             the
             execution
             of
             his
             office
             ,
             no
             Colonell
             or
             Captain
             shall
             refuse
             to
             shew
             him
             their
             men
             ,
             whensoever
             he
             shall
             require
             them
             ,
             either
             from
             the
             State
             or
             the
             Generall
             .
          
        
         
         
           
             Of
             the
             three
             chiefe
             Officers
             of
             a
             Regiment
             ,
             and
             first
             of
             the
             Seriant
             Majour
             .
          
           
             THe
             Sariant
             Maiour
             of
             a
             Regiment
             ought
             to
             be
             a
             valliant
             man
             ,
             an
             old
             Souldier
             ,
             and
             one
             that
             is
             well
             experienced
             in
             the
             way
             of
             his
             profession
             :
             upon
             all
             occasions
             his
             place
             gives
             him
             accesse
             to
             the
             Generall
             ,
             to
             the
             Marshall
             of
             the
             Field
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             Sariant
             Majour
             Generall
             of
             the
             Army
             ,
             to
             know
             ,
             how
             and
             in
             what
             manner
             his
             Colonels
             Regiment
             is
             to
             march
             ,
             whether
             in
             one
             body
             alone
             ,
             or
             else
             in
             two
             devisions
             ioyned
             with
             others
             .
          
           
             Whereupon
             he
             gives
             order
             how
             the
             Regiment
             is
             to
             be
             marshalled
             and
             ordered
             ,
             in
             what
             forme
             the
             Companies
             are
             to
             draw
             ,
             and
             when
             upon
             any
             service
             they
             are
             disbanded
             ,
             how
             to
             really
             them
             again
             ,
             as
             is
             required
             .
          
           
             He
             receives
             his
             orders
             and
             commands
             either
             immediately
             from
             the
             Generall
             ,
             as
             is
             said
             ,
             or
             from
             the
             Marshall
             ,
             or
             Sarjant
             Maiour
             Generall
             ,
             whether
             the
             Regiment
             be
             to
             march
             in
             the
             Avantguard
             ,
             Battle
             or
             Reere
             ,
             he
             ought
             to
             have
             some
             knowledge
             how
             the
             Countrie
             lies
             ,
             through
             which
             the
             Army
             is
             to
             march
             ,
             whether
             over
             a
             spacious
             Campaignie
             in
             battail
             ,
             or
             through
             narrow
             passages
             ,
             woods
             ,
             over
             rivers
             ,
             or
             the
             like
             ,
             by
             drawing
             out
             of
             files
             ,
             as
             the
             ground
             and
             passage
             will
             afford
             ,
             as
             also
             what
             order
             and
             forme
             the
             Regiment
             is
             to
             keepe
             ,
             if
             they
             should
             be
             charged
             with
             Horse
             ,
             have
             Ordnance
             playing
             upon
             them
             ,
             or
             being
             troubled
             with
             baggage
             .
          
           
             Jn
             the
             presence
             of
             his
             Colonel
             and
             lieutenant
             Colonel
             ,
             he
             is
             to
             be
             an
             assistant
             to
             them
             in
             seeing
             all
             orders
             and
             directions
             executed
             and
             performed
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             absence
             of
             them
             both
             ,
             to
             have
             the
             same
             authority
             and
             command
             ,
             as
             the
             Colonell
             or
             Lievetenant
             Colonell
             shall
             have
             .
          
           
             In
             marching
             or
             embattailing
             he
             shall
             keepe
             as
             neere
             the
             middest
             of
             the
             Regiment
             as
             he
             can
             ,
             either
             in
             the
             Front
             ,
             the
             Reere
             ,
             or
             upon
             either
             flank
             ,
             so
             as
             he
             may
             best
             overlook
             and
             observe
             the
             order
             of
             their
             march
             or
             embattailling
             .
          
           
             The
             Regiment
             being
             drawn
             up
             in
             devisions
             ,
             he
             gives
             to
             every
             Captain
             and
             Officer
             his
             place
             ,
             according
             to
             his
             Seignority
             ,
             and
             withall
             commands
             the
             Drum-majour
             and
             the
             other
             Drumms
             to
             beat
             a
             March
             ,
             and
             to
             move
             all
             at
             an
             instant
             ,
             and
             sees
             that
             the
             Souldiers
             keeps
             well
             their
             rankes
             and
             files
             ,
             and
             none
             to
             disbandie
             themselves
             ,
             or
             straggle
             .
          
           
             He
             is
             to
             come
             every
             morning
             and
             evening
             to
             the
             Sarjant
             maiour
             Generall
             of
             the
             Army
             or
             to
             the
             Sarjant
             Majour
             of
             that
             Brigade
             or
             Tercia
             ,
             to
             receive
             the
             word
             and
             orders
             from
             him
             ,
             if
             there
             be
             no
             extraordinary
             cause
             to
             hinder
             him
             ,
             and
             when
             he
             hath
             received
             the
             word
             from
             the
             Serjant
             Majour
             Generall
             ,
             or
             from
             the
             Serjant
             Maiour
             of
             the
             Tercia
             ,
             his
             Colonell
             and
             Lieutenant
             Colonell
             being
             present
             in
             the
             quarter
             ,
             he
             gives
             them
             first
             the
             word
             and
             the
             orders
             ,
             and
             afterward
             delivers
             it
             over
             to
             the
             Sariant
             of
             every
             Company
             of
             the
             Regiment
             ,
             drawn
             in
             a
             ring
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Seignority
             of
             their
             Captaines
             ,
             which
             are
             to
             come
             and
             attend
             upon
             him
             for
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             As
             he
             doth
             receive
             directions
             for
             marching
             ,
             embattailling
             ,
             viewing
             of
             ground
             ,
             and
             placing
             of
             Guards
             ,
             from
             the
             Sariant
             Maiour
             Generall
             ,
             or
             the
             Sariant
             Maiour
             of
             that
             Brigade
             :
             so
             he
             is
             to
             deliver
             them
             over
             to
             the
             Captaines
             ,
             and
             Officers
             of
             that
             regiment
             ,
             and
             to
             call
             upon
             them
             to
             whom
             it
             appertaines
             ,
             to
             see
             them
             duely
             executed
             .
          
           
             Every
             night
             he
             is
             to
             visite
             all
             the
             guardes
             of
             that
             regiment
             ,
             and
             to
             keep
             duely
             the
             turnes
             of
             their
             Watches
             ,
             and
             marches
             ,
             (
             that
             one
             Captaine
             or
             Company
             may
             not
             do
             more
             duty
             then
             an
             other
             )
             as
             also
             in
             sending
             out
             Troupes
             upon
             service
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             that
             both
             the
             honor
             and
             the
             labour
             may
             be
             equally
             devided
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             also
             his
             duty
             to
             speak
             for
             ammunition
             ,
             as
             powder
             ,
             bullets
             ,
             and
             match
             ,
             and
             for
             victuals
             for
             the
             regiment
             if
             there
             should
             be
             any
             want
             ,
             and
             to
             see
             them
             equally
             distributed
             to
             the
             Companies
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             proportion
             given
             out
             ,
             and
             finally
             to
             give
             order
             and
             proportion
             for
             the
             number
             of
             workemen
             ,
             or
             commanded
             men
             of
             the
             regiment
             which
             are
             to
             go
             to
             worke
             .
          
        
         
         
           
             Of
             a
             Lieutenant
             Colonell
             .
          
           
             THe
             next
             place
             above
             a
             Sariant
             Maiour
             is
             a
             Lieutenant
             Colonell
             ,
             which
             is
             an
             honorable
             charge
             ,
             when
             his
             Colonell
             is
             present
             he
             is
             to
             obey
             him
             ,
             in
             seeing
             all
             the
             commands
             and
             directions
             that
             are
             delivered
             by
             any
             publick
             officer
             ,
             or
             such
             as
             shall
             be
             within
             the
             authority
             of
             a
             Colonell
             himself
             ,
             to
             be
             duely
             executed
             in
             the
             absence
             of
             his
             Colonell
             ,
             having
             as
             absolute
             command
             and
             authority
             over
             the
             Regiment
             as
             the
             Colonell
             hath
             himselfe
             ,
          
           
             In
             marching
             or
             embattailling
             if
             the
             Regiment
             consists
             but
             of
             one
             devision
             ,
             whensoever
             the
             Colonell
             is
             in
             the
             head
             of
             his
             Regiment
             ,
             his
             place
             is
             to
             bring
             up
             the
             Reere
             of
             the
             Regiment
             ,
             but
             if
             it
             consists
             of
             two
             devisions
             ,
             then
             the
             Colonell
             leads
             the
             first
             ,
             and
             the
             Lieutenant
             Colonell
             the
             second
             ,
             but
             when
             his
             Colonell
             shall
             be
             in
             the
             Reere
             marching
             from
             an
             Enemy
             ,
             his
             place
             is
             then
             to
             be
             in
             the
             head
             of
             the
             Regiment
             .
          
           
             Jf
             the
             Regiment
             consists
             of
             two
             Battaillons
             his
             devision
             is
             to
             quarter
             and
             lodge
             on
             the
             left
             hand
             of
             his
             Colonels
             ,
             and
             himself
             in
             the
             Reere
             of
             his
             owne
             Companie
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             a
             Colonell
             .
          
           
             THe
             Colonell
             of
             a
             Regiment
             hath
             a
             very
             honorable
             command
             ,
             and
             is
             called
             in
             Spanish
             
               Maestro
               del
               Campo
               ,
            
             that
             is
             ,
             one
             of
             the
             masters
             of
             the
             Feild
             ,
             and
             therefore
             ought
             to
             be
             a
             man
             of
             authority
             and
             respect
             ,
             having
             absolute
             command
             and
             authority
             over
             the
             Captaines
             and
             Officers
             of
             his
             Regiment
             ,
             and
             all
             such
             are
             to
             respect
             and
             obey
             his
             commands
             ,
             as
             fully
             as
             they
             would
             do
             the
             chiefest
             Commanders
             ,
             and
             ought
             to
             love
             and
             honour
             him
             ,
             which
             his
             valour
             ,
             wisedome
             and
             discretion
             will
             acquire
             him
             .
          
           
             Also
             he
             is
             to
             see
             ,
             that
             all
             orders
             ,
             commands
             and
             directions
             ,
             which
             are
             delivered
             him
             by
             the
             publick
             Officers
             of
             the
             Army
             ,
             for
             guards
             ,
             marches
             ,
             quartering
             ,
             or
             any
             thing
             else
             ,
             as
             for
             matter
             of
             Iustice
             ,
             for
             ordering
             of
             the
             Troupes
             ,
             and
             furtherance
             of
             the
             service
             ,
             be
             duely
             executed
             and
             performed
             within
             his
             owne
             Troupes
             :
             Further
             ,
             if
             he
             himselfe
             do
             find
             any
             mutinie
             ,
             or
             any
             discontented
             humors
             tending
             to
             mutinie
             ,
             extreme
             outrage
             or
             disorder
             ,
             or
             shall
             be
             by
             any
             of
             his
             Captaines
             ,
             Officers
             or
             Souldiers
             informed
             of
             any
             such
             thing
             ,
             he
             shall
             forthwith
             advertise
             the
             Lord
             Generall
             or
             Marshall
             of
             the
             Feild
             :
             And
             if
             he
             find
             any
             other
             fault
             ,
             negligence
             ,
             or
             swarving
             from
             the
             directions
             or
             policy
             of
             the
             Army
             set
             down
             ,
             he
             shall
             straightway
             acquaint
             them
             by
             whom
             such
             direction
             came
             ,
             or
             was
             to
             come
             unto
             him
             ,
             or
             some
             other
             superior
             Officer
             ,
             and
             shall
             produce
             the
             party
             so
             offending
             with
             the
             Witnesses
             and
             Proofes
             ,
             that
             order
             may
             be
             given
             forthwith
             ,
             and
             Iustice
             done
             :
             And
             if
             he
             faile
             to
             give
             this
             information
             of
             any
             thing
             he
             knows
             or
             heares
             of
             ,
             he
             shall
             be
             thought
             deeply
             faulty
             ,
             and
             if
             any
             such
             things
             passe
             without
             his
             knowledge
             ,
             he
             shall
             be
             thought
             of
             worse
             government
             then
             befits
             a
             man
             of
             his
             place
             and
             charge
             .
          
           
             Vpon
             marches
             the
             Colonell
             shall
             be
             at
             the
             end
             of
             his
             Troupes
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             next
             to
             the
             Enemy
             in
             the
             head
             of
             his
             Regiment
             going
             towards
             an
             Enemy
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             Reere
             comming
             off
             ,
             and
             is
             not
             to
             go
             from
             thence
             ,
             except
             it
             be
             for
             the
             ordering
             of
             his
             Troups
             ,
             or
             for
             some
             extraordinary
             occasion
             ,
             as
             to
             attend
             the
             Generall
             ,
             or
             the
             chiefe
             officers
             of
             the
             field
             .
          
           
             He
             is
             also
             to
             see
             and
             command
             the
             Officers
             of
             his
             Regiment
             ,
             that
             their
             men
             be
             well
             armed
             and
             duely
             exercised
             .
          
           
             A
             Colonell
             being
             one
             of
             the
             chiefe
             Officers
             of
             the
             Feild
             ,
             ought
             to
             be
             called
             to
             take
             councell
             and
             advice
             with
             the
             Generall
             ,
             especially
             when
             any
             peece
             of
             service
             is
             to
             be
             done
             ,
             or
             in
             the
             day
             of
             Battell
             ,
             which
             concernes
             his
             charge
             ,
             where
             he
             may
             freely
             speake
             his
             opinion
             ,
             and
             give
             his
             advice
             touching
             matters
             of
             weight
             and
             importance
             ,
             and
             though
             his
             opinion
             may
             be
             good
             ,
             yet
             if
             the
             most
             voices
             be
             of
             the
             contrary
             opinion
             ,
             and
             that
             things
             in
             the
             execution
             thereof
             fall
             out
             ill
             and
             contrary
             to
             his
             owne
             opinion
             ,
             he
             ought
             neverthelesse
             to
             give
             way
             and
             yeeld
             to
             the
             plurality
             of
             voices
             ,
             and
             wholy
             obeying
             his
             Generall
             be
             readye
             
             to
             execute
             all
             his
             commands
             ,
             giving
             thereby
             to
             understand
             that
             the
             contrary
             opinion
             held
             by
             him
             in
             the
             Councell
             of
             Warre
             ,
             was
             neither
             for
             want
             of
             courage
             nor
             affection
             .
          
           
             A
             Colonell
             also
             ought
             to
             give
             all
             respect
             ,
             love
             ,
             and
             obedience
             to
             the
             Generall
             of
             the
             Army
             ,
             the
             Lord
             Marshall
             ,
             and
             the
             Sariant
             Maiour
             generall
             of
             the
             Field
             ,
             as
             having
             charge
             from
             the
             Generall
             to
             give
             out
             orders
             ,
             as
             also
             to
             quarter
             and
             appoint
             alarme
             places
             ,
             the
             place
             of
             Battle
             ,
             for
             marching
             ,
             choosing
             of
             Guards
             ,
             and
             sending
             out
             of
             convoies
             .
             Moreover
             the
             Colonell
             once
             every
             weeke
             ,
             may
             call
             together
             all
             his
             Captaines
             to
             enquire
             of
             all
             offences
             hapned
             in
             his
             Regiment
             ,
             and
             examine
             duely
             the
             nature
             and
             quality
             of
             such
             offences
             ,
             and
             to
             prepare
             the
             cause
             for
             a
             more
             short
             and
             easie
             heareing
             in
             a
             Marshall
             Court
             ,
             for
             all
             Colonels
             are
             to
             repair
             to
             a
             court
             of
             Warre
             as
             often
             as
             they
             shall
             be
             warned
             ,
             as
             an
             assistant
             to
             the
             Lord
             Marshall
             ,
             and
             the
             president
             of
             the
             Councill
             of
             warre
             ,
             for
             all
             causes
             that
             shall
             be
             questioned
             there
             ,
             belonging
             to
             the
             Iustice
             of
             the
             Army
             .
          
           
             Finally
             in
             quartering
             ,
             or
             lodging
             ,
             if
             his
             Regiment
             consists
             of
             two
             devisions
             ,
             his
             quarter
             is
             in
             the
             devision
             ,
             that
             is
             betweene
             his
             two
             battaillons
             assigned
             for
             his
             Regiment
             ,
             because
             he
             may
             give
             best
             and
             speedy
             directions
             to
             the
             whole
             ,
             this
             shall
             be
             showne
             more
             particularly
             ,
             when
             we
             come
             to
             draw
             out
             the
             quarter
             for
             a
             Colonell
             and
             his
             Regiment
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             Sarjant
             Majour
             Generall
             of
             an
             Armie
             .
          
           
             THe
             Office
             of
             a
             Sariant
             Maiour
             Generall
             of
             an
             Army
             is
             a
             place
             and
             charge
             of
             a
             high
             degree
             ,
             whose
             command
             is
             full
             of
             action
             ,
             and
             therefore
             he
             ought
             to
             be
             an
             able
             ,
             a
             wise
             ,
             a
             grave
             and
             able
             person
             experienced
             in
             the
             way
             of
             his
             profession
             .
          
           
             He
             is
             to
             come
             to
             the
             Lord
             Generall
             or
             Lord
             Marshall
             for
             his
             orders
             and
             directions
             for
             all
             watches
             and
             Guards
             that
             are
             to
             be
             placed
             ,
             and
             upon
             the
             charge
             of
             a
             quarter
             or
             a
             remove
             he
             is
             to
             march
             with
             the
             Lord
             Generall
             or
             Marshall
             in
             the
             Avantguard
             (
             after
             he
             hath
             seen
             the
             Troupes
             setled
             in
             the
             order
             of
             their
             march
             )
             and
             to
             view
             well
             the
             places
             appointed
             him
             by
             the
             Generall
             or
             marshall
             for
             the
             placing
             of
             the
             Guards
             ,
             upon
             the
             very
             first
             Arrivall
             of
             the
             Troupes
             .
          
           
             Having
             received
             the
             word
             ,
             and
             his
             orders
             from
             the
             Generall
             ,
             or
             the
             Marshall
             ,
             he
             gives
             them
             to
             the
             three
             Sariant
             Maiours
             of
             the
             Tercias
             ,
             called
             also
             the
             three
             Corporals
             of
             the
             Feild
             ,
             and
             they
             give
             both
             the
             word
             and
             orders
             to
             the
             Sariant
             Maiours
             of
             every
             particular
             Regiment
             .
          
           
             He
             himselfe
             in
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             night
             ,
             after
             the
             warning
             peece
             is
             gone
             off
             ,
             and
             that
             all
             guards
             are
             setled
             ,
             he
             is
             to
             visit
             them
             ,
             and
             gives
             order
             to
             the
             three
             sariant
             maiours
             or
             grand
             Corporals
             of
             the
             field
             ,
             which
             attend
             upon
             the
             Avantguard
             ,
             the
             Battell
             ,
             and
             the
             Reere
             ,
             at
             what
             time
             they
             (
             or
             some
             chiefe
             Officer
             of
             the
             feild
             )
             shall
             go
             the
             grand
             round
             ,
             and
             if
             he
             or
             they
             finde
             any
             thing
             amisse
             ,
             or
             any
             thing
             extraordinary
             discovered
             ,
             either
             when
             he
             goeth
             himselfe
             ,
             or
             one
             of
             the
             three
             Sariant
             Maiours
             of
             the
             Brigades
             ,
             or
             any
             other
             chiefe
             Office
             ,
             they
             are
             to
             give
             him
             an
             account
             of
             what
             they
             find
             amisse
             ,
             and
             he
             is
             to
             advertize
             the
             Lord
             Generall
             or
             marshall
             therewith
             .
          
           
             In
             a
             day
             of
             Battell
             or
             any
             kind
             of
             skirmish
             or
             fight
             ,
             he
             is
             to
             receive
             his
             directions
             from
             the
             Lord
             Generall
             or
             Marshall
             ,
             and
             to
             see
             them
             duely
             executed
             .
          
           
             Also
             in
             a
             day
             of
             Battell
             he
             hath
             the
             ordering
             and
             disposing
             of
             the
             devisions
             and
             battaillons
             ,
             according
             to
             that
             forme
             which
             the
             Generall
             shall
             command
             him
             ,
             and
             upon
             all
             occasions
             must
             be
             active
             and
             stirring
             up
             and
             downe
             ,
             to
             spye
             out
             all
             advantages
             ,
             which
             might
             offend
             an
             Enemy
             ,
             and
             wisely
             to
             foresee
             all
             disadvantages
             which
             might
             bring
             the
             Troupes
             into
             any
             disorder
             or
             confusion
             .
          
           
             Moreover
             he
             is
             to
             be
             the
             chiefe
             Officer
             with
             the
             Quartermaster
             Generall
             which
             is
             to
             be
             at
             the
             Randevous
             for
             the
             disposing
             of
             the
             Troupes
             of
             Horse
             and
             foote
             ,
             as
             also
             by
             giving
             out
             orders
             for
             the
             providing
             them
             with
             ammunition
             and
             victuals
             .
          
           
             And
             being
             arrived
             first
             at
             the
             Randevous
             ,
             he
             is
             to
             give
             the
             Lord
             Generall
             and
             the
             marshall
             of
             the
             feild
             to
             understand
             the
             state
             of
             the
             army
             ,
             that
             the
             Lord
             Generall
             thereupon
             may
             give
             him
             command
             and
             direction
             ,
             how
             &
             in
             what
             manner
             the
             army
             is
             to
             be
             ordered
             ,
             and
             afterward
             gives
             order
             to
             the
             sarjant
             maiours
             of
             the
             Tercias
             ,
             and
             they
             to
             the
             Sarjant
             maiours
             of
             every
             regiment
             for
             the
             providing
             of
             ammunition
             victuals
             and
             all
             things
             necessary
             for
             the
             ordering
             of
             the
             mareh
             .
          
           
           
             Hee
             ought
             to
             be
             well
             acquainted
             with
             those
             passages
             and
             wayes
             throw
             which
             the
             Army
             is
             to
             march
             ,
             and
             doth
             commonly
             march
             himselfe
             in
             the
             head
             of
             the
             avantgard
             ,
             having
             some
             light
             horse
             and
             fire-locks
             to
             attend
             him
             ,
             and
             to
             send
             out
             some
             troupes
             to
             discover
             the
             wayes
             and
             passages
             for
             the
             discovery
             and
             preventing
             of
             Ambushments
             ,
             having
             the
             Captaine
             of
             the
             pyoniers
             and
             his
             men
             to
             waite
             upon
             him
             ,
             and
             the
             quartermaster
             Generall
             ,
             for
             the
             making
             and
             explaining
             of
             wayes
             for
             the
             Army
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             not
             be
             surprized
             on
             a
             sudden
             ,
             and
             drawing
             neere
             unto
             the
             place
             of
             quartering
             or
             encamping
             ,
             he
             and
             the
             quartermaster
             Generall
             riding
             afore
             ,
             do
             view
             and
             choose
             out
             such
             ground
             and
             villages
             as
             may
             bee
             most
             commodious
             for
             the
             lodging
             and
             quartering
             of
             the
             Army
             .
          
           
             To
             conclude
             ,
             he
             is
             to
             have
             absolute
             command
             over
             the
             three
             Sariant
             Maiours
             of
             the
             Brigades
             ,
             otherwise
             called
             the
             three
             grand
             Corporalls
             of
             the
             field
             ,
             who
             are
             to
             be
             his
             assistants
             and
             his
             mouth
             ,
             as
             he
             is
             the
             mouth
             of
             the
             Lord
             Generall
             ,
             or
             the
             Marshall
             ,
             and
             therefore
             hath
             a
             vigelant
             eye
             over
             all
             things
             ,
             and
             sees
             that
             the
             Generalls
             commands
             delivered
             to
             him
             be
             strictly
             kept
             and
             observed
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             office
             of
             the
             three
             Sarjant
             Majours
             of
             the
             
               Tercias
            
             otherwise
             called
             the
             three
             Corporals
             of
             the
             field
             .
          
           
             THe
             States
             Army
             by
             order
             from
             his
             highnesse
             the
             Prince
             of
             Orange
             is
             commonly
             devided
             vpon
             a
             march
             into
             three
             Brigades
             or
             Tercias
             .
             In
             French
             he
             is
             called
             
               Le
               Mareschal
               ,
            
             or
             
               Le
               Sarjant
               Majour
               de
               battaille
               ,
            
             and
             in
             English
             one
             of
             the
             great
             Corporalls
             of
             the
             field
             .
             A
             Sariant
             Maiour
             then
             of
             a
             Tercia
             doth
             receive
             his
             order
             immediately
             from
             the
             Lord
             Generall
             himselfe
             ,
             or
             the
             Lord
             Marshall
             ,
             but
             most
             commonly
             from
             the
             Sarjant
             Majour
             Generall
             aboue
             mentioned
             ,
             To
             wit
             ,
             in
             what
             forme
             the
             Brigade
             or
             Tercia
             is
             to
             be
             ordered
             ,
             and
             how
             many
             regiments
             of
             foot
             and
             horse
             are
             to
             march
             under
             it
             ,
             and
             with
             what
             ordnance
             and
             baggage
             .
             He
             assignes
             and
             shewes
             them
             the
             place
             ,
             where
             they
             are
             to
             draw
             out
             in
             battallie
             ,
             and
             receives
             order
             from
             the
             Sarjant
             Majour
             Generall
             whether
             they
             are
             to
             march
             in
             the
             Avantgard
             ,
             the
             Battell
             ,
             or
             the
             reere
             ,
             so
             that
             in
             marching
             every
             one
             of
             these
             three
             shall
             attend
             upon
             his
             Brigade
             ,
             and
             severall
             devisions
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             absence
             of
             the
             Sariant
             Maiour
             generall
             see
             that
             the
             order
             of
             marching
             and
             embattalliing
             be
             duely
             kept
             and
             observed
             .
             And
             every
             one
             of
             these
             three
             Sariants
             maiours
             de
             Brigade
             are
             to
             be
             at
             the
             command
             of
             the
             Colonoll
             Generall
             or
             he
             that
             leads
             and
             commands
             that
             Brigade
             or
             Tercia
             ,
             and
             is
             to
             be
             sent
             to
             the
             Lord
             Generall
             the
             Lord
             marshall
             or
             Sariant
             Maiour
             Generall
             upon
             any
             ocasion
             which
             belongs
             to
             the
             present
             service
             .
          
           
             These
             three
             Sariant
             Maiours
             of
             the
             Tercias
             are
             to
             be
             lodged
             as
             neere
             the
             Sariant
             Maiour
             Generall
             as
             conveniently
             may
             be
             .
             And
             these
             three
             which
             attends
             upon
             the
             Avantguard
             the
             Battell
             and
             the
             Reere
             with
             the
             Sariant
             Maiour
             shal
             make
             choise
             of
             ground
             for
             the
             placeing
             of
             guards
             ,
             and
             assigne
             them
             to
             the
             Sariant
             Maiours
             of
             every
             Regiment
             ,
             they
             are
             to
             goe
             the
             Round
             and
             to
             visit
             the
             guard
             commonly
             every
             night
             ,
             and
             at
             such
             an
             houre
             as
             the
             Sariant
             Maiour
             shall
             appoint
             them
             either
             by
             day
             or
             night
             .
          
           
             Jf
             any
             of
             these
             three
             Sariant
             Maiours
             of
             the
             field
             shall
             find
             any
             want
             of
             powder
             munition
             or
             victualls
             ,
             either
             in
             the
             Avantgard
             ,
             Battle
             ,
             or
             Reere
             ,
             aswell
             upon
             a
             march
             ,
             as
             when
             the
             troupes
             are
             quartered
             or
             during
             a
             fight
             .
             He
             is
             presently
             to
             advertize
             the
             Sariant
             Maiour
             Generall
             with
             the
             said
             wants
             ,
             and
             then
             by
             his
             direction
             shall
             goe
             with
             an
             officer
             of
             every
             Regiment
             of
             that
             Tercia
             to
             the
             Generall
             or
             Lieutenant
             of
             the
             ordnance
             ,
             or
             to
             the
             commissary
             Generall
             of
             the
             amunition
             or
             victuals
             .
          
           
             To
             conclude
             ,
             he
             having
             received
             his
             orders
             from
             the
             Lord
             Generall
             the
             Marshall
             or
             the
             Sariant
             Maiour
             Generall
             gives
             them
             to
             the
             Sariant
             Maiours
             of
             the
             particular
             regiments
             but
             because
             the
             word
             and
             the
             orders
             are
             to
             be
             sent
             to
             quarters
             farr
             distant
             one
             from
             another
             ,
             the
             Sariant
             Maiour
             of
             every
             regiment
             cannot
             come
             conveniently
             to
             the
             Sariant
             Maiour
             Generall
             .
             Therefore
             the
             Sariant
             Maiour
             of
             the
             Brigades
             are
             to
             attend
             every
             morning
             and
             evening
             upon
             the
             Sariant
             Maiour
             Generall
             ,
             of
             the
             Army
             to
             receive
             their
             orders
             and
             to
             carry
             the
             word
             to
             the
             severall
             quarters
             ,
             whether
             the
             Sariant
             Maiour
             of
             the
             regiments
             comes
             to
             him
             ,
             and
             from
             him
             receiue
             the
             word
             and
             orders
             .
          
        
         
         
           
             Of
             the
             Generall
             ,
             or
             Master
             of
             the
             Ordnance
             .
          
           
             HE
             hath
             the
             charge
             of
             all
             the
             Artillery
             ,
             Armes
             ,
             Munition
             ,
             Ingiens
             ,
             Materials
             ,
             and
             Jnstruments
             of
             work
             ,
             yea
             of
             all
             things
             belonging
             to
             the
             Ordnance
             ,
             As
             beddings
             ,
             platformes
             ,
             carriages
             ,
             and
             whatsoever
             else
             appertaines
             to
             the
             Office
             of
             the
             master
             of
             the
             Ordnance
             .
          
           
             Vnder
             the
             Lord
             Generall
             he
             hath
             absolute
             command
             over
             all
             officers
             appertaining
             to
             that
             Traine
             ,
             as
             the
             Lieutenant
             of
             the
             Ordnance
             ,
             the
             Controuler
             ,
             the
             Clark
             ,
             the
             Gentlmen
             of
             the
             Ordnance
             ,
             The
             Master-gunners
             ,
             Armorers
             ,
             Munitions
             ,
             Ingeniers
             ,
             Captaines
             of
             Pyoniers
             ,
             and
             Mineurs
             ,
             over
             all
             Smiths
             ,
             Carpenters
             ,
             and
             Wheelewrights
             ,
             as
             also
             over
             all
             Artificers
             ,
             and
             attendants
             upon
             the
             traine
             of
             the
             Artillerie
             ,
             Munitions
             and
             Matterials
             .
          
           
             The
             General
             of
             the
             ordnance
             (
             after
             the
             places
             for
             batteries
             are
             chosen
             and
             assigned
             him
             by
             the
             Generall
             of
             the
             Armie
             )
             he
             is
             to
             obserue
             ,
             command
             and
             direct
             the
             makeing
             of
             Bedds
             and
             platformes
             for
             the
             ordnance
             ,
             he
             is
             also
             to
             give
             direction
             for
             the
             makeing
             of
             waies
             and
             explanadoes
             ,
             for
             the
             bringing
             up
             of
             the
             ordnance
             to
             their
             batteries
             and
             to
             see
             that
             the
             batteries
             be
             made
             Cannon-proofe
             ,
             and
             the
             port-holes
             so
             that
             the
             ordnance
             may
             most
             annoy
             an
             Enemy
             .
          
           
             And
             after
             he
             is
             once
             commanded
             by
             the
             Generall
             to
             begin
             a
             battery
             ,
             he
             is
             to
             give
             order
             to
             his
             inferiour
             officers
             to
             play
             and
             beat
             with
             the
             ordnance
             upon
             such
             and
             such
             places
             till
             the
             Lord
             Generall
             ,
             giueth
             direction
             to
             the
             contrary
             ,
             and
             as
             occasion
             and
             ground
             is
             gained
             to
             advance
             and
             remove
             the
             ordnance
             to
             neerer
             places
             .
             Also
             in
             a
             day
             of
             battell
             or
             fight
             he
             is
             to
             choose
             the
             most
             advantagious
             places
             for
             the
             planting
             of
             ordnance
             where
             they
             may
             gaule
             or
             offend
             an
             enemy
             most
             ,
             and
             to
             have
             a
             vigilent
             eye
             ,
             that
             all
             things
             be
             done
             in
             good
             order
             .
          
           
             All
             the
             Artillery
             and
             carriages
             belonging
             to
             the
             traine
             of
             his
             office
             upon
             a
             march
             o●
             quarter
             to
             be
             in
             the
             safest
             place
             of
             the
             Army
             ,
             and
             therefore
             are
             to
             take
             place
             before
             all
             other
             carriages
             unlesse
             some
             of
             the
             Ordnance
             be
             drawne
             to
             march
             in
             the
             Avantguard
             ,
             Battell
             ,
             or
             Reere
             ,
             or
             to
             some
             other
             places
             :
             where
             the
             necessity
             of
             the
             service
             may
             require
             .
          
           
             He
             is
             to
             make
             lawes
             and
             orders
             for
             the
             well
             governing
             of
             the
             officers
             of
             his
             traine
             and
             all
             officers
             appertaning
             to
             his
             charge
             ,
             with
             which
             he
             is
             to
             make
             the
             Generall
             acquainted
             ,
             that
             he
             from
             time
             to
             time
             may
             know
             the
             state
             of
             the
             ordnance
             ,
             and
             of
             all
             things
             else
             belonging
             thereunto
             ,
             and
             to
             take
             care
             that
             the
             service
             of
             the
             land
             be
             not
             defrauded
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             Commis
             or
             Clark
             of
             the
             Munition
             and
             Materials
             .
          
           
             THe
             Clarke
             of
             the
             Munition
             ,
             and
             Materials
             ,
             Marches
             under
             the
             traine
             of
             the
             Generall
             of
             the
             ordnance
             ,
             he
             by
             order
             from
             the
             Generall
             or
             Sariant
             Maiour
             Generall
             is
             to
             give
             out
             all
             munition
             ,
             as
             Powder
             Match
             ,
             and
             Bullets
             ,
             to
             the
             Regiments
             ,
             and
             Captaines
             according
             to
             the
             list
             or
             proportion
             commanded
             him
             by
             the
             Generall
             ,
             and
             as
             he
             receives
             his
             bullet
             from
             the
             Sariant
             Maiour
             Generall
             ,
             which
             orders
             being
             given
             out
             the
             Sariants
             of
             every
             company
             repaires
             to
             his
             quarter
             and
             lodging
             to
             receive
             it
             ,
             and
             to
             give
             him
             an
             acquittance
             under
             their
             hands
             for
             the
             receit
             thereof
             .
             Likewise
             he
             is
             to
             take
             an
             account
             what
             powder
             ,
             bullets
             ,
             and
             match
             is
             shott
             away
             and
             spent
             in
             the
             Approaches
             and
             Trenches
             ,
             and
             the
             Colonell
             which
             commands
             there
             gives
             him
             a
             note
             how
             much
             was
             spent
             the
             night
             and
             day
             during
             his
             command
             there
             ,
             because
             he
             is
             to
             give
             up
             an
             account
             to
             the
             States
             and
             General
             how
             many
             barrills
             of
             powder
             ,
             bullets
             ,
             and
             match
             was
             spent
             in
             the
             said
             approches
             .
          
           
             More
             over
             ,
             for
             entrenching
             outworks
             and
             Approches
             he
             is
             to
             deliver
             to
             the
             quartermaster
             of
             every
             Regiment
             so
             many
             materials
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             Spades
             ,
             Showels
             ,
             Axes
             ,
             Pickaxhes
             ,
             Hatchits
             ,
             and
             bills
             ,
             as
             there
             are
             workemen
             Commanded
             out
             of
             every
             Regiment
             and
             company
             which
             are
             to
             goe
             to
             work
             ,
             which
             Materials
             the
             quartermaster
             of
             every
             Regiment
             is
             to
             passe
             his
             hand
             for
             ,
             and
             to
             distribute
             them
             to
             the
             severall
             companies
             ,
             and
             when
             the
             work
             is
             ended
             to
             deliver
             them
             up
             to
             him
             againe
             or
             to
             give
             him
             a
             reconing
             how
             many
             were
             broken
             or
             lost
             upon
             service
             that
             the
             commis
             may
             render
             an
             account
             to
             the
             States
             .
          
        
         
         
           
             Of
             the
             Lord
             Marshall
             of
             the
             Feild
             .
          
           
             THe
             Lord
             marshall
             of
             the
             feild
             is
             in
             command
             and
             authority
             next
             unto
             the
             Lord
             Generall
             ,
             as
             is
             (
             as
             it
             were
             )
             his
             Lievtenant
             and
             mouth
             ,
             and
             therefore
             haveing
             so
             eminent
             a
             place
             ,
             he
             ought
             to
             be
             acquainted
             with
             all
             the
             duties
             of
             the
             officers
             of
             the
             feild
             :
             especially
             with
             the
             Generalls
             office
             it selfe
             ,
             because
             there
             is
             such
             an
             affinity
             betwixt
             them
             ,
             as
             having
             absolute
             power
             to
             command
             the
             Army
             in
             the
             Generalls
             absence
             ,
             and
             may
             oftimes
             be
             employed
             to
             command
             the
             Army
             himselfe
             ,
             as
             commonly
             the
             marshals
             of
             
               France
            
             doe
             .
          
           
             His
             office
             is
             also
             to
             see
             that
             Iustice
             be
             duely
             administred
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             Lawes
             ,
             Articles
             ,
             and
             ordinances
             of
             marshall
             discipline
             be
             strictly
             kept
             and
             observed
             ,
             that
             all
             banishments
             ,
             and
             proclamations
             ,
             comming
             either
             from
             the
             Generall
             ,
             or
             the
             Councell
             of
             warre
             ,
             be
             published
             ,
             and
             excecuted
             ,
             and
             by
             his
             authority
             ,
             to
             cause
             malefactours
             ,
             and
             offenders
             ,
             to
             be
             punished
             for
             an
             example
             of
             others
             .
             And
             seeing
             that
             all
             he
             doth
             is
             for
             the
             generell
             good
             of
             the
             whole
             Army
             ,
             he
             ought
             to
             be
             feared
             ,
             honoured
             ,
             and
             respected
             of
             all
             men
             ,
             and
             in
             no
             wise
             contradicted
             ,
             seeing
             it
             is
             his
             proper
             charge
             to
             take
             care
             that
             the
             policie
             and
             discipline
             of
             the
             Army
             established
             by
             the
             Generall
             ,
             bee
             exactly
             kept
             and
             maintained
             under
             his
             authority
             .
          
           
             All
             quarrels
             and
             duels
             hapning
             between
             officer
             and
             officer
             ,
             souldier
             ,
             and
             souldier
             either
             of
             horse
             or
             of
             foote
             ,
             ought
             to
             be
             brought
             before
             him
             ,
             seeing
             it
             is
             his
             office
             to
             right
             the
             wronged
             ,
             and
             to
             punish
             the
             offender
             ,
             or
             by
             his
             wisedome
             and
             authority
             to
             appease
             and
             compose
             them
             .
          
           
             The
             Lord
             Marshall
             also
             when
             the
             Avantguard
             is
             drawn
             out
             ,
             and
             are
             ranged
             in
             battallie
             while
             the
             battell
             and
             the
             reere
             are
             dislodging
             ,
             he
             sees
             and
             commands
             that
             both
             horse
             and
             foot
             march
             orderly
             and
             in
             their
             owne
             place
             .
          
           
             And
             with
             some
             choise
             troupes
             marcheth
             before
             the
             Avantguard
             ,
             and
             considers
             the
             waies
             and
             passages
             ,
             as
             Valleys
             ,
             Rivers
             ,
             Marras
             ,
             Boggs
             ,
             Mountaines
             ,
             Hills
             ,
             Hedges
             ,
             Woods
             ,
             Hollow
             and
             Narrow
             waies
             ,
             throw
             which
             the
             Army
             is
             to
             passe
             ,
             that
             he
             may
             order
             the
             march
             accordingly
             as
             also
             to
             send
             out
             Scouts
             ,
             Guides
             ,
             Spies
             ,
             to
             discover
             and
             get
             inteligence
             from
             an
             Enemy
             .
          
           
             He
             marches
             also
             in
             the
             head
             of
             the
             armie
             ,
             Sometimes
             with
             the
             Sariant
             Maiour
             Generall
             ,
             the
             quartermaster
             Generall
             ,
             and
             the
             quartermaster
             of
             the
             Regiments
             ,
             as
             men
             experienced
             to
             view
             and
             make
             choice
             of
             the
             ground
             wherein
             the
             Army
             is
             to
             bee
             lodged
             and
             quartered
             .
          
           
             He
             obserues
             also
             the
             order
             of
             marching
             ,
             quartering
             ,
             and
             fighting
             ,
             the
             three
             chiefe
             things
             belonging
             to
             an
             Army
             ,
             and
             sees
             and
             commands
             that
             the
             march
             ,
             quartering
             ,
             and
             fight
             ,
             bee
             conformable
             to
             that
             order
             ,
             which
             the
             Generall
             hath
             prescribed
             ,
             and
             the
             devisions
             ,
             and
             Troupes
             being
             ranged
             in
             battallie
             ,
             he
             is
             full
             of
             action
             ,
             and
             considers
             the
             place
             and
             soyle
             of
             the
             ground
             ,
             the
             advantages
             of
             the
             Sunn
             ,
             Winde
             ,
             and
             dust
             ,
             and
             how
             the
             troupes
             with
             the
             most
             advantage
             may
             be
             brought
             to
             encounter
             an
             Enemy
             ,
             takeing
             care
             that
             the
             order
             commanded
             by
             the
             Generall
             be
             not
             changed
             ,
             and
             when
             the
             troups
             are
             engaged
             in
             fight
             ,
             he
             sees
             that
             they
             be
             duely
             seconded
             ,
             and
             relieved
             ,
             and
             being
             overlaid
             or
             charged
             ,
             to
             cause
             them
             to
             retreat
             orderly
             for
             the
             avoiding
             of
             disorder
             and
             confusion
             ,
             having
             a
             watchfull
             eye
             upon
             all
             casualities
             which
             may
             happen
             ,
             for
             what
             the
             Lord
             Generall
             ordaines
             ,
             the
             Lord
             Marshall
             sees
             performed
             and
             executed
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             ,
             that
             both
             their
             desires
             may
             take
             one
             and
             the
             same
             effect
             .
             For
             when
             commanders
             undertakes
             a
             warre
             ,
             and
             fights
             with
             councell
             and
             iudgment
             ,
             and
             sees
             all
             things
             also
             executed
             with
             wisedome
             ,
             discretion
             ,
             and
             valour
             ,
             giving
             the
             succes
             to
             God
             ,
             no
             man
             can
             then
             be
             blamed
             .
          
           
             The
             Lord
             Marshall
             also
             ought
             to
             be
             acquainted
             with
             the
             Generals
             designe
             ,
             and
             whether
             he
             is
             resolved
             to
             fight
             with
             an
             enemie
             or
             no
             .
             To
             consider
             whether
             he
             is
             to
             charg
             an
             enemy
             in
             the
             Front
             ,
             in
             the
             Reere
             ,
             or
             on
             the
             flankes
             ,
             to
             hinder
             them
             from
             quartering
             ,
             and
             to
             send
             out
             convoyes
             for
             the
             cutting
             off
             ,
             of
             his
             Victuals
             and
             provisions
             .
          
           
           
             He
             ought
             to
             consider
             likewise
             how
             an
             Enemy
             lies
             encamped
             ,
             which
             way
             he
             can
             come
             to
             attempt
             him
             ,
             whether
             he
             is
             to
             march
             ,
             and
             whither
             his
             dessigne
             tends
             ,
             what
             order
             he
             keeps
             ,
             with
             what
             Troupes
             he
             may
             hinder
             or
             annoy
             an
             Enemy
             ,
             or
             being
             once
             ingaged
             in
             fight
             ,
             where
             and
             how
             he
             may
             best
             second
             and
             relieve
             his
             owne
             men
             ,
             either
             with
             horse
             or
             foot
             ,
             to
             place
             and
             bring
             up
             the
             devisions
             of
             Muskettiers
             ,
             where
             they
             may
             most
             offend
             and
             gaule
             an
             Enemy
             ,
             and
             the
             bodies
             of
             Pikes
             may
             with
             the
             most
             advantage
             be
             brought
             to
             give
             a
             charge
             ,
             or
             a
             shock
             .
          
           
             Also
             to
             understand
             and
             get
             intelligence
             of
             what
             force
             and
             strength
             an
             Enemy
             is
             ,
             what
             baggage
             ,
             carriages
             ,
             and
             incumbrances
             he
             hath
             ,
             and
             from
             whence
             his
             victuals
             and
             provisions
             are
             to
             come
             ,
             to
             know
             whether
             any
             more
             forces
             are
             to
             ioyne
             with
             him
             ,
             and
             how
             and
             in
             what
             manner
             he
             may
             break
             their
             conjunction
             .
          
           
             He
             is
             also
             to
             have
             in
             a
             readinesse
             ,
             an
             exact
             Mapp
             of
             that
             Country
             through
             which
             the
             Army
             is
             to
             march
             ,
             and
             a
             description
             of
             all
             the
             waies
             ,
             rivers
             and
             passages
             ,
             through
             which
             the
             Army
             is
             to
             passe
             ,
             having
             also
             by
             him
             good
             Guides
             ,
             which
             are
             well
             acquainted
             with
             the
             severall
             passages
             of
             that
             Country
             and
             place
             .
          
           
             The
             Lord
             Marshall
             likewise
             ,
             with
             the
             Sariant
             Maiour
             Generall
             ,
             ordaines
             and
             appoints
             all
             places
             for
             watches
             and
             Guards
             ,
             either
             of
             Horse
             or
             Foote
             ,
             which
             they
             assigne
             to
             the
             three
             Sariant
             Maiours
             of
             the
             Tercias
             ,
             and
             they
             to
             the
             Sariant
             Maiours
             of
             the
             Regiments
             ,
             and
             the
             places
             which
             they
             are
             to
             maintain
             and
             make
             good
             ,
             also
             for
             alarme-places
             ,
             and
             the
             choice
             of
             ground
             to
             fight
             a
             battell
             in
             ,
             for
             the
             most
             safety
             and
             defence
             of
             the
             Army
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             day
             of
             battell
             he
             must
             be
             stirring
             and
             full
             of
             action
             to
             give
             orders
             and
             directions
             where
             need
             most
             requires
             ▪
             and
             to
             〈◊〉
             both
             officers
             and
             Souldiers
             to
             acquit
             themselves
             like
             men
             .
          
           
             Vpon
             a
             march
             or
             the
             Army
             being
             encamped
             ,
             he
             ought
             to
             counsell
             Tradesmen
             and
             victuallers
             ,
             which
             bring
             provisions
             to
             the
             army
             ,
             and
             gives
             command
             that
             they
             be
             not
             wrongd
             and
             abused
             by
             the
             Souldiers
             ,
             but
             that
             they
             may
             sell
             their
             commodities
             peaceably
             :
             Likewise
             he
             gives
             order
             by
             his
             authority
             to
             the
             Provost
             Marshall
             Generall
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             particular
             Marshalls
             of
             every
             Regiment
             ,
             that
             they
             set
             reasonable
             rates
             and
             prizes
             upon
             victuals
             and
             beere
             for
             the
             good
             of
             the
             poore
             Souldier
             .
          
           
             There
             are
             divers
             other
             points
             appertaining
             to
             the
             office
             of
             the
             Lord
             Marshal
             of
             the
             field
             which
             for
             brevities
             sake
             I
             omit
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Office
             and
             charge
             of
             the
             Lord
             Generall
             of
             an
             Army
             .
          
           
             A
             Generall
             hath
             absolute
             command
             over
             the
             whole
             Armie
             ,
             and
             is
             to
             know
             and
             understand
             well
             the
             severall
             duties
             and
             charges
             of
             every
             inferiour
             Officer
             under
             his
             command
             ,
             and
             ought
             to
             be
             a
             personage
             of
             great
             experience
             ,
             wisedome
             and
             discretion
             ,
             and
             capable
             to
             discerne
             and
             choose
             the
             best
             of
             different
             opinions
             ,
             which
             may
             often
             fall
             out
             in
             the
             councils
             of
             warre
             .
          
           
             He
             ought
             also
             to
             be
             a
             personage
             descended
             of
             some
             noble
             House
             and
             Family
             ,
             which
             will
             give
             a
             lustre
             unto
             his
             command
             ,
             and
             a
             man
             of
             undaunted
             courage
             and
             authority
             ,
             severe
             and
             austere
             in
             his
             commaund
             ,
             and
             to
             be
             greatly
             feared
             ,
             honoured
             ,
             and
             respected
             ,
             a
             man
             full
             of
             resolution
             and
             magnanimity
             in
             the
             day
             of
             battell
             ,
             and
             constant
             and
             resolute
             in
             desperate
             cases
             ,
             happy
             in
             his
             dessignes
             and
             enterprises
             ,
             but
             above
             all
             religious
             ,
             fearing
             and
             invocating
             God
             to
             be
             propitious
             and
             favourable
             unto
             him
             ,
             to
             blesse
             his
             designes
             ,
             and
             to
             pray
             unto
             the
             Lord
             of
             hoasts
             to
             give
             him
             knowledge
             ,
             understanding
             and
             policy
             to
             govern
             his
             armie
             well
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             may
             keepe
             it
             in
             good
             order
             ,
             and
             under
             good
             discipline
             ,
             whereby
             it
             may
             become
             not
             onely
             capable
             of
             vanquishing
             ,
             but
             also
             victorious
             ,
             which
             depends
             alone
             upon
             the
             Almighty
             power
             of
             the
             Lord
             of
             Hoasts
             ,
             and
             that
             neither
             good
             nor
             badd
             
             successe
             should
             make
             him
             change
             or
             alter
             his
             Countenance
             ,
             but
             upon
             the
             hottest
             services
             to
             give
             out
             his
             orders
             and
             directions
             with
             temperance
             and
             moderation
             ,
             without
             impatience
             ,
             choller
             ,
             cruelty
             or
             emulation
             against
             those
             that
             are
             under
             his
             command
             ,
             especially
             those
             who
             have
             gained
             honour
             ,
             and
             deserved
             well
             ,
             which
             he
             ought
             rather
             to
             advance
             and
             reward
             ,
             which
             will
             make
             him
             to
             be
             honoured
             ,
             loved
             ,
             and
             respected
             of
             all
             men
             .
          
           
             A
             Generall
             also
             ought
             to
             be
             qualified
             with
             these
             excellent
             vertues
             ,
             as
             wisedome
             ,
             valour
             experience
             ,
             providence
             ,
             constancy
             ,
             authority
             ,
             and
             liberality
             ,
             and
             should
             well
             ponder
             and
             consider
             the
             occasion
             which
             might
             move
             him
             or
             engage
             him
             into
             a
             fight
             ,
             or
             to
             give
             battell
             to
             an
             Enemy
             ,
             he
             ought
             to
             be
             sparing
             and
             a
             good
             manager
             of
             the
             lives
             of
             his
             men
             ,
             and
             not
             rashly
             and
             unadvisedly
             to
             hazard
             his
             Troupes
             ,
             for
             he
             may
             aswell
             vanquish
             by
             policie
             ,
             in
             putting
             on
             the
             Lyons
             skinne
             ,
             and
             foreseeing
             all
             advantages
             and
             disadvantages
             ,
             as
             by
             surprising
             an
             Enemy
             unawares
             ,
             as
             by
             laying
             hold
             upon
             an
             advantage
             ,
             when
             their
             Troupes
             are
             in
             disorder
             ,
             when
             they
             are
             dispersed
             ,
             when
             they
             are
             dishartened
             ,
             harryed
             and
             wearied
             out
             ,
             when
             they
             are
             pinched
             with
             hunger
             ,
             thirst
             and
             cold
             ,
             and
             such
             like
             casualityes
             which
             may
             befall
             them
             .
          
           
             Also
             by
             seeking
             to
             divert
             ,
             amuze
             and
             devide
             their
             Armie
             ,
             while
             he
             keepes
             his
             owne
             in
             peace
             ,
             concord
             ,
             and
             unity
             ,
             which
             is
             one
             of
             the
             chiefest
             points
             of
             Warre
             .
             To
             gaine
             time
             and
             advantagious
             places
             ,
             to
             prevent
             and
             hinder
             an
             Enemy
             from
             possessing
             them
             ,
             and
             to
             seeke
             by
             all
             meanes
             to
             breake
             an
             Enemies
             dessigne
             ,
             and
             with
             all
             expedition
             to
             put
             his
             own
             into
             execution
             ,
             and
             to
             premeditate
             and
             to
             overweigh
             with
             a
             thousand
             things
             ,
             which
             depends
             upon
             the
             warre
             ,
             having
             a
             vigilant
             eye
             upon
             all
             occasions
             ,
             for
             the
             Art
             Military
             hath
             many
             difficulties
             attending
             upon
             it
             ,
             and
             one
             is
             not
             able
             to
             expresse
             the
             many
             hazards
             ,
             straights
             and
             plunges
             which
             befals
             this
             profession
             .
          
           
             He
             ought
             not
             lightly
             to
             hazard
             his
             men
             either
             in
             skirmishes
             ,
             or
             in
             a
             battell
             ,
             unlesse
             he
             be
             forced
             to
             it
             ,
             and
             that
             upon
             very
             good
             grounds
             and
             advantages
             :
             for
             having
             flesht
             his
             men
             in
             small
             occasions
             ,
             it
             hartens
             and
             embouldens
             his
             men
             ,
             and
             gives
             them
             the
             more
             incouragement
             ,
             and
             assurance
             of
             good
             successe
             ,
             for
             they
             perceiving
             the
             valliant
             ,
             wise
             ,
             and
             able
             carriage
             and
             conduct
             of
             their
             leaders
             and
             Commanders
             ,
             especially
             of
             their
             Generall
             ,
             this
             makes
             them
             fight
             bravely
             ,
             and
             gives
             them
             hope
             of
             victory
             .
          
           
             A
             Generall
             also
             ought
             to
             take
             the
             grave
             Councell
             and
             advice
             of
             his
             Chiefes
             and
             Commanders
             ,
             and
             (
             as
             is
             said
             to
             make
             choice
             of
             the
             best
             ,
             and
             yet
             not
             to
             make
             known
             his
             owne
             resolution
             ,
             for
             many
             a
             brave
             attempt
             and
             enterprise
             hath
             been
             broken
             for
             want
             of
             Secrecy
             ,
             and
             if
             he
             should
             reveale
             it
             to
             some
             intimate
             friend
             :
             yet
             to
             do
             it
             as
             sparingly
             and
             reservedly
             as
             he
             can
             ,
             by
             which
             meanes
             he
             shall
             gaine
             knowledge
             and
             experience
             ,
             and
             in
             an
             instant
             will
             be
             ready
             to
             lay
             hold
             upon
             such
             and
             such
             occasions
             as
             may
             execute
             his
             resolution
             .
             
             and
             there
             by
             make
             him
             capable
             of
             prevailing
             .
          
           
             A
             Generall
             ought
             to
             take
             care
             ,
             that
             his
             Armie
             be
             not
             wearied
             out
             ,
             and
             fatigated
             overmuch
             ,
             which
             breedes
             sicknesses
             ,
             &
             causes
             the
             weakning
             thereof
             ,
             to
             see
             &
             Command
             that
             the
             Regiments
             be
             well
             armed
             ,
             &
             duely
             exercised
             in
             all
             the
             seuerall
             motions
             of
             warre
             ,
             that
             Iustice
             be
             readily
             executed
             ,
             to
             be
             fauourable
             to
             good
             men
             ,
             and
             seuere
             against
             Euill-doers
             &
             Offendours
             .
             It
             is
             also
             the
             Office
             of
             a
             Generall
             to
             giue
             Charge
             ,
             that
             the
             Armie
             be
             provided
             with
             Victuals
             ,
             amunitions
             ,
             and
             other
             things
             belonging
             to
             the
             warre
             .
          
           
             A
             
               Generall
            
             ought
             to
             speake
             diverse
             languages
             ,
             for
             hauing
             to
             doe
             with
             sundrie
             Nations
             vnder
             his
             Command
             ,
             being
             able
             to
             speake
             vnto
             them
             in
             their
             owne
             language
             ,
             this
             giues
             a
             great
             deale
             of
             Contentment
             .
          
           
             Moreouer
             ,
             he
             ought
             to
             be
             learned
             ,
             a
             good
             
               Mathematician
               ,
            
             &
             well
             seene
             in
             the
             points
             of
             
               Fortification
               ,
            
             and
             to
             haue
             excellent
             Inginiers
             about
             him
             ,
             that
             are
             carefull
             in
             running
             the
             lines
             of
             Approches
             ,
             for
             the
             preseruation
             of
             the
             liues
             of
             men
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             requisite
             also
             ,
             that
             he
             should
             haue
             good
             
               Guides
               ,
            
             and
             spies
             about
             him
             ,
             to
             get
             him
             intelligence
             of
             the
             State
             of
             an
             Enemie
             ,
             &
             ought
             to
             spare
             no
             mony
             that
             way
             ,
             for
             the
             breaking
             of
             an
             Enemies
             dessigne
             ,
             and
             for
             the
             aduancing
             of
             his
             owne
             .
          
           
             A
             braue
             Generall
             also
             considers
             ,
             that
             the
             force
             of
             an
             Armie
             consists
             not
             in
             the
             multitude
             of
             men
             ,
             but
             in
             Valliant
             &
             well
             experienced
             souldiers
             ,
             &
             Officers
             ,
             which
             are
             well
             instructed
             ,
             and
             trained
             vp
             in
             the
             vse
             of
             their
             armes
             ,
             &
             knovves
             that
             Victorie
             consists
             not
             in
             many
             Troupes
             ;
             but
             that
             an
             Enemies
             army
             being
             stronger
             then
             his
             ,
             as
             hath
             often
             hapned
             by
             obseruing
             of
             good
             order
             ,
             &
             dicipline
             choosing
             of
             aduantages
             of
             VVind
             ,
             Sunne
             ,
             and
             Ground
             together
             with
             the
             ready
             obedience
             of
             his
             men
             ,
             in
             executing
             of
             his
             Commaunds
             ,
             &
             by
             experience
             in
             their
             profession
             ,
             they
             become
             more
             bould
             &
             confident
             in
             fight
             ,
             so
             that
             an
             old
             beaten
             souldier
             ,
             knowes
             by
             heart
             ,
             what
             his
             Chiefe
             &
             Generall
             will
             require
             of
             him
             .
          
           
             As
             a
             Generall
             should
             be
             beloued
             :
             so
             likewise
             he
             ought
             to
             be
             feared
             ,
             &
             of
             the
             two
             among
             .
             Cammon
             souldiers
             ,
             rather
             to
             be
             feared
             ,
             for
             the
             most
             part
             of
             them
             ,
             vvil
             be
             soner
             restrayned
             from
             doing
             euill
             for
             feare
             of
             punishment
             ,
             then
             for
             any
             loue
             they
             beare
             to
             their
             Generall
             .
          
           
             To
             conclude
             ,
             he
             ought
             to
             be
             experienced
             in
             the
             beleegring
             of
             Tovvnes
             ,
             &
             Forts
             ,
             to
             vievv
             all
             places
             of
             advantages
             ,
             &
             vvhere
             an
             Enemy
             may
             most
             offend
             him
             ,
             to
             forrifie
             his
             Campe
             strongly
             with
             lines
             of
             
               Circumvalation
               ,
               Forts
            
             and
             vvorkes
             vpon
             it
             ,
             to
             know
             the
             site
             ,
             and
             situation
             of
             a
             tovvne
             ,
             hovv
             ,
             &
             in
             what
             manner
             those
             vvithin
             are
             able
             to
             defend
             it
             vvith
             men
             and
             munition
             ,
             to
             cause
             his
             Inginiers
             to
             be
             very
             circumspect
             ,
             and
             carefull
             how
             they
             run
             their
             lines
             ,
             to
             sap
             forward
             to
             the
             vveakest
             part
             of
             the
             Tovvne
             or
             Fort
             ,
             which
             he
             intends
             to
             become
             Master
             of
             ,
             vvith
             diverse
             other
             things
             requisite
             in
             a
             brave
             Generall
             ,
             vvhich
             for
             brevities
             sake
             I
             will
             omit
             .
          
        
      
       
       
         
           NOW
           FOLLOWES
           IN
           VVHAT
           ORDER
           an
           Army
           ought
           to
           march
           in
           over
           a
           Campaigne
           ,
           narrow
           passages
           ,
           Woods
           ,
           and
           Rivers
           .
        
         
           HAving
           shovvne
           the
           severall
           Offices
           of
           the
           Officers
           of
           the
           field
           ,
           it
           resteth
           novv
           to
           speak
           something
           in
           what
           order
           an
           Armie
           ought
           to
           march
           .
        
         
           The
           Armie
           then
           being
           come
           to
           the
           
             Rendevous
             ,
          
           or
           being
           to
           disencampe
           from
           any
           place
           ,
           the
           afternoone
           or
           evening
           before
           the
           breakeing
           vp
           of
           it
           ,
           orders
           is
           giuē
           out
           ,
           that
           the
           Souldiers
           shal
           be
           provided
           vvith
           Munition
           ,
           &
           so
           many
           dayes
           Victuals
           ,
           as
           the
           Generall
           shall
           Command
           .
        
         
           But
           an
           Enemy
           being
           neere
           at
           hand
           ,
           vvhen
           the
           Generall
           vvill
           conceale
           thē
           breakeing
           up
           they
           dravv
           into
           Armes
           silently
           ,
           without
           sounding
           of
           Drum
           ,
           or
           Trumpet
           .
        
         
           The
           Generall
           being
           attended
           vpon
           before
           his
           Lodging
           ,
           by
           the
           Sariant
           
             Majour
             Generall
             ,
             the
             Quartermaster
             Generall
             ,
             the
             Captaine
             of
             the
             Pionniers
          
           and
           some
           other
           Officers
           .
        
         
           The
           most
           part
           of
           the
           Armie
           ,
           being
           dravvne
           into
           Armes
           ,
           the
           Generall
           gives
           Command
           to
           the
           cheife
           
             Inginier
             .
             Quartermaster
          
           or
           some
           other
           ,
           to
           throvv
           dovvne
           the
           Trench
           ,
           fill
           vp
           the
           Ditch
           ,
           and
           to
           make
           such
           gappes
           in
           it
           ,
           that
           vvhole
           devisions
           ,
           &
           Battaillions
           may
           march
           through
           them
           .
        
         
           After
           the
           Trench
           is
           cast
           dovvne
           ,
           the
           
             Generall
             ,
             or
             the
             Sariant
             Majour
             Generall
          
           from
           him
           ,
           gives
           order
           that
           the
           
             Avantguards
          
           shall
           draw
           forth
           ,
           and
           march
           a
           good
           distance
           without
           ,
           and
           there
           to
           stand
           ,
           &
           make
           a
           halt
           ,
           till
           the
           
             Battell
             ,
          
           &
           the
           
             Reere
          
           be
           also
           drawne
           out
           ,
           in
           obseruing
           a
           con
           venient
           distance
           betweene
           them
           .
           In
           the
           interim
           the
           Ordinance
           ,
           Carriages
           ,
           waggons
           &
           baggage
           that
           belongs
           to
           the
           Armie
           ,
           are
           likewise
           drawne
           out
           ,
           and
           put
           into
           order
           .
           And
           the
           Guides
           ,
           Scouts
           ,
           and
           Pyonniers
           sent
           out
           before
           into
           the
           Countrie
           ,
           to
           discouver
           and
           to
           set
           out
           Centinels
           of
           Horse
           vpon
           all
           passages
           ,
           and
           heigths
           ,
           while
           the
           Armie
           is
           a
           marching
           forwards
           .
        
         
           The
           Master
           of
           the
           
             Ordinance
          
           being
           present
           ,
           Commaundeth
           where
           the
           Ordinance
           and
           the
           traine
           of
           Carriages
           belonging
           to
           them
           shall
           march
           .
           And
           giveth
           order
           to
           the
           Conductours
           ,
           &
           Inferiour
           Officers
           ,
           to
           march
           forward
           ,
           as
           the
           nature
           &
           propriety
           of
           the
           waies
           wil
           permit
           .
           And
           if
           there
           be
           any
           rough
           waies
           ,
           which
           are
           to
           be
           explained
           ,
           he
           Ordaines
           the
           Captaine
           of
           the
           Pioniers
           ,
           and
           his
           men
           to
           make
           them
           plaine
           &
           even
           ,
           likewise
           all
           the
           waggons
           of
           Amunition
           ,
           &
           Victuals
           with
           the
           baggage
           ,
           are
           put
           in
           order
           by
           the
           Carriage
           Master
           &
           conductours
           of
           the
           traine
           :
           but
           the
           waggons
           and
           Carrs
           belonging
           to
           the
           horse
           ,
           they
           are
           ordered
           by
           their
           Officers
           ,
           to
           march
           according
           to
           the
           
             seignority
          
           of
           everie
           Regiment
           .
        
         
           
             How
             the
             Artillerie
             ,
             and
             the
             Carriages
             are
             to
             March
             .
          
           
             The
             Ordinance
             marches
             first
             with
             all
             the
             Carriages
             ,
             and
             the
             Pyonniers
             are
             alwaies
             by
             them
             ,
             having
             noe
             other
             waggons
             mingled
             among
             them
             ,
             &
             so
             march
             in
             their
             order
             onely
             with
             one
             waggon
             before
             them
             ,
             laden
             with
             spades
             ,
             shovels
             ,
             Axses
             ,
             hachets
             ,
             hand
             biles
             ,
             and
             other
             instruments
             to
             make
             the
             wayes
             ,
             &
             to
             explaine
             the
             ground
             &
             ditches
             ,
             after
             which
             is
             drawne
             an
             Instrument
             ,
             which
             doth
             make
             a
             
               rut
            
             vpon
             the
             waye
             ,
             to
             show
             which
             vvay
             the
             Canon
             is
             to
             passe
             .
             The
             lesser
             lighter
             pecces
             of
             Ordinance
             layd
             vpon
             their
             Carriages
             follovves
             the
             said
             Instrument
             ,
             &
             aftervvard
             the
             great
             peeces
             dravvne
             upon
             block-vvaggons
             vvhen
             there
             is
             no
             danger
             :
             but
             expecting
             to
             be
             encountred
             by
             an
             Enemie
             ,
             they
             dravv
             them
             vpon
             their
             Carriages
             for
             feare
             of
             loosing
             time
             in
             mounting
             them
             ,
             least
             an
             Enemie
             might
             fall
             suddenly
             vpon
             some
             part
             of
             the
             Armie
             .
             Next
             after
             the
             Ordinance
             follovves
             the
             vvaggons
             vvith
             Instruments
             ,
             &
             Tooles
             for
             Carpenters
             ,
             and
             Smiths
             ,
             the
             vvaggons
             laden
             vvith
             Bullets
             ,
             povvder
             ,
             and
             match
             ,
             and
             after
             them
             vvaggons
             vvith
             Pikes
             and
             muskets
             ,
             all
             vvhich
             being
             passed
             ;
             then
             follovves
             the
             vvaggons
             belonging
             to
             the
             Generall
             of
             the
             Ordinance
             &
             his
             Inferiour
             Officers
             .
             And
             after
             them
             all
             the
             vvaggons
             laden
             vvith
             munition
             for
             the
             Ordinance
             ,
             &
             the
             Armie
             ,
             the
             vvaggons
             laden
             vvith
             Victuals
             ,
             provisions
             ,
             &
             vvaggons
             for
             the
             sick
             and
             hurt
             ,
             and
             last
             of
             all
             the
             baggage
             ,
             belonging
             to
             the
             Officers
             of
             the
             vvhole
             Armie
             .
          
           
             But
             vvhen
             necessitie
             requires
             ,
             some
             Feild
             peeces
             marches
             before
             in
             the
             head
             of
             the
             Armie
             
             vvhen
             an
             Enemie
             is
             expected
             to
             fall
             on
             ,
             vvith
             vvhich
             there
             marches
             some
             vvaggons
             laden
             vvith
             povvder
             ,
             match
             ,
             and
             Bullets
             to
             be
             vsed
             vpon
             any
             occasion
             .
          
           
             All
             the
             Ordinance
             ,
             carriages
             ,
             and
             baggage
             being
             thus
             ordered
             ,
             and
             the
             armie
             devided
             into
             the
             
               Vantguard
               ,
            
             the
             
               Battell
            
             and
             the
             
               Reere
            
             :
             the
             
               Sariant
               Maiours
            
             of
             the
             foote
             Regiments
             ,
             and
             the
             Commissaries
             of
             the
             Horse
             Troupes
             ,
             having
             order
             ,
             shevves
             vvhich
             vvay
             they
             are
             to
             leade
             the
             Troupes
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             give
             noc
             hindrance
             one
             to
             an
             other
             ,
             &
             the
             
               Generall
               ,
            
             or
             the
             
               Sariant
               Maiour
               Generall
            
             gives
             Command
             ,
             that
             the
             
               Vantguard
            
             shall
             begin
             to
             march
             ,
             and
             sends
             out
             before
             it
             Guides
             &
             light
             horsemen
             ,
             to
             discouver
             the
             passages
             :
             yet
             so
             ,
             that
             they
             ride
             not
             so
             farre
             afore
             :
             but
             that
             they
             keepe
             alvvaies
             vvithin
             sight
             of
             the
             
               Vantguard
               ,
            
             that
             vpon
             the
             discouverie
             of
             an
             Enemie
             ,
             they
             may
             advertize
             and
             givi
             them
             vvarnin
             of
             it
             in
             time
          
           
             The
             
               Vantguard
            
             then
             (
             as
             is
             sayd
             )
             hath
             commonly
             some
             small
             peeces
             of
             Ordinance
             marching
             before
             it
             ,
             vvhich
             likevvise
             may
             happen
             before
             the
             
               Battell
               ,
            
             &
             in
             the
             
               Reere
            
             of
             all
             vvith
             a
             greater
             number
             of
             horse
             ,
             and
             foote
             ,
             as
             the
             necessitie
             may
             require
             :
             so
             that
             the
             three
             
               Tercias
            
             of
             the
             Armie
             ,
             are
             all
             of
             thē
             provided
             vvith
             Ordinance
             ,
             vvhere
             it
             is
             thought
             most
             needeful
             and
             vvhere
             it
             is
             imagined
             an
             Enemie
             may
             give
             an
             attempt
             ,
             either
             vpon
             the
             
               Front
               ,
            
             the
             
               Reere
            
             or
             vpon
             either
             of
             the
             
               Flankes
            
             :
             for
             vvhich
             one
             can
             give
             noe
             certaine
             rule
             ,
             but
             must
             defend
             themselves
             in
             that
             place
             ,
             vvhere
             the
             occasion
             presenteth
             it selfe
             .
          
           
             When
             a
             
               Campagnie
               ,
            
             Heath
             ,
             or
             Feild
             is
             spacious
             and
             large
             ,
             then
             one
             may
             march
             in
             full
             Battaile
             by
             divisios
             ,
             &
             close
             by
             one
             an
             other
             in
             good
             order
             ,
             vvhich
             an
             Enemy
             perceiving
             ,
             it
             may
             be
             he
             dares
             not
             offer
             battell
             ,
             othervvise
             every
             devision
             ,
             &
             
               Battaeillion
            
             may
             march
             by
             it selfe
             vvith
             more
             ease
             and
             liberty
             ,
             then
             vvhen
             they
             are
             ioyned
             close
             together
             :
             yet
             so
             that
             in
             case
             of
             necessity
             they
             may
             easely
             be
             dravvne
             vp
             together
             ,
             as
             likevvise
             the
             Ordinance
             ,
             &
             baggage
             dravvne
             to
             that
             place
             ,
             vvhere
             they
             may
             be
             safest
             ,
             and
             best
             defended
             by
             the
             troupes
             ,
             if
             an
             Enemy
             should
             giue
             an
             attempt
             vpon
             them
             .
          
           
             The
             vvaggons
             ought
             to
             be
             dravvne
             vp
             ,
             and
             ranged
             into
             eight
             ,
             or
             ten
             rancks
             close
             one
             to
             an
             other
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             march
             vvithout
             hindring
             one
             an
             other
             ,
             and
             the
             Ordinance
             may
             march
             vpon
             one
             of
             the
             flankes
             of
             the
             Armie
             ,
             and
             some
             Feild
             peeces
             before
             if
             necessity
             should
             require
             ,
             vvithout
             hindring
             ,
             or
             putting
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             vvaggons
             into
             disorder
             ,
             vvhich
             the
             Master
             of
             the
             Ordinance
             ,
             or
             the
             Carriage
             Master
             ,
             ought
             to
             Consider
             vvell
             ,
             and
             take
             a
             speciall
             care
             of
             .
          
           
             The
             Chiefe
             Officer
             vvhich
             Commaundeth
             the
             
               Reereguard
               ,
            
             gives
             order
             that
             some
             Troups
             of
             light
             horsemen
             shall
             march
             vvith
             in
             sight
             of
             the
             vvhole
             
               Reere
               ,
            
             especially
             ,
             vvhen
             they
             are
             to
             passe
             over
             a
             Heath
             ,
             or
             
               Campagnie
               :
            
             but
             the
             Countrie
             having
             mountaines
             ,
             hils
             ,
             &
             vallies
             in
             it
             ,
             then
             the
             horse
             may
             be
             commaunded
             to
             march
             sometimes
             in
             the
             
               Vantguard
               ,
            
             &
             sometimes
             in
             the
             
               Reere
            
             of
             all
             the
             Armie
             ,
             and
             keepe
             such
             vvatch
             ,
             and
             centinels
             vpon
             the
             highest
             places
             ,
             that
             an
             Enemy
             may
             not
             discouver
             the
             strength
             of
             the
             Armie
             as
             it
             passeth
             ,
             or
             in
             vvhat
             order
             it
             marches
             .
          
           
             When
             the
             armie
             is
             to
             march
             throug
             some
             narrovv
             passages
             ,
             the
             
               Vantguard
            
             is
             commōly
             strengthened
             vvith
             some
             foote
             ,
             or
             Ordinance
             dravvne
             vp
             before
             it
             ,
             least
             an
             Enemie
             migt
             surprize
             it
             ,
             &
             marches
             thē
             by
             files
             ,
             &
             dravves
             vp
             as
             the
             conditiō
             of
             the
             place
             vvill
             permit
             .
             In
             like
             manner
             the
             
               Reereguard
            
             in
             places
             of
             daunger
             ,
             ought
             to
             be
             strengthned
             ,
             as
             also
             the
             
               Battell
            
             to
             be
             ranged
             into
             such
             an
             order
             ,
             that
             the
             Ordinance
             ,
             &
             Baggage
             ,
             being
             placed
             in
             the
             middest
             ,
             may
             come
             best
             to
             serve
             ,
             &
             relieve
             the
             other
             Troups
             ,
             from
             vvhence
             they
             may
             send
             Harquebussiers
             (
             as
             occasion
             serves
             )
             to
             attend
             both
             vpon
             the
             
               Vantguard
               ,
            
             and
             che
             
               Reere
               ,
            
             and
             as
             the
             ground
             vvill
             best
             afford
             .
          
           
             In
             case
             that
             the
             vvaies
             and
             passages
             be
             so
             narrovv
             ,
             that
             the
             Ordinance
             ,
             Carriages
             ,
             &
             baggage
             takes
             vp
             so
             much
             time
             ,
             that
             the
             
               Vantguard
            
             cannot
             be
             easely
             seconded
             by
             the
             
               Reereguard
               ,
            
             then
             there
             may
             be
             appointed
             some
             Troupes
             of
             
               Reserve
               ,
            
             vvhich
             may
             march
             along
             vvith
             the
             Carriages
             ,
             &
             Baggage
             ,
             to
             be
             disposed
             of
             in
             such
             a
             sort
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             the
             better
             relieve
             those
             Troupes
             ,
             vvhich
             should
             be
             overcharged
             by
             an
             Enemy
             .
          
           
             Vpon
             such
             an
             occasion
             ,
             one
             ought
             to
             consider
             and
             observe
             vvell
             ,
             the
             nature
             ,
             &
             conditiō
             of
             that
             passage
             ,
             throug
             vvhich
             the
             Armie
             is
             to
             march
             ,
             vvhether
             there
             be
             any
             vvindings
             and
             turnings
             in
             it
             ,
             or
             other
             intrieate
             vvaies
             ,
             as
             through
             vvoods
             ,
             hils
             ,
             and
             vallies
             ,
             vvhere
             an
             Enemy
             may
             best
             lay
             his
             
               Ambuscadoes
            
             :
             therefore
             vpon
             every
             such
             turning
             ,
             or
             crosse
             vvay
             ,
             
             a
             troupe
             of
             horse
             ,
             &
             some
             foote
             ought
             to
             be
             placed
             vpon
             it
             ,
             to
             guard
             there
             ,
             till
             the
             Ordinance
             ,
             Carriages
             ,
             &
             Baggage
             be
             past
             &
             out
             of
             daunger
             .
          
        
         
           
             How
             one
             is
             to
             march
             through
             a
             wood
             .
          
           
             But
             in
             passing
             through
             a
             Forrest
             ,
             a
             great
             vvood
             ,
             or
             a
             Grove
             ,
             there
             ought
             to
             be
             placed
             good
             store
             of
             Horse
             vpon
             the
             vvaies
             that
             goes
             into
             it
             ,
             &
             vvhere
             the
             Armie
             is
             to
             passe
             ,
             to
             round
             &
             guard
             it
             vvel
             ,
             a
             svvel
             on
             the
             one
             side
             ,
             as
             on
             the
             other
             .
             And
             if
             there
             be
             any
             plaine
             or
             open
             places
             in
             it
             ,
             the
             Horse
             are
             to
             overspread
             it
             ,
             and
             to
             dravv
             there
             vp
             in
             Battell
             for
             the
             seeuring
             of
             the
             passage
             ,
             till
             the
             Ordinance
             &
             Baggage
             be
             al
             past
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             foote
             ,
             and
             Horse
             follovv
             ,
             vvhich
             are
             appointed
             as
             a
             Reserve
             to
             bring
             vp
             the
             Reere
             .
          
           
             The
             Armie
             then
             having
             passed
             through
             a
             vvood
             ,
             &
             come
             againe
             into
             a
             plaine
             
               Campagnie
               ,
            
             or
             Feild
             ,
             some
             Horse
             are
             to
             guard
             the
             vvay
             that
             comes
             out
             of
             the
             vvood
             ,
             till
             the
             Horse
             troupes
             are
             dravvn
             vp
             in
             those
             Fields
             ,
             and
             are
             possessed
             of
             the
             heigths
             thereof
             .
          
        
         
           
             How
             ,
             and
             in
             what
             manner
             an
             Armie
             is
             to
             passe
             over
             a
             River
             .
          
           
             When
             an
             Armie
             is
             to
             march
             through
             a
             Countrie
             ,
             vvherein
             there
             are
             Rivers
             ,
             &
             Brookes
             ▪
             the
             States
             Armie
             carries
             continually
             along
             vvith
             thē
             some
             ten
             or
             twelue
             boates
             having
             plancks
             ▪
             Sparrs
             ,
             Beames
             ,
             anckors
             ▪
             &
             Cables
             laden
             in
             them
             ,
             and
             vpon
             those
             
               Block-Waggons
            
             that
             are
             dravvne
             with
             some
             tē
             ,
             or
             twelve
             couple
             of
             horse
             ,
             vvhich
             comming
             to
             a
             river
             ,
             they
             presently
             take
             them
             dovvne
             ,
             casts
             out
             their
             anckors
             ▪
             &
             laies
             them
             over
             the
             river
             ,
             as
             broad
             as
             it
             is
             ,
             &
             as
             many
             as
             they
             have
             vse
             of
             ioyning
             them
             together
             ,
             laying
             the
             beames
             ,
             plancks
             ,
             sparrs
             ,
             &
             boards
             vpon
             them
             ,
             &
             so
             in
             an
             instant
             ,
             claps
             over
             a
             bridge
             ,
             over
             vvhich
             the
             Armie
             Ordinance
             ,
             &
             Carriages
             may
             passe
             vvithout
             daunger
             Sometimes
             also
             for
             expedition
             sake
             they
             lay
             over
             bundles
             of
             floate
             ,
             or
             slag
             bridges
             bound
             vp
             in
             Canvass
             ,
             as
             also
             they
             make
             a
             bridge
             with
             Barrels
             &
             Hogsheads
             ,
             in
             laying
             sparrs
             &
             planckes
             vpon
             them
             ,
             being
             clasped
             &
             fastned
             hard
             together
             :
             so
             that
             foote
             &
             horse
             ,
             and
             some
             small
             Feild
             peeces
             may
             march
             over
             them
             .
          
           
             A
             Bridge
             then
             (
             having
             good
             Inginiers
             ,
             Carpenters
             ,
             and
             vvorkemen
             )
             is
             presently
             made
             over
             a
             River
             ,
             or
             a
             brook
             ,
             for
             the
             securing
             vvhereof
             ,
             there
             are
             certaine
             peeces
             of
             Ordnance
             ,
             dravvne
             vp
             ,
             and
             planted
             by
             the
             river
             side
             ,
             to
             play
             vpon
             an
             Ennemie
             ,
             if
             they
             should
             force
             the
             passage
             over
             it
             ,
             and
             likevvise
             dravve
             vp
             some
             
               Harquebussiers
               ,
            
             lighthorsemen
             ,
             firelocks
             ,
             and
             muskettiers
             ,
             to
             give
             fire
             vpon
             an
             Enemie
             ,
             vvhile
             the
             bridg
             is
             a
             making
             .
             As
             soone
             as
             the
             bridg
             is
             layd
             over
             ,
             some
             firelocks
             ,
             halfepikes
             ,
             &
             horse
             marches
             first
             over
             it
             ,
             to
             maintaine
             and
             make
             good
             the
             other
             side
             of
             the
             river
             ,
             till
             all
             the
             Armie
             &
             carriages
             be
             come
             over
             ,
             &
             takes
             also
             along
             vvith
             them
             foure
             or
             fiue
             small
             peeces
             of
             Ordnance
             ,
             to
             scoure
             the
             passage
             ,
             a
             vvaggon
             laden
             vvith
             povvder
             ,
             and
             amunition
             ,
             and
             some
             Pionniers
             to
             make
             the
             vvaies
             ,
             hedges
             ,
             &
             ditches
             ,
             plaines
             ,
             &
             expecting
             an
             Enemie
             at
             hand
             commonly
             cast
             vp
             a
             trench
             ,
             or
             a
             vvorke
             on
             both
             sides
             of
             the
             bridge
             ,
             having
             some
             500
             Souldiers
             to
             guard
             it
             ,
             till
             the
             Armie
             &
             al
             the
             Carriages
             and
             Baggage
             be
             passed
             ouer
             it
             .
          
           
             Novv
             if
             an
             Enemie
             should
             seeke
             to
             oppose
             ,
             &
             〈◊〉
             your
             passage
             over
             it
             ,
             the
             Ordinance
             horse
             ,
             and
             firelookes
             above
             mentioned
             ,
             are
             〈◊〉
             ●●rposely
             vpon
             the
             Riversside
             ,
             to
             free
             the
             passage
             ,
             and
             to
             cleare
             the
             Coast
             .
          
        
      
       
       
         
           HAVING
           SHOWNE
           THE
           DUTIES
           OF
           THE
           Officers
           of
           the
           Feild
           ,
           touching
           the
           Infanterie
           or
           foote
           ,
           before
           J
           shew
           the
           severall
           forming
           &
           makeing
           of
           Battels
           .
           It
           is
           necessary
           that
           I
           briefly
           speak
           some
           thing
           of
           the
           Officers
           of
           the
           Feild
           ,
           which
           commaunds
           the
           
             Cavallrie
          
           or
           Horse
           troupes
           ,
           which
           are
           these
           ,
           namely
           .
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             Quartermaster
             Generall
             .
          
           
             THe
             
               Quartermaster
               Generall
            
             of
             the
             horse
             ,
             hath
             the
             particular
             Quartermasters
             of
             every
             troupe
             as
             his
             assistants
             to
             ease
             him
             ,
             and
             to
             helpe
             him
             to
             discharge
             his
             place
             ,
             either
             when
             the
             troupes
             are
             lodged
             in
             
               howses
               ,
            
             or
             formally
             quartered
             in
             the
             feild
             ,
             from
             him
             they
             receiue
             their
             orders
             ,
             and
             billets
             for
             their
             troupes
             ,
             chaulking
             the
             name
             of
             their
             Captaines
             vpon
             the
             doores
             of
             every
             howse
             ,
             where
             the
             troupe
             is
             to
             lodge
             .
             The
             further
             duties
             required
             in
             a
             
               Quartermaster
               Generall
               ,
            
             are
             described
             in
             this
             second
             part
             ,
             in
             speaking
             of
             the
             Quartermaster
             Generall
             of
             the
             foote
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             Commissarie
             Generall
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Commissarie
               Generalls
            
             place
             ought
             to
             be
             given
             to
             a
             souldier
             of
             great
             experience
             ,
             who
             hath
             bin
             bred
             vp
             in
             the
             warres
             ,
             being
             a
             man
             of
             
               valour
               wisedome
            
             &
             discretion
             :
             in
             a
             Cōmissarie
             
               Generall
            
             is
             required
             also
             
               vigelencie
               ,
               dexterity
            
             and
             an
             ability
             to
             compose
             Quarrels
             ,
             and
             punish
             disorders
             which
             maye
             arise
             betweene
             officer
             ,
             &
             officer
             ,
             souldier
             ,
             and
             souldier
             ,
             what
             he
             cannot
             doe
             by
             faire
             meanes
             ,
             he
             hath
             power
             &
             authority
             sufficent
             to
             punish
             them
             .
             Jt
             is
             also
             his
             dutie
             to
             give
             out
             orders
             ,
             to
             appoint
             guards
             vpon
             
               avenues
            
             and
             passages
             ,
             to
             keepe
             a
             list
             of
             all
             
               guards
               ,
               Convoyes
               ,
            
             &
             other
             
               actions
               ,
            
             to
             receiue
             orders
             from
             the
             
               Generall
               ,
            
             or
             the
             Lord
             
               Marshall
            
             of
             the
             feild
             ,
             to
             give
             it
             first
             to
             the
             
               Generall
            
             of
             the
             horse
             ,
             and
             afterward
             to
             the
             Quartermasters
             of
             the
             troupes
             ,
             that
             they
             maye
             giue
             them
             to
             their
             Captaines
             and
             superiour
             officers
             :
             also
             to
             range
             ,
             &
             embattaille
             the
             horse
             in
             that
             forme
             ,
             and
             order
             ,
             which
             his
             Generall
             ,
             or
             Lieutenant
             Generall
             shall
             finde
             good
             ,
             in
             whose
             absence
             he
             commaundeth
             the
             Horse
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             Lieutenant
             Generall
             .
          
           
             The
             
               charge
            
             of
             a
             Lieutenant
             Generall
             of
             the
             horse
             is
             of
             great
             authority
             ,
             &
             reputation
             ,
             and
             therefore
             he
             ought
             to
             be
             a
             man
             of
             great
             experience
             ,
             valour
             ,
             and
             wisedome
             ,
             carefull
             ,
             &
             diligent
             for
             the
             well
             ordering
             of
             the
             troupes
             ,
             because
             he
             commonly
             marches
             ,
             with
             them
             ,
             &
             lodged
             among
             them
             .
             He
             must
             haue
             knowledge
             of
             the
             waies
             ,
             &
             passages
             through
             Countries
             ,
             and
             choose
             the
             best
             waye
             ,
             least
             meeting
             with
             an
             Ennemie
             ,
             lying
             in
             
               Ambuscado
               ,
            
             vpon
             a
             march
             ,
             he
             maye
             giue
             him
             a
             blowe
             .
             Therefore
             ,
             he
             must
             alwaies
             haue
             his
             minde
             buyssied
             vpon
             the
             motions
             of
             his
             Ennemie
             ,
             discovering
             from
             what
             part
             they
             maye
             annoye
             him
             ,
             be
             it
             either
             foote
             ,
             or
             horse
             ;
             in
             how
             many
             howers
             they
             can
             march
             vnto
             him
             ,
             by
             what
             passages
             they
             maye
             assault
             him
             ,
             to
             send
             out
             
               Scouts
            
             &
             
               Spies
            
             to
             giue
             him
             true
             intelligence
             ,
             that
             he
             maye
             be
             provided
             for
             them
             ,
             against
             some
             suddaine
             attempt
             .
             To
             giue
             encouragement
             to
             officers
             and
             souldiers
             in
             the
             day
             of
             battell
             ,
             to
             carrye
             themselves
             brauely
             ,
             to
             charge
             home
             ,
             and
             to
             finde
             out
             all
             advantages
             ,
             to
             breake
             and
             route
             their
             Ennemie
             .
             He
             ought
             not
             onely
             to
             carry
             himselfe
             lovingly
             to
             the
             souldiers
             in
             hearing
             them
             willingly
             :
             and
             assisting
             them
             in
             their
             necessities
             ,
             but
             also
             to
             punish
             offenders
             seuerely
             ,
             which
             will
             make
             him
             to
             be
             both
             feared
             ,
             loved
             ,
             and
             respected
             .
          
        
         
         
           
             Of
             the
             Generall
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Generall
            
             of
             the
             horse
             is
             one
             of
             the
             principall
             
               chiefs
            
             of
             an
             Armie
             ,
             who
             ought
             to
             be
             a
             Souldier
             of
             great
             experience
             ,
             and
             valour
             ,
             &
             for
             the
             most
             part
             a
             personage
             discended
             of
             a
             noble
             
               familly
               .
            
             Yea
             a
             man
             of
             a
             high
             spirit
             &
             commaund
             ,
             for
             vnder
             his
             charge
             are
             the
             
               sinewes
            
             of
             the
             principall
             forces
             of
             an
             Armie
             ,
             from
             whose
             magnanimity
             ,
             valour
             ,
             &
             wi●edome
             procedes
             many
             times
             good
             successe
             ,
             when
             occasions
             are
             offred
             ,
             which
             are
             for
             the
             most
             part
             executed
             by
             the
             horse
             ,
             especially
             in
             the
             day
             of
             battell
             ,
             who
             charging
             in
             good
             order
             vpon
             an
             advantage
             ,
             maye
             happely
             rout
             an
             Ennemie
             ,
             and
             get
             the
             victorie
             ,
             wheras
             contrarie
             wise
             ,
             by
             the
             disorders
             of
             the
             horse
             ,
             it
             maye
             breed
             great
             confusion
             and
             losse
             of
             men
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Generall
            
             of
             the
             horse
             ought
             to
             take
             perticular
             notice
             ,
             not
             onely
             of
             the
             
               Captaines
            
             and
             officers
             ,
             but
             also
             of
             every
             gentleman
             and
             souldier
             that
             carries
             themselves
             bravely
             in
             the
             face
             of
             their
             Ennemie
             ,
             and
             to
             honour
             and
             respect
             them
             in
             publick
             ,
             which
             will
             encourage
             others
             to
             do
             the
             like
             ,
             &
             when
             occasion
             presente
             itselfe
             ,
             to
             advance
             them
             to
             military
             charges
             .
             Contrariewise
             to
             punish
             
               Delinquents
               .
            
             and
             such
             as
             doe
             not
             their
             endeavour
             ,
             in
             doing
             whereof
             ,
             he
             shall
             be
             honored
             ,
             loued
             ,
             feared
             ,
             and
             respected
             of
             all
             men
             :
             last
             of
             all
             ,
             by
             his
             high
             commaund
             ,
             he
             giues
             commaund
             for
             the
             due
             exercising
             of
             his
             troupes
             ,
             and
             helps
             in
             them
             their
             necessities
             .
          
           
             To
             conclude
             ,
             the
             proportion
             ,
             or
             
               grosse
            
             of
             the
             States
             horse
             ,
             answerable
             to
             their
             foote
             ,
             consists
             in
             eighty
             troupes
             of
             horse
             namely
             
               Curassiers
               ,
               Carrabins
            
             and
             
               Harquebusiers
               ,
            
             two
             Companies
             of
             
               Curassiers
            
             and
             two
             Companies
             of
             Harquebusiers
             being
             ioyned
             together
             ,
             according
             to
             his
             highnesse
             order
             make
             a
             
               battaillon
            
             or
             a
             
               Devision
               :
            
             These
             also
             being
             formed
             &
             ordered
             into
             ten
             Regiments
             ,
             maye
             be
             drawne
             as
             the
             foote
             are
             into
             three
             
               Brigades
            
             or
             
               Tercias
               ,
            
             making
             the
             
               Avantgard
            
             the
             
               Battle
            
             and
             the
             
               Reere
               ,
            
             as
             yow
             see
             them
             ranged
             in
             the
             first
             figure
             ,
             by
             observing
             their
             true
             distances
             .
          
           
             What
             a
             goodly
             show
             it
             is
             ,
             to
             see
             these
             80
             troupes
             of
             Horse
             drawne
             into
             three
             
               brigades
               ,
            
             the
             
               Generall
               commanding
            
             in
             the
             head
             of
             the
             
               Avantgard
               ,
            
             the
             
               Commissarie
               Generall
            
             in
             the
             
               battell
            
             &
             the
             
               Lieutenant
               Generall
            
             in
             the
             
               Reere
               ,
            
             being
             brauely
             mounted
             ,
             well
             armed
             with
             their
             skarfes
             ,
             and
             160.
             
             Trumpetters
             sounding
             
               Tantara
            
             in
             honour
             of
             their
             prince
             ,
             and
             Countrie
             I
             leaue
             it
             to
             the
             report
             of
             those
             ,
             which
             have
             seene
             it
             .
          
           
             Also
             of
             what
             excellent
             use
             ,
             &
             service
             horse
             maye
             be
             off
             in
             the
             day
             of
             
               battell
               ,
            
             for
             the
             breaking
             of
             foote
             ,
             as
             also
             vpon
             
               execution
               ,
            
             for
             the
             cutting
             off
             of
             
               Convoyes
               ,
            
             gayning
             of
             
               passages
               ,
            
             and
             the
             beating
             in
             of
             an
             Ennemie
             salying
             out
             of
             a
             Towne
             
               beseiged
               .
            
             I
             will
             leaue
             to
             the
             testimonie
             of
             
               historie
               ,
            
             and
             here
             wil
             I
             shutt
             vp
             this
             second
             part
             .
          
        
         
           FINIS
           .
        
      
       
       
         
           FIRST
           .
           OF
           THE
           ORDERING
           AND
           FORMING
           of
           a
           Devision
           ,
           or
           a
           Battalion
           ,
           and
           then
           the
           forme
           of
           an
           Army
           of
           thirty
           thousand
           Horse
           ,
           and
           Foote
           raunged
           in
           Battell
           .
        
         
           THe
           ordering
           of
           a
           Regiment
           ,
           according
           to
           his
           highnesse
           the
           
             Prince
             of
             Orange
          
           his
           cōmād
           ,
           hath
           bin
           showne
           already
           in
           the
           first
           part
           of
           this
           book
           ,
           namely
           ,
           that
           Cōpanies
           being
           made
           into
           even
           files
           ,
           &
           ten
           deepe
           ,
           foure
           or
           fiue
           Comapnies
           ,
           ioyned
           together
           make
           a
           division
           ,
           to
           wit
           ,
           the
           Pikes
           are
           drawne
           first
           into
           one
           bodie
           ,
           and
           then
           the
           Muskettiers
           into
           an
           other
           ,
           standing
           in
           their
           true
           distance
           of
           three
           foote
           in
           file
           &
           Ranke
           ,
           and
           18
           foote
           distance
           betweene
           the
           Pikes
           &
           the
           Muskettiers
           ,
           this
           is
           the
           first
           order
           .
           The
           second
           is
           ,
           whē
           the
           Muskettiers
           are
           equally
           devided
           ,
           as
           neere
           as
           may
           be
           ,
           and
           drawne
           vp
           on
           the
           right
           ,
           and
           left
           flankes
           of
           the
           Pikes
           ,
           there
           to
           giue
           fire
           by
           Rankes
           ,
           or
           to
           march
           away
           ,
           as
           these
           two
           first
           figures
           marked
           with
           number
           1
           and
           2
           doe
           shew
           .
        
         
           Now
           the
           fittest
           number
           of
           men
           to
           make
           a
           devision
           of
           ,
           is
           accounted
           to
           be
           500.
           
           Pikes
           ,
           &
           Musketteires
           ,
           that
           is
           ,
           25
           files
           of
           Pikes
           ,
           and
           25
           files
           of
           Musketteires
           ,
           or
           more
           ,
           or
           lesse
           of
           the
           one
           or
           of
           the
           other
           ,
           as
           they
           fall
           out
           .
        
         
           This
           number
           being
           so
           embattailed
           makes
           an
           
             Agile
          
           bodie
           ,
           &
           the
           best
           to
           be
           brought
           to
           fight
           ,
           and
           two
           of
           them
           being
           ioyned
           neere
           one
           an
           other
           ,
           can
           best
           second
           ,
           and
           releiue
           each
           other
           ,
           better
           thē
           your
           great
           
             Phalanges
             ,
          
           which
           are
           unweeldy
           bodies
           ,
           the
           experience
           whereof
           was
           seene
           in
           the
           Battell
           of
           
             Nieuport
             :
          
           for
           being
           once
           broken
           ,
           &
           routed
           ,
           they
           can
           hardly
           be
           reallyed
           againe
           ,
           and
           cannot
           bring
           so
           many
           men
           to
           Fight
           ,
           as
           the
           Lesser
           Bodies
           doe
           .
        
         
           Many
           of
           these
           Devisions
           being
           drawne
           together
           make
           a
           
             Tercia
             ,
             or
             one
             of
             the
             third
             parts
             of
             an
             Armie
             ,
          
           and
           three
           of
           them
           the
           whole
           .
        
         
           For
           all
           the
           Officers
           and
           Souldiers
           of
           an
           Army
           ,
           are
           devided
           into
           three
           parts
           called
           
             Brigadoes
             ,
          
           or
           
             Tercias
             ,
          
           each
           of
           them
           having
           a
           severall
           name
           ,
           to
           witt
           ,
           the
           
             Vantguard
             ,
             the
             Battell
             ,
             &
          
           the
           
             Reereguard
             .
          
        
         
           Now
           that
           Tercia
           ,
           which
           is
           to
           march
           first
           ,
           is
           called
           the
           
             Vantguard
             ,
          
           that
           which
           marches
           in
           the
           midst
           the
           
             Battaille
             ,
          
           and
           that
           which
           comes
           vp
           last
           the
           
             Reere
             .
          
           Everie
           one
           of
           them
           vpon
           a
           march
           every
           day
           takeing
           their
           turnes
           interchangeably
           :
           for
           the
           second
           day
           of
           the
           march
           ,
           the
           
             Battaile
          
           becomes
           the
           
             Vantguard
             ,
          
           and
           the
           
             Reere
          
           the
           second
           day
           hath
           the
           
             Battaile
             ,
          
           and
           the
           third
           day
           the
           
             Tercia
          
           which
           had
           the
           
             Reere
          
           the
           first
           day
           is
           the
           
             Vantguard
             .
          
        
         
           Moreover
           ,
           each
           
             Tercia
          
           may
           likewise
           be
           subdivided
           into
           a
           
             Vantguard
          
           a
           
             Battaille
             &
             a
             Reere
             ,
          
           to
           the
           end
           each
           of
           them
           with
           the
           more
           convenience
           may
           be
           orderly
           brought
           to
           fight
           ,
           and
           by
           that
           
             Cheife
          
           which
           commaunds
           them
           .
        
         
           Therefore
           ,
           the
           
             Battaill
          
           one
           of
           the
           
             Tercias
          
           of
           the
           Army
           ,
           being
           placed
           in
           the
           midst
           ,
           that
           of
           the
           
             Vantguard
             ,
          
           may
           be
           drawne
           on
           the
           right
           ,
           and
           the
           Reere
           on
           the
           left
           flanke
           of
           the
           
             Battaille
             .
          
        
         
           Now
           the
           number
           of
           the
           devisions
           ,
           which
           each
           of
           these
           
             Tercias
          
           haue
           ,
           are
           ordered
           ,
           and
           devided
           after
           this
           manner
           ,
           two
           devisions
           before
           ,
           two
           in
           the
           midst
           ,
           and
           two
           behind
           ,
           standing
           aboue
           ,
           as
           you
           may
           see
           in
           some
           of
           the
           figures
           of
           the
           Battells
           following
           ,
           having
           six
           or
           7
           devisions
           placed
           in
           everie
           
             Tercia
             .
          
           The
           seventh
           being
           vneven
           ,
           is
           placed
           as
           a
           Reserve
           behind
           the
           Reere
           ,
           to
           second
           the
           others
           in
           time
           of
           neede
           .
        
         
           The
           first
           devisions
           of
           the
           
             Tercias
          
           standing
           in
           a
           right
           line
           ,
           are
           to
           give
           the
           first
           
             charge
             ,
          
           according
           to
           the
           order
           of
           their
           
             March
             .
          
        
         
           The
           second
           devisions
           standing
           likewise
           in
           a
           right
           line
           ,
           makes
           likewise
           the
           second
           troupes
           and
           the
           third
           part
           of
           the
           
             Battaile
             .
          
        
         
           Now
           these
           devisions
           are
           also
           ordered
           and
           ioyned
           ,
           that
           if
           the
           first
           should
           be
           overcharged
           and
           come
           to
           give
           ground
           then
           the
           second
           are
           to
           come
           vp
           ,
           and
           to
           releiue
           the
           first
           ,
           yet
           in
           such
           a
           distance
           ,
           as
           they
           may
           not
           hinder
           one
           an
           other
           in
           marching
           by
           them
           ,
           but
           finde
           place
           to
           come
           vp
           betwixt
           the
           first
           .
        
         
           The
           third
           devisions
           are
           to
           be
           placed
           directly
           behind
           the
           second
           ,
           in
           a
           distance
           twise
           as
           
           as
           the
           second
           is
           from
           the
           first
           ,
           that
           if
           it
           should
           happen
           ▪
           that
           the
           first
           division
           should
           stand
           behind
           the
           second
           ,
           that
           then
           the
           third
           might
           have
           roome
           enough
           ,
           to
           put
           it self
           into
           good
           order
           .
        
         
           The
           Horse
           Troupes
           are
           commonly
           ordered
           ,
           the
           one
           halfe
           on
           the
           right
           ,
           the
           other
           halfe
           on
           the
           left
           flanke
           of
           the
           divisions
           ,
           and
           Battaillons
           of
           foote
           ,
           as
           the
           first
           figure
           of
           an
           Armie
           demonstrates
           .
        
         
           And
           sometimes
           there
           may
           be
           
             Battaillions
          
           of
           Horse
           interlaced
           ,
           and
           placed
           betwixt
           the
           
             intervals
             ,
          
           and
           distances
           of
           the
           Foote
           ,
           as
           the
           ground
           and
           necessity
           may
           require
           .
           For
           ,
           if
           an
           Enemies
           Horse
           should
           be
           ranged
           betweene
           his
           
             Battaillions
          
           of
           foote
           ,
           it
           is
           needefull
           then
           ,
           that
           the
           other
           side
           should
           observe
           the
           fame
           forme
           likewise
           ,
           and
           have
           horse
           to
           encounter
           horse
           ,
           least
           they
           should
           breake
           in
           vpon
           the
           foote
           divisions
           ,
           &
           so
           by
           this
           meanes
           they
           may
           with
           the
           more
           convenience
           second
           ,
           and
           relieve
           one
           an
           other
           ,
           otherwise
           the
           Foote
           being
           overlayd
           with
           an
           Enemies
           Horse
           ,
           having
           not
           Horse
           at
           hand
           ,
           to
           charge
           and
           second
           them
           ,
           might
           be
           easely
           routed
           and
           overthrowne
           ,
           and
           though
           and
           Enemie
           have
           not
           placed
           Horse
           betweene
           their
           
             battaillions
          
           of
           foote
           ,
           yet
           it
           may
           easely
           be
           done
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           discretion
           ,
           and
           foresight
           of
           the
           Generall
           .
           All
           which
           shal
           be
           clearly
           demonstrated
           to
           the
           Eye
           by
           figure
           first
           in
           beginning
           with
           an
           Army
           of
           six
           thousand
           Horse
           ,
           &
           24
           ,
           thowsand
           foote
           embattailed
           into
           three
           Tercias
           ,
           with
           their
           severall
           divisions
           ,
           and
           afterward
           I
           will
           show
           the
           grounds
           and
           platformes
           of
           the
           Battaile
           of
           
             Nieuport
             in
             Flanders
             ,
          
           fought
           (
           Anno
           1609
           )
           betweene
           
             Prince
             Maurice
          
           of
           famous
           memorie
           ,
           
             &
             Albert
             Arch
             Duke
             of
             Austria
             ,
          
           and
           then
           proceede
           on
           to
           represent
           vnto
           you
           the
           formes
           of
           Battailes
           shown
           by
           the
           Prince
           of
           
             Orange
          
           abouesaid
           ,
           &
           his
           highnesse
           brother
           the
           Prince
           of
           Orange
           that
           now
           is
           till
           Anno
           1635
           ,
           which
           may
           give
           some
           satisfaction
           to
           those
           ,
           which
           are
           desirous
           to
           follow
           the
           profession
           of
           a
           Souldier
           .
        
         
           
             The
             Demonstration
             of
             the
             figures
             following
             ,
             marked
             with
             great
             A.
             and
             B.
             
          
           
             THe
             two
             first
             figures
             ,
             marked
             with
             the
             figure
             
               1
            
             and
             
               1
            
             are
             two
             Divisions
             of
             
               25
            
             files
             of
             pikes
             a
             peece
             ,
             and
             ten
             rankes
             deepe
             ,
             ranged
             in
             Battaille
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             two
             figures
             noted
             
               2.
            
             and
             
               2.
            
             are
             two
             Divisions
             of
             muskettiers
             ,
             consisting
             also
             of
             
               25
            
             files
             a
             peece
             ,
             and
             
               10
            
             Rankes
             deepe
             as
             abovesaid
             .
          
           
             Now
             if
             you
             are
             desirous
             to
             alter
             this
             forme
             ,
             and
             divide
             your
             Muskettiers
             into
             two
             parts
             ,
             then
             you
             may
             draw
             vp
             
               13
            
             files
             on
             the
             right
             flanke
             ,
             and
             
               12
            
             files
             on
             the
             left
             flanke
             of
             the
             Pikes
             ,
             and
             giving
             them
             their
             true
             
               In
               tervals
            
             and
             distances
             for
             the
             Muskettiers
             to
             fall
             away
             ,
             then
             there
             are
             two
             divisions
             made
             of
             a
             Regiment
             ,
             and
             they
             stand
             as
             is
             shewed
             vnderneath
             ,
             marked
             with
             the
             figure
             
               3.
               
            
          
           
             The
             figure
             
               B
            
             represents
             the
             forme
             of
             an
             Armie
             embattailed
             ,
             consisting
             of
             
               24
            
             Regiments
             of
             foote
             ,
             each
             Regiment
             making
             two
             divisions
             of
             
               100
            
             men
             ,
             and
             
               20
            
             divisions
             of
             Horse
             ,
             Curassiers
             ,
             and
             Harquebusiers
             ,
             each
             division
             consisting
             of
             
               300
            
             Horse
             ,
             makeing
             six
             thousand
             Horse
             in
             all
             ranged
             into
             three
             Tercias
             ,
             with
             the
             true
             number
             of
             feete
             ,
             and
             distances
             betweene
             them
             ,
             as
             the
             figures
             showes
             .
          
           
             Note
             also
             ,
             where
             the
             gentle
             Reader
             sees
             a
             P
             marked
             within
             the
             Division
             ,
             that
             signifies
             Pikes
             ,
             and
             the
             division
             underneath
             are
             muskettiers
             marked
             with
             the
             Letter
             M.
             
          
           
             To
             conclude
             ,
             the
             Horse
             are
             noted
             in
             French
             with
             C
             for
             Cavallerie
             ,
             and
             in
             English
             with
             H
             for
             Horse
             .
          
           
             The
             figures
             that
             are
             Coloured
             are
             distinguished
             thus
             .
             The
             Pikes
             with
             a
             yellow
             ,
             the
             Muskettiers
             with
             a
             green
             ,
             and
             the
             Horse
             with
             a
             red
             colour
             .
          
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
           
        
      
       
       
         
           THE
           ORDER
           AND
           FORME
           OF
           QVARTERING
           and
           Encamping
           of
           an
           Army
           .
        
         
           HAvings
           howne
           the
           figures
           of
           Generall
           
             Formes
             ,
          
           and
           orders
           of
           embattailling
           ,
           ranged
           in
           the
           wat
           's
           of
           the
           vnited
           Provinces
           ,
           vnder
           the
           Command
           of
           his
           Excellency
           
             Maurice
             Prince
             of
             Orange
          
           of
           famous
           memorie
           ,
           and
           his
           Highnesse
           
             Frederick
             Henrie
             Prince
             of
             Orange
             ,
          
           our
           Captaine
           Generall
           that
           nowis
           :
           I
           will
           proceede
           on
           and
           shew
           how
           ,
           and
           in
           what
           manner
           an
           Armie
           ought
           to
           be
           encamped
           ,
           with
           the
           sevetall
           divisions
           of
           their
           quarters
           ,
           beginning
           fitst
           with
           a
           Company
           of
           Foote
           ,
           and
           Horse
           ,
           then
           with
           a
           Regiment
           ,
           and
           afterward
           an
           Armie
           entrenched
           ,
           and
           last
           of
           all
           come
           to
           handle
           
             Approches
             ,
          
           and
           all
           things
           depending
           therevpon
           ,
           for
           the
           beseiging
           and
           takeing
           in
           of
           a
           Towne
           or
           Fortresse
           :
           which
           for
           the
           most
           part
           ,
           I
           have
           translated
           out
           of
           
             Mr.
             Adam
             Fritach
             ,
          
           an
           excellent
           Mathematician
           ,
           in
           his
           booke
           printed
           .
           
             Anno
          
           1635.
           
        
         
           
             THE
             FIRST
             CHAPTER
             .
          
           
             
               Of
               three
               sorts
               of
               Campes
               or
               Leagers
               .
            
             
               THere
               are
               three
               kindes
               of
               
                 Campes
                 ,
              
               The
               first
               is
               called
               in
               Latine
               
                 Castra
                 Temporaura
                 ,
              
               that
               is
               ,
               A
               
                 Campe
              
               which
               staies
               not
               long
               in
               a
               place
               ,
               but
               removes
               and
               changes
               euery
               day
               :
               the
               second
               
                 Castra
                 Strataria
              
               a
               settled
               Campe
               ,
               which
               environeth
               a
               Towne
               ,
               or
               a
               Fortresse
               with
               intent
               to
               take
               it
               in
               ,
               and
               the
               third
               is
               called
               
                 Castra
                 Sustentoria
                 ,
              
               a
               Campe
               lying
               vpon
               a
               passage
               ,
               or
               river
               to
               stop
               and
               hinder
               the
               incursions
               of
               an
               Enemie
               from
               getting
               into
               a
               Countrie
               .
            
          
           
             
               The
               Campe
               which
               dislodgeth
               euery
               moment
               is
               called
               Castra
               Temporanea
               .
            
             
               This
               Campe
               is
               also
               called
               a
               
                 Flying
                 Leager
                 ,
              
               hiving
               no
               certaine
               place
               of
               abode
               ,
               but
               at
               every
               motion
               ,
               is
               continually
               to
               attend
               an
               Enemie
               vpon
               every
               remove
               ,
               and
               this
               Armie
               is
               to
               encampe
               ,
               when
               the
               Enemies
               Armie
               encampeth
               ,
               and
               therefore
               is
               called
               a
               
                 Flying
                 Campe
                 ,
              
               because
               it
               is
               to
               hinder
               the
               Enemies
               progresse
               .
            
          
           
             
               A
               Campe
               having
               a
               trench
               Cast
               vp
               about
               it
               ,
               or
               beset
               with
               Turne
               Pikes
               and
               Palissadoes
               .
            
             
               Now
               for
               a
               
                 Campe
                 ,
              
               which
               is
               ready
               to
               remove
               vpon
               an
               instant
               ,
               we
               vnderstand
               that
               ,
               which
               takes
               vp
               a
               quarter
               onely
               for
               one
               night
               ,
               which
               forme
               requires
               a
               great
               deale
               of
               wisedome
               ,
               and
               circumspection
               ,
               especially
               when
               it
               is
               to
               march
               ,
               or
               Quarter
               not
               farre
               from
               an
               Enemies
               Countrie
               .
               Therefore
               ,
               it
               is
               very
               necessarie
               ,
               that
               the
               
                 Generall
              
               sends
               out
               before
               ,
               a
               good
               number
               of
               Horse
               ,
               to
               view
               ,
               and
               informe
               themselves
               of
               the
               nature
               ,
               and
               condition
               of
               that
               place
               ,
               where
               the
               Armie
               is
               to
               Quarter
               that
               night
               ,
               for
               the
               accommodation
               where
               of
               ,
               they
               ought
               to
               chuse
               ,
               as
               neere
               as
               possibly
               may
               be
               ,
               a
               place
               situated
               in
               a
               plaine
               Feld
               ,
               to
               which
               the
               Armie
               being
               come
               (
               and
               that
               in
               good
               time
               by
               day
               ,
               the
               Quarters
               shall
               be
               made
               neere
               vnto
               the
               a
               dioyning
               villages
               )
               if
               there
               be
               any
               and
               the
               Horse
               lodged
               about
               them
               ,
               in
               places
               of
               danger
               most
               suspected
               .
               A
               campe
               may
               be
               encompassed
               with
               a
               Trench
               4
               foot
               high
               ,
               and
               3
               foote
               broad
               for
               their
               more
               safety
               against
               an
               Enemie
               ,
               which
               otherwise
               might
               give
               an
               attempt
               vpon
               some
               part
               of
               the
               Armie
               .
               The
               moorish
               grounds
               ,
               where
               is
               Enemie
               is
               not
               feared
               ,
               that
               may
               be
               beset
               with
               
                 Turne
                 Pikes
                 ,
              
               or
               with
               
                 Palissadoes
                 ,
              
               which
               may
               be
               taken
               vp
               againe
               ,
               when
               the
               Campe
               removes
               .
            
             
               After
               the
               Thenches
               are
               in
               defēce
               ,
               the
               Souldiers
               begins
               to
               make
               their
               huts
               of
               forks
               ,
               lathes
               ,
               withes
               and
               straw
               ,
               or
               for
               a
               night
               onely
               with
               sticks
               and
               boughes
               ,
               or
               such
               things
               as
               they
               can
               get
               ,
               the
               carriages
               and
               waggons
               laden
               with
               Amunition
               ,
               Materials
               ,
               and
               Victuals
               are
               to
               be
               lodged
               in
               the
               middest
               of
               the
               Campe
               ,
               with
               a
               small
               trench
               cast
               vp
               round
               about
               them
               ;
               but
               some
               peeces
               of
               Ordinance
               are
               to
               be
               planted
               vpon
               those
               
                 avenues
              
               and
               passages
               ,
               where
               an
               Enemie
               may
               best
               give
               on
               vpon
               the
               Campe
               when
               the
               watches
               ,
               and
               the
               Centinels
               are
               disposed
               of
               ,
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               Armie
               goes
               to
               take
               their
               rest
               ,
               the
               next
               morning
               at
               the
               breake
               of
               the
               day
               and
               at
               drummes
               beating
               the
               Armie
               dislodges
               ,
               and
               every
               one
               makes
               ready
               for
               to
               
               march
               away
               ,
               while
               the
               trench
               is
               a
               Casting
               downe
               ,
               lest
               an
               Enemy
               ,
               which
               followes
               the
               Armie
               might
               lodge
               in
               the
               same
               quarter
               .
            
             
               But
               if
               the
               Armie
               is
               not
               to
               march
               through
               an
               Enemies
               Countrie
               ,
               and
               that
               one
               is
               assured
               they
               cannot
               come
               neere
               vnto
               the
               Campe
               so
               soone
               it
               is
               not
               necessarie
               to
               environ
               the
               Campe
               with
               trenches
               ,
               but
               the
               Souldiers
               are
               either
               Quatered
               in
               houses
               ▪
               or
               feilds
               next
               adioyning
               to
               them
               ,
               in
               disposing
               of
               guards
               ,
               and
               Centinels
               in
               every
               place
               needfull
               ,
               and
               this
               order
               of
               march
               observed
               everie
               day
               ,
               till
               the
               Armie
               is
               come
               vnto
               that
               place
               ,
               which
               is
               resolved
               to
               be
               beseiged
               ;
               where
               then
               a
               formall
               ,
               and
               a
               setled
               quarter
               called
               
                 Castra
                 strataria
              
               is
               made
               .
            
          
           
             
               Castra
               Strataria
               and
               the
               proprieties
               thereof
               .
            
             
               The
               propriety
               of
               this
               Campe
               may
               be
               observed
               well
               out
               of
               the
               Instructions
               of
               
                 Veget
              
               in
               the
               22
               chapter
               of
               his
               fust
               booke
               ,
               as
               also
               in
               the
               
                 Castrametation
              
               of
               
                 Hygnius
                 Gromaticus
                 ,
              
               according
               to
               these
               observations
               following
               .
            
             
               First
               ,
               that
               the
               Quarter
               be
               made
               in
               safe
               place
               ,
               that
               is
               ,
               where
               there
               are
               no
               hils
               and
               heights
               ,
               which
               may
               commaund
               and
               serve
               as
               an
               advantage
               to
               an
               Enemie
               ,
               when
               he
               resolves
               to
               relieve
               the
               Towne
               ,
               or
               Fort
               beseiged
               ,
               or
               to
               assault
               the
               Campe
               ;
               for
               being
               lodged
               and
               fortifying
               himself
               vpon
               them
               ,
               he
               may
               easilie
               overlooke
               the
               Campe
               ,
               and
               then
               it
               is
               subiect
               to
               be
               played
               vpon
               by
               an
               Enemies
               Ordinance
               .
            
             
               That
               it
               be
               made
               (
               if
               it
               be
               possible
               )
               neere
               vnto
               some
               brooke
               or
               river
               ,
               which
               may
               commodiously
               serve
               ,
               aswell
               ,
               for
               the
               watering
               of
               Horse
               ,
               and
               Cattell
               ,
               as
               also
               for
               the
               Souldiers
               ,
               and
               by
               which
               ,
               with
               shipping
               ,
               or
               boats
               one
               may
               bring
               vp
               Munition
               with
               provisions
               ,
               and
               Victuals
               to
               the
               Campe
               ,
               by
               the
               helpe
               of
               a
               running
               river
               ,
               or
               the
               winde
               for
               the
               saving
               of
               excessive
               charges
               ,
               when
               one
               is
               driven
               to
               bring
               them
               vp
               to
               the
               Armie
               by
               
                 Convoyes
                 ,
              
               and
               waggons
               ,
               which
               oftentimes
               causeth
               a
               dearth
               in
               the
               Armie
               :
               for
               commonly
               Victulars
               ,
               and
               Sutlars
               raises
               the
               price
               of
               their
               Victuals
               ,
               and
               commodities
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               lengh
               of
               the
               way
               ,
               if
               they
               be
               constrayned
               to
               bring
               them
               vp
               by
               waggon
               hire
               .
               Besides
               ,
               it
               is
               a
               great
               advantage
               for
               a
               Quarter
               ,
               to
               lie
               by
               a
               river
               side
               ,
               because
               sometimes
               the
               water
               may
               be
               carryed
               round
               about
               the
               
                 Campe
                 ,
              
               which
               will
               make
               it
               stronger
               ,
               then
               if
               it
               were
               lodged
               in
               a
               plaine
               Feild
               ,
               and
               fortifyed
               with
               some
               small
               Forts
               ,
               and
               Redoubts
               ;
               so
               that
               all
               that
               charge
               is
               saved
               in
               makeing
               of
               workes
               ,
               if
               the
               Campe
               may
               commodiously
               be
               enclosed
               about
               with
               water
               .
               I
               say
               nothing
               of
               the
               great
               stinke
               ,
               caused
               by
               dead
               Horse
               ,
               and
               beasts
               ,
               as
               also
               by
               Butchers
               and
               their
               shambles
               ,
               which
               like
               wise
               is
               avoyded
               by
               the
               helpe
               of
               Water
               ,
               neither
               are
               men
               so
               subiect
               to
               sicknesse
               ,
               and
               pestilence
               ,
               which
               takes
               away
               many
               times
               a
               greater
               number
               of
               people
               ,
               and
               weakens
               an
               Armie
               more
               ,
               then
               if
               it
               were
               assaulted
               by
               an
               Enemie
               .
               For
               ,
               the
               prevention
               of
               which
               inconvenience
               ,
               the
               Carrions
               ,
               panchescand
               garbidges
               of
               Beasts
               are
               cast
               into
               it
               ,
               and
               carryed
               away
               with
               the
               streame
               ,
               and
               the
               Butchers
               quartered
               in
               the
               most
               remote
               parr
               of
               the
               Campe
               .
            
             
               One
               must
               also
               have
               a
               speciall
               care
               ,
               that
               there
               bee
               no
               thick-bussches
               ,
               and
               woods
               about
               it
               ,
               where
               an
               Enemie
               may
               lie
               in
               
                 Ambuscado
                 ,
              
               or
               fortifie
               themselves
               without
               any
               hindrance
               ,
               which
               would
               keepe
               a
               Campe
               in
               Continuall
               feare
               ,
               of
               being
               assaulted
               by
               an
               Enemie
               out
               of
               a
               wood
               .
            
             
               To
               make
               choise
               then
               of
               the
               sittest
               places
               ,
               to
               encampe
               and
               Quarter
               in
               ,
               those
               are
               held
               the
               most
               commodious
               ,
               which
               are
               situated
               in
               a
               plaine
               Feild
               ,
               seing
               an
               Enemie
               may
               be
               discovered
               a
               far
               of
               ,
               having
               then
               time
               to
               draw
               into
               Armes
               ,
               to
               oppose
               them
               ,
               and
               that
               the
               Canon
               may
               play
               vpon
               them
               ,
               in
               case
               an
               Enemie
               would
               attempt
               to
               assault
               the
               Campe
               by
               force
               .
            
             
               As
               many
               sicknesses
               are
               engendred
               by
               stanch
               ,
               end
               the
               putrifaction
               of
               the
               aire
               :
               so
               likewise
               many
               are
               caused
               by
               Moorish
               grounds
               ,
               
                 Marras
                 ,
              
               and
               bogs
               ,
               in
               regard
               of
               the
               damps
               ,
               and
               fogs
               ,
               which
               riseth
               out
               of
               the
               waters
               ,
               as
               also
               poysonable
               vapours
               ,
               arising
               out
               of
               marshie
               grounds
               ,
               where
               vpon
               the
               Souldiers
               hutts
               are
               built
               .
            
             
               Therefore
               one
               ought
               to
               be
               well
               informed
               ,
               before
               a
               quarter
               or
               a
               campe
               be
               made
               for
               an
               Armie
               ,
               whether
               those
               grounds
               bee
               covered
               or
               overflowhe
               with
               water
               ,
               which
               may
               often
               happen
               in
               
                 Autume
                 ,
              
               or
               
                 Winter
                 ,
              
               which
               were
               a
               great
               annoyance
               ,
               and
               hurt
               to
               the
               Campe
               ,
               if
               it
               were
               driven
               to
               stay
               there
               all
               winter
               ,
               and
               that
               one
               knew
               not
               the
               Condition
               of
               the
               place
               .
               Againe
               ,
               it
               may
               serve
               for
               some
               vse
               to
               helpe
               the
               beseiged
               ,
               or
               those
               which
               come
               to
               relieve
               the
               
               Towne
               ,
               when
               they
               may
               turne
               the
               water
               by
               some
               places
               into
               the
               Campe
               ,
               or
               can
               cut
               some
               dikes
               or
               Seabanques
               ,
               or
               keepe
               vp
               the
               water
               by
               banks
               ,
               and
               sluces
               ,
               to
               make
               it
               overflow
               the
               
                 Campagnie
                 ,
              
               which
               will
               bring
               a
               greater
               dammago
               to
               the
               Campe
               ,
               then
               fire
               would
               doe
               ,
               therefore
               one
               ought
               to
               consider
               ,
               and
               ponder
               well
               all
               these
               things
               ,
               and
               to
               thinke
               vpon
               some
               remedie
               to
               prevent
               these
               inconveniences
               .
            
             
               One
               ought
               also
               to
               make
               choise
               of
               such
               a
               place
               ,
               which
               yeelds
               good
               store
               of
               gràsse
               ,
               and
               hay
               for
               Cattell
               ,
               and
               straw
               for
               the
               accōmodation
               of
               the
               Souldiers
               ;
               because
               the
               want
               of
               fourrage
               for
               Horse
               ,
               will
               constraine
               them
               to
               fetch
               it
               farre
               by
               convoyes
               ,
               which
               is
               dangerous
               for
               the
               Souldiers
               ,
               when
               an
               Enemie
               lies
               vpon
               the
               snap
               for
               them
               ,
               and
               their
               Horses
               in
               those
               places
               ,
               where
               they
               are
               driven
               to
               fetch
               their
               fourrage
               ,
               which
               one
               is
               forced
               to
               doe
               with
               great
               
                 Convoyes
                 ,
              
               and
               excessive
               expenses
               .
               Also
               there
               must
               be
               care
               taken
               ,
               that
               there
               bee
               no
               want
               of
               wood
               for
               fyring
               ,
               and
               building
               of
               Souldiers
               buts
               ,
               as
               also
               straw
               serving
               for
               the
               same
               vse
               .
            
             
               A
               Campe
               ought
               not
               to
               quartered
               too
               neere
               the
               Towne
               Beseiged
               ,
               lest
               the
               Enemie
               may
               reach
               it
               ,
               and
               doe
               great
               annoyance
               to
               it
               with
               his
               Canon
               ,
               neither
               ought
               it
               to
               be
               quartered
               too
               farre
               of
               ,
               but
               that
               one
               quarter
               may
               with
               expedition
               relieve
               one
               another
               ,
               as
               also
               those
               which
               worke
               in
               the
               Approches
               ,
               if
               the
               beseiged
               should
               sallie
               out
               vpon
               them
               ,
               therefore
               the
               furthest
               ,
               and
               the
               nearest
               distance
               for
               the
               better
               safety
               of
               the
               Campe
               ,
               is
               to
               lie
               without
               Canon
               shot
               .
            
             
               The
               Circumference
               ,
               measure
               ,
               greatnesse
               ,
               and
               largnesse
               of
               a
               Campe
               ,
               ought
               to
               be
               answerable
               to
               the
               greatnesse
               or
               littlenesse
               ,
               of
               it
               :
               for
               one
               must
               not
               take
               a
               place
               too
               little
               for
               a
               great
               Armie
               ,
               neither
               a
               place
               too
               great
               for
               a
               small
               Armie
               :
               for
               the
               one
               will
               not
               be
               able
               to
               defend
               the
               Campe
               ,
               because
               of
               the
               smalnesse
               of
               it
               ,
               and
               the
               other
               not
               able
               ,
               and
               sufficient
               to
               defend
               a
               great
               place
               .
            
             
               Finally
               ,
               it
               is
               a
               point
               of
               great
               consequence
               for
               a
               Campe
               ,
               to
               have
               all
               the
               
                 avenues
                 ,
              
               and
               passages
               that
               comes
               to
               it
               well
               guarded
               ,
               so
               that
               an
               Enemie
               cannot
               lodge
               neare
               it
               ,
               to
               hinder
               the
               provisions
               and
               Victuals
               which
               comes
               to
               it
               ,
               for
               want
               where
               of
               many
               times
               an
               Armie
               is
               forced
               to
               rise
               .
            
             
               A
               Campe
               then
               being
               endowed
               with
               all
               these
               
                 Proprieties
                 ,
              
               no
               question
               but
               it
               is
               well
               settled
               .
               But
               seing
               that
               such
               places
               are
               seldome
               found
               ,
               which
               answers
               to
               all
               these
               proprieties
               described
               above
               ,
               one
               must
               accommodate
               themselves
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               propriety
               of
               the
               place
               ,
               and
               repaire
               that
               by
               Art
               ,
               which
               is
               wanting
               by
               Nature
               .
            
             
               If
               there
               being
               any
               hils
               ,
               or
               
                 heigths
              
               in
               it
               ,
               you
               must
               quarter
               ,
               and
               lodge
               vpon
               them
               ,
               when
               the
               nature
               of
               the
               place
               will
               afford
               it
               ,
               or
               if
               there
               be
               any
               other
               commodious
               place
               neere
               vnto
               the
               Quarter
               ,
               it
               ought
               to
               be
               taken
               in
               ,
               and
               environned
               with
               a
               Trench
               ,
               and
               a
               Redoubt
               made
               in
               it
               ,
               and
               Ordinance
               planted
               vpon
               it
               .
               But
               this
               height
               being
               situated
               vpon
               a
               passage
               ,
               or
               place
               of
               importance
               ▪
               a
               Fort
               is
               made
               vpon
               it
               in
               taking
               away
               ,
               as
               much
               as
               possible
               may
               be
               all
               advantage
               from
               an
               Enemie
               .
            
             
               The
               seige
               of
               the
               
                 Bosch
              
               may
               give
               vs
               an
               exsample
               herein
               ,
               where
               was
               a
               height
               situated
               vpon
               the
               way
               ,
               as
               you
               go
               to
               
                 Vliemen
                 ,
              
               and
               towards
               the
               Longstrate
               ,
               vpon
               the
               top
               of
               which
               hill
               ,
               a
               fouresquare
               Fort
               was
               made
               with
               foure
               
                 Demy-Bulwarkes
                 ,
              
               and
               besides
               a
               
                 Crowne-worke
              
               before
               it
               ,
               and
               before
               that
               as
               a
               surplus
               ,
               there
               was
               made
               a
               
                 Horne-worke
                 ,
              
               all
               which
               workes
               were
               neverthelesse
               environned
               with
               the
               line
               of
               circumvalation
               ,
               which
               encompassed
               the
               whole
               Armie
               :
               for
               the
               Enemie
               could
               hardly
               assault
               the
               Campe
               on
               this
               side
               ,
               because
               the
               hill
               lay
               so
               ,
               that
               it
               commanded
               all
               the
               grounds
               about
               it
               .
            
             
               When
               there
               is
               no
               River
               ,
               then
               all
               necessaries
               ,
               and
               provisions
               must
               be
               brought
               to
               the
               Campe
               by
               waggons
               ,
               wherevpon
               care
               must
               be
               taken
               ,
               that
               the
               waggonmen
               and
               Sutlars
               set
               not
               too
               high
               a
               price
               vpon
               their
               provisions
               ,
               and
               Victuals
               ,
               which
               might
               cause
               a
               Dearth
               and
               scarcity
               in
               the
               Army
               .
            
             
               For
               the
               avoyding
               of
               stincks
               and
               noisome
               smels
               ,
               the
               dead
               Carions
               of
               horses
               ,
               and
               other
               Beasts
               ought
               to
               be
               carryed
               and
               buryed
               farre
               off
               without
               the
               camp
               and
               quarters
               ,
               to
               which
               order
               also
               the
               Butchers
               are
               subiect
               ,
               for
               the
               carrying
               away
               of
               the
               panches
               ,
               and
               Entrailes
               of
               the
               Cattell
               which
               they
               kill
               ,
               and
               to
               bury
               them
               in
               pits
               without
               the
               campe
               .
            
             
               The
               woods
               ,
               thickers
               ,
               and
               groves
               ,
               which
               stand
               not
               farre
               from
               the
               campe
               ,
               ought
               to
               be
               taken
               in
               within
               the
               Trench
               ,
               when
               it
               may
               conveniently
               be
               done
               with
               asmall
               charge
               ,
               which
               
               wood
               and
               timber
               may
               serve
               for
               firing
               ,
               and
               other
               good
               vses
               .
               But
               when
               they
               lie
               too
               farre
               of
               ,
               and
               cannot
               have
               all
               within
               the
               Compasse
               of
               the
               line
               of
               Circumvalation
               ,
               which
               may
               be
               dammageable
               to
               the
               Campe
               ,
               then
               they
               are
               cut
               downe
               ,
               and
               burnt
               ,
               lest
               an
               Enemie
               might
               lay
               any
               
                 Ambuscadoes
              
               in
               them
               .
            
             
               Also
               ,
               having
               a
               water
               ,
               or
               a
               river
               ,
               which
               may
               be
               stopped
               by
               the
               Beseiged
               :
               so
               that
               in
               time
               ,
               it
               might
               overflow
               the
               Campe
               ,
               one
               ought
               to
               take
               a
               singular
               care
               by
               hindring
               it
               ,
               and
               casting
               vp
               of
               some
               bank
               to
               stop
               ,
               and
               carry
               it
               about
               the
               Campe
               ,
               to
               discharge
               it self
               elswhere
               ,
               wich
               necessity
               ,
               and
               experience
               will
               teach
               one
               .
            
             
               All
               these
               things
               then
               being
               maturely
               considered
               ,
               and
               overweighed
               ,
               after
               one
               is
               well
               informed
               of
               the
               nature
               ,
               and
               condition
               of
               the
               soile
               ,
               lying
               about
               the
               Towne
               ,
               or
               Fortresse
               ,
               which
               is
               to
               be
               beseiged
               ,
               and
               being
               come
               within
               two
               or
               three
               Durch
               miles
               of
               that
               place
               ,
               the
               Quartermaster
               Generall
               before
               the
               Armie
               rides
               out
               with
               some
               80
               ,
               100
               ,
               or
               a
               greater
               number
               of
               Horse
               ,
               as
               necessity
               may
               require
               ,
               to
               view
               the
               towne
               ,
               or
               Fortresse
               to
               be
               beseiged
               and
               considers
               well
               the
               soile
               and
               grounds
               that
               lies
               about
               it
               ,
               and
               draws
               a
               draught
               and
               platforme
               of
               them
               ,
               that
               he
               may
               the
               better
               distribute
               ,
               and
               give
               out
               the
               severall
               Quarters
               .
            
             
               All
               Quarters
               are
               not
               alike
               over
               all
               ,
               and
               of
               one
               and
               the
               same
               forme
               ,
               but
               one
               must
               accommodate
               himself
               many
               times
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               site
               of
               the
               place
               ;
               for
               sometimes
               one
               must
               content
               himself
               with
               one
               Quarter
               alone
               ,
               and
               otherwhiles
               the
               Campe
               may
               be
               devided
               into
               two
               ,
               three
               ,
               foure
               ,
               or
               many
               quarters
               .
            
             
               The
               Forme
               is
               also
               diverse
               ,
               seing
               one
               must
               governe
               themselves
               according
               to
               the
               situasion
               of
               the
               place
               ,
               The
               largnesse
               must
               be
               answerable
               to
               the
               number
               of
               the
               Regiments
               ,
               which
               are
               to
               be
               Quartered
               ,
               and
               which
               shal
               be
               handled
               in
               the
               next
               chapter
               .
            
          
        
         
         
           
             THE
             SECOND
             CHAPTER
             .
             OE
             THE
             DEVISION
             OF
             HVTS
             FOR
             Officiers
             ,
             Souldiers
             ,
             and
             Sutlers
             .
          
           
             TOGETHER
             ,
             With
             the
             true
             measure
             and
             distances
             of
             them
             ,
             according
             to
             his
             Highnesse
             the
             Prince
             of
             
               Orange
            
             his
             new
             Order
             for
             a
             Regiment
             ,
             and
             for
             the
             quartering
             of
             the
             Captaines
             in
             the
             Reere
             ,
             for
             the
             preventing
             of
             fire
             ,
             and
             disorders
             ,
          
           
             BEfore
             wee
             come
             to
             the
             division
             of
             the
             ground
             ,
             appointed
             for
             the
             Quartering
             of
             a
             regiment
             of
             foote
             ,
             it
             will
             be
             necessarie
             to
             discribe
             first
             ,
             how
             much
             ground
             ,
             commonly
             a
             Companie
             of
             120
             ,
             or
             of
             a
             150
             and
             of
             200
             heades
             must
             haue
             ,
             which
             may
             serue
             then
             as
             a
             Generall
             rule
             in
             the
             distribution
             of
             the
             quartering
             of
             severall
             Regiments
             ,
             containing
             diverse
             Colours
             ,
             and
             Companies
             vnder
             them
             .
          
           
             First
             for
             a
             Colours
             of
             120
             foote
             ,
             there
             is
             ordayned
             three
             hundred
             foote
             deepe
             .
             But
             the
             bredth
             must
             be
             according
             to
             the
             number
             of
             the
             heades
             in
             a
             Company
             ,
             which
             are
             some
             more
             some
             lesse
             :
             For
             a
             Company
             of
             100
             ,
             or
             120
             heads
             must
             take
             vp
             24
             foote
             inbredth
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             two
             rowes
             of
             Huts
             ,
             and
             a
             street
             betwixt
             them
             ,
             a
             Companie
             of
             150
             must
             haue
             40
             foote
             in
             bredth
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             three
             rowes
             of
             huts
             and
             two
             streetes
             ,
             and
             a
             Collonels
             Companie
             of
             200
             heades
             ,
             requires
             56
             foote
             in
             breedth
             ,
             that
             is
             foure
             rowes
             of
             Huts
             ,
             and
             three
             streetes
             ,
             besides
             the
             back
             streetes
             ,
             which
             are
             betweene
             Companie
             and
             Campany
             .
          
           
             As
             for
             Example
             ,
             the
             
               Quartermaster
            
             hath
             giuen
             him
             a
             
               Paralellogramma
            
             of
             ground
             ,
             which
             is
             300
             foote
             deepe
             ,
             and
             24
             foote
             broade
             for
             a
             Companie
             of
             120
             heades
             ,
             which
             he
             devides
             thus
             ,
             from
             the
             Lieutenants
             and
             Ensignes
             huts
             downeward
             to
             the
             Sariants
             huts
             in
             the
             Reere
             ,
             of
             the
             Sariants
             hutt
             ,
             and
             the
             boughs
             of
             the
             Captaines
             hutt
             :
             next
             the
             Captaine
             hath
             allowed
             him
             40
             foote
             in
             depth
             and
             some
             20
             foote
             btoad
             (
             because
             a
             passage
             for
             the
             Souldiers
             must
             not
             be
             stopt
             vp
             )
             for
             him
             to
             build
             in
             ,
             Then
             betweene
             the
             Reere
             of
             the
             Captaines
             ,
             and
             the
             Sutlars
             hutts
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             large
             streete
             of
             40
             foote
             made
             for
             the
             passage
             of
             men
             and
             waggons
             ,
             and
             for
             feare
             of
             fyre
             .
             And
             last
             of
             all
             ,
             there
             is
             20
             foote
             allowed
             for
             the
             depth
             of
             the
             Sutlars
             huts
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             ten
             foote
             for
             the
             forepart
             of
             his
             hutt
             for
             eating
             and
             drinking
             in
             ,
             and
             10
             foote
             for
             his
             Kitchin
             ,
             and
             this
             is
             the
             distribution
             for
             a
             Companie
             ,
             which
             must
             take
             vp
             (
             according
             to
             the
             Princes
             new
             order
             )
             three
             hundred
             foote
             in
             depth
             .
          
           
             The
             bredth
             of
             a
             Quarter
             ,
             is
             according
             to
             the
             number
             of
             the
             Heades
             of
             a
             Company
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             depth
             of
             180
             foote
             for
             the
             two
             rowes
             of
             huts
             aboue
             menrioned
             ,
             there
             may
             be
             made
             in
             each
             row
             ,
             twentie
             or
             two
             and
             twentie
             Hutts
             with
             a
             distance
             of
             two
             or
             three
             foote
             betweene
             every
             Cabin
             ,
             for
             the
             avoyding
             Eues-droppings
             and
             a
             little
             trench
             to
             receiue
             the
             Water
             made
             betwixt
             thim
             .
          
           
             The
             doores
             of
             the
             Lieutenants
             ,
             and
             Ensignes
             Cabbins
             commonly
             opens
             towards
             the
             Front
             ,
             and
             the
             Armes
             ,
             and
             the
             Alarme
             place
             ,
             but
             the
             Sariants
             towardes
             the
             Reere
             .
          
           
             The
             Souldiers
             doores
             open
             opposite
             one
             to
             an
             other
             ,
             that
             vpon
             any
             occasion
             they
             may
             presently
             draw
             out
             into
             Armes
             ,
             all
             which
             parts
             shal
             be
             discribed
             in
             the
             figure
             for
             a
             Regiment
             (
             of
             ten
             Companies
             )
             following
             .
          
           
           
             
               HIS
               HIGHNESSE
               THE
               PRINCE
               OF
               ORANGE
               his
               new
               Order
               ,
               and
               Forme
               for
               Quartering
               of
               a
               Regiment
               of
               ten
               Companies
               of
               Foote
               ,
               to
               wit
               ,
               the
               Colonels
               being
               200
               ,
               the
               Lieutenant
               Colonels
               150
               ,
               and
               the
               Captaines
               120
               Heads
               .
            
             
               
                 THE
                 DEMONSTRATION
                 .
              
               
                 A
                 Is
                 the
                 Colonels
                 Hall
                 ,
                 Gallerie
                 ,
                 and
                 Pavillion
                 .
              
               
                 B
                 Are
                 two
                 Hutts
                 for
                 his
                 servants
                 ,
              
               
                 C
                 The
                 Kitchin
                 .
              
               
                 D
                 Two
                 Hutts
                 for
                 the
                 Butlar
                 ,
                 a
                 Cellar
                 and
                 a
                 pantrie
                 .
              
               
                 E
                 The
                 Stable
                 .
              
               
                 F
                 A
                 place
                 for
                 his
                 Waggons
                 .
              
               
                 G
                 The
                 Captaines
                 Hutte
                 .
              
               
                 H
                 The
                 Quartermasters
                 .
              
               
                 I
                 The
                 Preachers
                 Hutt
                 .
              
               
                 K
                 The
                 Chirurgians
                 Hut
                 .
              
               
                 L
                 The
                 Lieutenants
                 Hutts
                 .
              
               
                 M
                 The
                 Ensignes
                 Hutts
                 .
              
               
                 N
                 The
                 Crutch
                 for
                 the
                 Musketts
                 .
              
               
                 P
                 The
                 Crutch
                 for
                 the
                 Pikes
                 .
              
               
                 Q
                 The
                 Alarme
                 placc
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 200
                 foot
                 between
                 the
                 head
                 of
                 the
                 Quarter
                 and
                 the
                 Trench
                 .
              
               
                 R
                 The
                 Provost-Marshals
                 Hutt
                 and
                 Prison
                 .
              
               
                 S
                 The
                 Sariants
                 Huts
                 .
              
               
                 T
                 The
                 Backstreetes
                 betweene
                 each
                 Companie
                 .
              
               
                 V
                 Is
                 20
                 foote
                 between
                 the
                 front
                 and
                 the
                 furthest
                 side
                 of
                 the
                 Pikes
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 bredth
                 of
                 the
                 whole
                 quarter
                 for
                 these
                 10
                 Companies
                 ,
                 is
                 436
                 foote
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Coronells
                 division
                 ,
                 84
                 foote
                 .
              
            
             
             
          
        
         
         
         
           
             THE
             FORME
             OF
             QVARTERING
             OF
             A
             REGIMENT
             of
             Horse
             ,
             consisting
             of
             five
             Troupes
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Prince
             of
             
               ORANGE
            
             his
             new
             Order
             ,
             the
             Captaines
             being
             quartered
             in
             the
             Reere
             .
             THE
             THIRD
             CHAPTER
             .
          
           
             FOr
             everie
             Cornet
             of
             Horse
             ,
             there
             is
             ordayned
             (
             as
             the
             foote
             are
             )
             a
             depth
             of
             300
             foote
             ,
             the
             bredth
             is
             not
             alwais
             a
             like
             ,
             but
             must
             be
             given
             according
             to
             the
             greatnesse
             ,
             and
             smalnesse
             of
             the
             number
             of
             heads
             ,
             serving
             vnder
             the
             said
             Cornet
             .
          
           
             A
             
               Cornet
            
             then
             containinge
             hundred
             Horsemen
             ,
             must
             have
             a
             place
             of
             300
             foot
             deep
             ,
             and
             70
             foote
             broad
             ,
             wherein
             they
             are
             to
             lodge
             ,
             and
             content
             themselves
             .
          
           
             The
             Captaines
             Hutt
             of
             the
             Troupe
             ,
             with
             his
             boughes
             is
             70
             foote
             broad
             ,
             and
             40
             foote
             deep
             ,
             being
             a
             part
             of
             the
             300
             foot
             abovesaid
             .
          
           
             Betweene
             the
             Reere
             of
             the
             rowes
             of
             the
             Horsemens
             Huts
             ,
             and
             the
             Captaines
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             street
             of
             20
             foote
             ,
             and
             the
             two
             rowes
             of
             the
             Horsemens
             Huts
             (
             as
             the
             foot
             is
             )
             is
             180
             foot
             deepe
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             from
             the
             Lieutenants
             ,
             and
             Cornets
             ,
             Huts
             in
             the
             front
             ,
             to
             the
             Quartermasters
             and
             Corporels
             in
             the
             Reere
             ,
             wich
             makes
             in
             all
             two
             hundred
             foote
             deepe
             ,
             and
             70
             foote
             broad
             ,
             the
             room
             for
             the
             Huts
             in
             each
             row
             is
             ten
             foote
             ,
             after
             which
             there
             is
             a
             small
             streete
             of
             5
             foote
             ,
             in
             which
             the
             Huts
             have
             their
             doores
             ,
             and
             commings
             out
             .
             For
             the
             Horse
             there
             is
             a
             space
             left
             of
             ten
             foote
             broad
             ,
             seing
             that
             the
             Cornet
             consists
             of
             no
             more
             then
             of
             100
             horse
             ,
             so
             that
             there
             are
             placed
             50
             Horse
             in
             one
             row
             ,
             and
             50
             in
             another
             ,
             and
             every
             Horse
             is
             allowed
             4
             foote
             in
             bredth
             ,
             and
             10
             foote
             in
             depth
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             space
             also
             appointed
             for
             his
             Master
             .
          
           
             Betweene
             the
             Captaines
             Hut
             ,
             and
             the
             Sutlars
             ,
             there
             is
             also
             a
             streete
             of
             40
             foote
             for
             the
             same
             reason
             ,
             as
             wee
             have
             discribed
             in
             the
             Quartering
             of
             foote
             ,
             after
             which
             there
             is
             a
             place
             for
             the
             Sutlars
             Huts
             ,
             which
             is
             answerable
             to
             the
             breadth
             of
             the
             Cornet
             70
             foot
             ,
             and
             for
             the
             depth
             of
             his
             fore
             Hutt
             10
             foote
             ,
             and
             for
             his
             kitchin
             10
             foote
             more
             allowed
             him
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             true
             dimension
             for
             the
             Quartering
             of
             a
             Troupe
             of
             100
             Horse
             ,
             is
             300
             foote
             deep
             ,
             and
             70
             foote
             broad
             .
          
           
             But
             a
             greater
             Cernet
             consisting
             of
             140
             heads
             ,
             (
             or
             it
             may
             be
             150
             )
             then
             they
             have
             given
             them
             a
             row
             of
             Huts
             more
             ,
             so
             that
             they
             must
             have
             in
             al
             three
             rowes
             ,
             of
             which
             the
             last
             standing
             alone
             ,
             is
             separated
             from
             the
             second
             by
             a
             streete
             of
             10
             foot
             ,
             which
             reacheth
             from
             the
             hutts
             of
             the
             second
             row
             ,
             and
             the
             Horse
             are
             set
             behind
             this
             new
             row
             ,
             after
             which
             (
             as
             before
             )
             there
             is
             a
             depth
             of
             10
             foote
             for
             a
             Horse
             ,
             and
             a
             small
             streete
             of
             5
             foote
             ,
             and
             for
             the
             Huts
             of
             the
             Horsemen
             likewise
             10
             foot
             ,
             whence
             followeth
             ,
             that
             the
             breadth
             for
             a
             Cornet
             of
             Horse
             of
             140
             heads
             takes
             vp
             105
             foote
             ,
             for
             the
             two
             rowes
             takeing
             vp
             70
             foot
             ,
             if
             you
             adde
             therevnto
             the
             two
             streets
             ,
             the
             one
             of
             10
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             of
             5
             foote
             ,
             with
             the
             distance
             left
             ,
             for
             the
             Horse
             ,
             and
             the
             Horsemen
             ,
             makeing
             20
             foot
             ,
             it
             is
             in
             all
             35
             foote
             ,
             vpon
             shall
             then
             have
             the
             breadth
             of
             105
             foot
             for
             a
             Cornet
             of
             140
             heads
             ,
             and
             the
             depth
             of
             300
             foot
             as
             before
             .
          
           
             Note
             that
             every
             Horse
             hath
             his
             head
             standing
             towards
             his
             masters
             hut
             ,
             that
             vpon
             any
             occasion
             his
             Master
             may
             goe
             directly
             to
             his
             Horse
             ,
             without
             going
             about
             his
             hut
             .
          
           
             The
             space
             being
             deepe
             enough
             for
             the
             huts
             ,
             they
             neede
             not
             build
             them
             closse
             one
             to
             another
             ,
             but
             leave
             a
             little
             distance
             of
             a
             foote
             and
             a
             halfe
             ,
             or
             two
             foote
             at
             the
             most
             betweene
             the
             Hutts
             :
             but
             betweene
             every
             fifth
             and
             sixth
             hutt
             ,
             there
             is
             an
             open
             space
             left
             of
             some
             6
             or
             8
             foote
             ,
             for
             the
             Horsemen
             to
             draw
             out
             of
             ,
             if
             necessity
             should
             require
             .
          
           
             The
             Hutts
             which
             the
             Horsemen
             build
             ,
             are
             built
             in
             the
             same
             manner
             as
             the
             foote
             are
             ,
             saving
             that
             they
             take
             vp
             more
             roome
             ,
             for
             the
             depth
             of
             the
             Hutts
             for
             the
             foote
             ,
             is
             but
             8
             foote
             ,
             and
             the
             Horsemen
             must
             haue
             ten
             .
          
           
             The
             two
             first
             Hutts
             in
             the
             head
             of
             the
             Quarter
             is
             appointed
             for
             the
             
               Lieutenants
               ,
            
             &
             the
             
               Cornets
               ,
            
             and
             the
             two
             last
             in
             the
             Reere
             are
             ordayned
             for
             the
             
               Quartermasters
               ,
            
             and
             the
             
               Corporals
               .
            
          
           
             Before
             the
             Horse
             ,
             (
             between
             the
             Hutts
             and
             the
             streets
             )
             there
             are
             mangers
             made
             for
             the
             Horse
             with
             boords
             ,
             or
             plancks
             fastned
             and
             nailed
             together
             ,
             which
             stand
             vpon
             posts
             driven
             
             into
             the
             ground
             ,
             and
             have
             S●iles
             covered
             over
             them
             ,
             from
             the
             one
             side
             to
             the
             other
             ,
             and
             because
             many
             Horse
             are
             of
             such
             a
             nature
             and
             condition
             ,
             that
             they
             will
             not
             stand
             together
             ,
             there
             are
             posts
             tyed
             between
             them
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             not
             strike
             ,
             and
             hurt
             one
             another
             .
          
           
             Now
             if
             there
             be
             any
             likelihood
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             prove
             a
             settled
             
               Camp
               ,
            
             or
             
               Leager
               ,
            
             then
             they
             may
             also
             build
             Huts
             for
             their
             Horse
             ,
             to
             keep
             them
             from
             cold
             and
             Sun
             .
             Th●se
             Huts
             are
             covered
             with
             straw
             ,
             as
             the
             Horsemens
             are
             ,
             but
             are
             open
             before
             and
             behinde
             ,
             (
             because
             every
             Horseman
             may
             have
             an
             eye
             to
             his
             Horse
             )
             so
             that
             they
             are
             but
             onely
             covered
             over
             head
             on
             both
             sides
             ,
             which
             coverings
             are
             also
             made
             oftentimes
             with
             such
             Sayles
             ,
             as
             Tents
             are
             commonly
             made
             of
             .
          
           
             But
             the
             Horse
             being
             come
             to
             such
             a
             place
             ,
             are
             commonly
             lodged
             and
             quartered
             first
             in
             Villages
             ,
             houses
             ,
             and
             barnes
             ,
             if
             there
             be
             any
             thereabouts
             ,
             at
             leastwise
             till
             they
             have
             built
             them
             huts
             for
             themselves
             ,
             and
             their
             Horse
             .
             But
             finding
             no
             Houses
             ,
             Stables
             ,
             and
             Barnes
             ,
             or
             such
             like
             accommodations
             for
             them
             ,
             then
             they
             will
             be
             constrained
             to
             let
             their
             Horses
             stand
             uncovered
             ,
             till
             they
             have
             built
             their
             owne
             Cabins
             ,
             which
             being
             done
             ,
             then
             they
             may
             make
             their
             Horses
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Ichnographie
            
             of
             a
             Quarter
             for
             a
             whole
             Regiment
             of
             Horse
             ,
             
               Harquebusiers
            
             and
             
               Curassiers
               ,
            
             consisting
             of
             five
             Cornets
             ,
             each
             of
             a
             hundred
             heads
             ,
             shall
             be
             demonstrated
             in
             the
             figure
             following
             .
          
           
             
               THE
               DEMONSTRATION
               .
            
             
               
                 ADrs
                 ,
                 is
                 the
                 Colonels
                 ,
                 Sarjant
                 Majours
                 ,
                 and
                 Captaines
                 Huts
                 ,
                 being
                 70
                 foot
                 broad
                 ,
                 and
                 40
                 foot
                 deepe
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Li
                 ,
                 and
                 Cor
                 ,
                 are
                 the
                 Lieutenants
                 and
                 Cornets
                 Huts
                 in
                 the
                 Front
                 of
                 the
                 Quarter
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Qu
                 ,
                 and
                 C
                 ,
                 are
                 the
                 Quartermasters
                 ,
                 and
                 Corporals
                 Huts
                 in
                 the
                 Reere
                 of
                 the
                 two
                 rowes
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 r
                 a
                 ,
                 c
                 g
                 ,
                 a
                 Street
                 of
                 20
                 foot
                 ,
                 between
                 the
                 Quartermasters
                 ,
                 Corporals
                 ,
                 and
                 Captaines
                 Huts
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 a
                 b
                 ,
                 and
                 g
                 i
                 ,
                 is
                 the
                 depth
                 of
                 180
                 foote
                 ,
                 for
                 two
                 rowes
                 of
                 Huts
                 ,
                 from
                 the
                 Lieutenants
                 ,
                 and
                 Cornets
                 Huts
                 in
                 the
                 Front
                 ,
                 to
                 the
                 Quartermasters
                 and
                 Corporals
                 in
                 the
                 Reere
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 a
                 k
                 ,
                 b
                 c
                 ,
                 p
                 g
                 ,
                 and
                 h
                 i
                 ,
                 is
                 the
                 breadth
                 of
                 ten
                 foote
                 for
                 the
                 two
                 rowes
                 of
                 Huts
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 k
                 b
                 ,
                 c
                 d
                 ,
                 o
                 p
                 ,
                 q
                 h
                 ,
                 is
                 the
                 streets
                 between
                 the
                 Huts
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 stables
                 for
                 the
                 Horse
                 ,
                 being
                 5
                 foote
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 m
                 n
                 ,
                 e
                 f
                 ,
                 is
                 the
                 great
                 street
                 of
                 20
                 foot
                 ,
                 for
                 the
                 whole
                 troupe
                 to
                 draw
                 out
                 in
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 From
                 b
                 to
                 t
                 ,
                 is
                 a
                 large
                 street
                 of
                 40
                 foot
                 ,
                 for
                 feare
                 of
                 fire
                 ,
                 between
                 the
                 Reere
                 of
                 the
                 Captaines
                 Hat
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Front
                 of
                 the
                 Suttlers
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 C
                 n
                 ,
                 is
                 the
                 Suttlers
                 Huts
                 ,
                 that
                 is
                 ,
                 10
                 foot
                 for
                 the
                 forepart
                 ,
                 and
                 10
                 foot
                 for
                 the
                 afterpart
                 for
                 their
                 Kitchins
                 .
              
            
             
               Note
               ,
               that
               a
               Colonell
               of
               Horse
               is
               allowed
               no
               more
               ground
               ,
               then
               a
               Captaine
               of
               a
               troup
               is
               ,
               onely
               this
               preheminencie
               he
               hath
               ,
               to
               be
               quartered
               in
               the
               midst
               ,
               and
               if
               his
               troupe
               bee
               stronger
               ,
               then
               a
               private
               Captaine
               is
               ,
               then
               (
               as
               is
               abovesaid
               )
               he
               is
               allowed
               him
               more
               ground
               ,
               and
               another
               row
               of
               hutts
               ,
               and
               thus
               much
               for
               the
               Quartering
               of
               a
               Regiment
               of
               Horse
               .
            
             
             
          
           
           
           
             
               Of
               Particular
               Quarters
               .
            
             
               BEsides
               ,
               the
               Quarters
               aboue
               mentioned
               ,
               there
               are
               also
               Particular
               Quarters
               in
               a
               
                 Campe
                 ,
              
               which
               ought
               to
               come
               into
               consideration
               ,
               to
               wit
               ,
               The
               
                 Generals
                 ,
              
               The
               
                 Generall
                 of
                 the
                 Ordinance
                 ,
              
               the
               Quarter
               for
               the
               Canon
               ,
               Carriages
               ,
               and
               waggons
               ,
               as
               also
               some
               other
               Quarters
               ,
               which
               shall
               be
               discribed
               as
               falloweth
               .
            
             
               
                 The
                 Generall
              
               hath
               a
               square
               place
               of
               Ground
               giuen
               him
               ,
               which
               as
               a
               Regiment
               is
               300
               foote
               deepe
               ,
               and
               600
               foote
               broade
               ,
               and
               his
               Tents
               and
               Pivillions
               sett
               vp
               ,
               and
               disposed
               of
               as
               the
               
                 Generall
                 ,
              
               and
               his
               
                 Tent-master
              
               shall
               thinke
               fitting
               .
            
             
               Also
               there
               is
               given
               to
               the
               
                 Generall
                 of
                 the
                 Ordinance
                 ,
              
               a
               depth
               of
               300
               foote
               ,
               and
               a
               bredth
               of
               480
               foote
               for
               him
               ,
               and
               his
               traine
               of
               Ordinance
               ,
               Officers
               ,
               and
               Handie
               crafts
               men
               to
               Quarter
               in
               ,
               hauing
               a
               little
               trench
               cast
               round
               about
               it
               .
            
             
               In
               which
               ground
               also
               ,
               is
               built
               a
               foure
               square
               Redoubt
               with
               haire
               cloth
               ouer
               it
               ,
               to
               laye
               in
               powder
               ,
               and
               Fireworkes
               ,
               for
               feare
               of
               fyring
               ,
               and
               to
               keepe
               them
               from
               wetnesse
               ,
               and
               rayne
               seing
               they
               are
               not
               so
               combustible
               and
               will
               not
               take
               fire
               so
               soone
               ,
               as
               straw
               ,
               or
               sailes
               will
               .
            
             
               There
               is
               also
               a
               place
               ordayned
               of
               300
               foote
               in
               bredth
               ,
               and
               depth
               for
               some
               chiefe
               Officers
               of
               the
               feild
               ,
               which
               are
               not
               lodged
               within
               the
               Regiments
               .
            
             
               The
               waggons
               also
               have
               a
               certaine
               place
               given
               them
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               give
               noe
               hindrance
               to
               the
               
                 Campe
                 .
              
               The
               depth
               is
               also
               commonly
               300
               foote
               ,
               but
               the
               bredth
               must
               be
               answerable
               to
               the
               nomber
               of
               waggons
               .
            
             
               The
               
                 Market
                 place
                 ,
              
               where
               Marchands
               ,
               Victulars
               ,
               Tradsmen
               ,
               Butchers
               ,
               and
               Bakers
               are
               lodged
               have
               a
               depth
               also
               of
               300
               foote
               given
               them
               ,
               and
               is
               some
               400
               foote
               broad
               ,
               in
               the
               midst
               whereof
               there
               is
               an
               open
               place
               left
               for
               the
               market
               place
               ,
               and
               the
               sides
               are
               divided
               into
               rowes
               of
               hutts
               and
               streetes
               .
               They
               make
               ordinarily
               eight
               rowes
               of
               hutts
               ,
               whereof
               foure
               are
               sett
               upon
               the
               one
               ,
               and
               foure
               vpon
               the
               other
               side
               ,
               every
               hutt
               being
               ten
               foote
               broade
               ,
               and
               betweene
               every
               two
               rowes
               of
               hutts
               ,
               there
               is
               a
               streete
               left
               some
               20
               foote
               broade
               .
            
             
               The
               first
               two
               Rowes
               of
               hutts
               next
               to
               the
               market
               plaee
               ,
               are
               appointed
               for
               
                 Mercers
              
               wollen
               and
               linnen
               Drapers
               ,
               and
               some
               other
               choise
               wares
               .
               The
               Tavernes
               ,
               and
               Ordinaries
               takes
               up
               the
               second
               ,
               the
               third
               are
               for
               handicrafts
               men
               ,
               and
               fourth
               for
               Butchers
               ,
               and
               Bakers
               .
            
             
               There
               is
               likewise
               a
               vacant
               place
               left
               for
               the
               lodging
               of
               
                 Voluntiers
              
               and
               
                 Strangers
                 ,
              
               which
               hath
               noe
               certaine
               measure
               ,
               but
               must
               fall
               out
               ,
               sometimes
               more
               and
               sometimes
               lesse
               as
               occasion
               serves
               ,
               and
               this
               is
               the
               description
               of
               a
               quarter
               ,
               or
               
                 Campe
                 ,
              
               both
               in
               generall
               and
               particular
               ,
               as
               neere
               as
               may
               .
            
          
        
         
         
           
             The
             Ichnographie
             of
             a
             Campe
             .
             THE
             FOVRTH
             CHAPTER
             .
          
           
             THe
             
               Quartermaster
               Generall
            
             makes
             first
             a
             Scale
             ,
             which
             will
             serue
             for
             a
             sheete
             of
             paper
             ,
             fitting
             it
             according
             to
             the
             proportion
             ,
             as
             the
             said
             paper
             will
             beare
             ,
             either
             greater
             or
             lesser
             ,
             and
             then
             makes
             a
             draught
             vpon
             it
             .
             According
             to
             the
             measure
             of
             his
             Scale
             ,
             he
             drawes
             out
             vpon
             this
             ,
             some
             
               parallell
            
             lines
             of
             300
             foote
             deepe
             ,
             which
             shewes
             the
             depth
             of
             every
             quarter
             ,
             with
             some
             other
             
               parallell
            
             lines
             of
             some
             50
             ,
             80
             ,
             or
             90
             foote
             ,
             as
             the
             ground
             will
             afford
             ,
             and
             the
             divisions
             betweene
             Regiment
             and
             Regiment
             .
          
           
             Afterwards
             he
             marketh
             upon
             a
             paper
             ,
             euery
             one
             of
             the
             said
             quarters
             ,
             and
             Regiments
             a
             part
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             proportion
             of
             the
             same
             scale
             ,
             as
             one
             hath
             drawne
             the
             lines
             aboue
             said
             ,
             and
             then
             cut
             it
             of
             so
             that
             they
             haue
             all
             one
             depth
             of
             300
             foote
             ,
             and
             the
             bredth
             according
             to
             the
             list
             of
             the
             number
             of
             the
             Companies
             of
             every
             Regiment
             ,
             and
             how
             many
             foote
             every
             Regiment
             and
             quarter
             will
             take
             up
             .
             It
             were
             better
             to
             take
             a
             peece
             of
             past
             board
             paper
             &
             then
             make
             &
             cut
             out
             also
             vpon
             the
             said
             paper
             ,
             the
             depth
             the
             bredth
             ,
             and
             the
             name
             of
             the
             Regiment
             the
             Colonell
             and
             person
             to
             whome
             the
             quarter
             belongs
             ;
             doing
             the
             like
             in
             all
             the
             other
             quarters
             .
             These
             littles
             papers
             being
             so
             cut
             and
             ordered
             ,
             one
             may
             put
             and
             lay
             them
             again
             upon
             the
             paper
             with
             the
             
               parallell
            
             lines
             abouesaid
             ,
             euen
             till
             they
             he
             laid
             according
             to
             your
             desire
             ,
             and
             let
             them
             be
             as
             they
             are
             fitted
             .
             One
             must
             nevertheless
             have
             a
             care
             ,
             that
             the
             Generals
             quarters
             be
             in
             the
             middest
             ,
             and
             that
             there
             bee
             a
             convenient
             space
             without
             his
             quarter
             ,
             aswell
             before
             ,
             as
             on
             both
             sides
             ,
             as
             the
             figure
             following
             will
             showe
             marked
             with
             the
             letter
             A
             ,
             where
             the
             Generall
             is
             lodged
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             the
             Campe
             ,
             and
             the
             bredth
             of
             his
             quarter
             ,
             according
             to
             this
             scale
             is
             1250
             foote
             ,
             and
             the
             depth
             as
             is
             said
             300.
             
          
           
             The
             quarters
             are
             separated
             one
             from
             an
             other
             by
             streetes
             ,
             and
             divisions
             some
             lesse
             some
             more
             ,
             as
             the
             ground
             will
             give
             it
             ,
             as
             somewils
             500
             ,
             otherwhils
             80
             ,
             92
             ,
             or
             100
             foote
             betweene
             quarter
             and
             quarter
             ,
             as
             you
             may
             see
             in
             the
             figure
             following
             .
          
           
             Finally
             the
             
               Quartermaster
               Generall
            
             takes
             first
             the
             bredth
             and
             depth
             of
             the
             whole
             quarter
             ,
             and
             Campe
             ,
             and
             draws
             it
             out
             (
             as
             io
             taught
             )
             upon
             a
             paper
             .
             The
             bredth
             here
             takes
             up
             3000
             foote
             and
             the
             depth
             2000.
             
          
           
             The
             draught
             of
             the
             campe
             being
             drawne
             upon
             a
             paper
             ,
             and
             the
             whole
             quarter
             designed
             ,
             it
             will
             be
             easie
             then
             to
             lay
             them
             out
             in
             the
             field
             .
          
           
             
               How
               one
               must
               marke
               and
               lay
            
          
           
             
               Out
               the
               quarters
               in
               a
               field
               .
            
          
           
             To
             this
             end
             ,
             the
             
               Quartermaster
               Generall
            
             hath
             a
             chaine
             divided
             into
             
               Rhyn-landish
            
             foote
             &
             Rodds
             at
             12
             foot
             the
             rodd
             ,
             &
             an
             instrument
             vsed
             in
             fortification
             ,
             or
             at
             least
             a
             wodden
             crosse
             with
             foure
             right
             angles
             ,
             and
             a
             good
             number
             of
             Beackons
             with
             banroles
             vpon
             them
             ,
             called
             
               Quarter
               beackons
               ,
            
             whereof
             the
             statues
             are
             painted
             ,
             and
             are
             some
             nine
             ,
             or
             ten
             foote
             long
             ,
             and
             sets
             vp
             one
             of
             these
             angles
             of
             every
             quarter
             ▪
          
           
             Being
             come
             into
             the
             field
             ,
             in
             which
             he
             is
             resolued
             to
             encampe
             the
             Army
             ,
             first
             he
             layes
             out
             the
             circuit
             of
             the
             Generall
             quarter
             ,
             with
             foure
             exteriour
             lines
             in
             such
             sort
             ,
             that
             every
             corner
             of
             the
             quartes
             makes
             a
             right
             angle
             .
          
           
             After
             one
             hath
             measured
             out
             the
             foure
             lines
             abouesaid
             ,
             he
             sets
             vp
             foure
             quarter
             Beacons
             ,
             and
             then
             begins
             to
             lay
             out
             every
             quarter
             a
             part
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             proportion
             ,
             which
             he
             hath
             marked
             in
             this
             paper
             :
             but
             to
             the
             end
             one
             may
             not
             err
             ,
             he
             puts
             upon
             the
             little
             cut
             paper
             the
             number
             of
             every
             quarter
             ,
             with
             which
             also
             the
             Beacons
             are
             marked
             ,
             by
             which
             meanes
             the
             same
             quarter
             is
             bounded
             in
             the
             field
             ,
             and
             the
             number
             is
             painted
             ,
             or
             cut
             upon
             the
             Beacons
             .
             It
             will
             not
             be
             amisse
             ,
             to
             have
             alwayes
             foure
             of
             them
             of
             one
             number
             ,
             which
             may
             easely
             be
             known
             by
             the
             Beacons
             ,
             in
             case
             they
             were
             all
             of
             one
             coulour
             .
             All
             which
             is
             demonstrated
             in
             the
             figure
             of
             a
             Campe
             where
             the
             Beacons
             are
             set
             up
             ,
             and
             noted
             with
             the
             figures
             1
             ,
             2
             ,
             3
             ,
             &
             4.
             
          
           
           
             
               The
               duty
               of
               a
               Quartermaster
               of
               a
               Regiment
               .
            
             
               AFter
               all
               this
               is
               done
               ,
               and
               every
               particular
               quarter
               drawne
               out
               in
               the
               Feild
               ,
               euery
               quartermaster
               distributes
               the
               ground
               to
               the
               Companies
               of
               his
               Regiment
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               
                 Iehnographie
              
               of
               the
               figure
               of
               10
               Companies
               showne
               before
               for
               a
               Regiment
               ;
               In
               laying
               out
               of
               his
               quarter
               ,
               he
               vseth
               a
               line
               of
               300
               foote
               long
               and
               every
               eight
               foote
               is
               marked
               for
               the
               depth
               ,
               and
               bredth
               of
               the
               huts
               and
               streets
               ,
               sticking
               downe
               into
               the
               ground
               at
               euery
               eighth
               foote
               a
               bough
               ,
               or
               stick
               ,
               aswell
               in
               the
               front
               as
               in
               the
               reere
               of
               the
               quarter
               ,
               giving
               also
               to
               the
               Colonell
               his
               ground
               in
               the
               midst
               of
               his
               regiment
               .
               But
               first
               the
               Quattermasters
               ptikes
               out
               the
               ground
               before
               and
               behinde
               for
               the
               Captaines
               ,
               &
               gives
               there
               the
               bredth
               of
               the
               streete
               between
               the
               Sarjants
               in
               the
               reere
               of
               the
               souldiers
               huts
               ,
               and
               their
               owne
               as
               likewise
               the
               depth
               ,
               betweene
               the
               Captaines
               boughs
               the
               Sutlars
               huts
               ,
               marking
               out
               first
               the
               foure
               angles
               of
               his
               quarter
               ,
               by
               setting
               into
               the
               ground
               his
               quarter
               staues
               and
               flaggs
               of
               his
               Colonels
               colours
               .
            
          
           
             
               The
               duty
               of
               a
               Sarjant
               .
            
             
               THe
               quarter
               being
               so
               laid
               out
               ,
               then
               the
               Sarjant
               of
               euery
               Companie
               kilspits
               it
               ,
               and
               divides
               and
               makes
               the
               partition
               of
               the
               huts
               to
               the
               Gentlemen
               and
               souldiers
               ,
               which
               they
               prick
               out
               by
               line
               and
               small
               boughs
               ,
               or
               sticks
               stock
               into
               the
               ground
               ,
               and
               so
               divides
               the
               rowes
               of
               huts
               and
               the
               streets
               among
               them
               ,
               euery
               hut
               having
               some
               4
               or
               5
               foote
               in
               bredth
               ,
               and
               for
               vniformity
               sake
               8
               foote
               deepe
               ,
               and
               thus
               the
               ground
               for
               a
               whole
               Regiment
               of
               what
               number
               so
               ever
               the
               Companies
               be
               ,
               is
               marked
               and
               drawne
               out
               in
               a
               feild
               ,
               as
               the
               figure
               of
               a
               Regiment
               for
               10
               Companies
               before
               mentioned
               demonstrates
               .
            
             
               The
               other
               quarters
               to
               wit
               ,
               for
               horse
               ,
               officiers
               ,
               ordinance
               ,
               and
               carriages
               are
               marked
               by
               number
               and
               letter
               in
               the
               campe
               following
               .
            
          
           
             
               The
               Alarme
               place
               .
            
             
               THere
               is
               left
               round
               about
               the
               circuit
               of
               the
               whole
               quarter
               ,
               a
               
                 parallell
              
               on
               all
               sides
               some
               200
               ,
               or
               250
               foote
               betweene
               the
               front
               of
               the
               quarter
               and
               the
               trench
               ,
               called
               
                 an
                 Alarme
                 Place
                 ,
              
               for
               the
               souldiers
               to
               draw
               out
               into
               Armes
               ,
               into
               
                 Parade
                 ,
              
               or
               when
               any
               
                 Alarme
              
               or
               commotion
               happens
               ,
               the
               
                 Campe
              
               or
               quarter
               being
               environned
               with
               a
               Trench
               ,
               and
               a
               Parapet
               of
               six
               foote
               high
               ,
               six
               foote
               deepe
               and
               three
               foote
               in
               the
               bottome
               ,
               and
               the
               ditch
               8
               foote
               broade
               .
            
             
               The
               souldiers
               of
               euery
               Companie
               are
               commonly
               commanded
               to
               make
               this
               trench
               ,
               parapet
               ,
               and
               ditch
               before
               their
               quarter
               ,
               or
               where
               it
               may
               fall
               on
               t
               ,
               because
               it
               serues
               for
               their
               own
               defence
               ,
               which
               the
               souldiers
               are
               to
               doe
               ,
               for
               their
               owne
               safty
               ,
               without
               giuing
               them
               any
               mony
               for
               it
               .
            
             
               There
               is
               assigned
               by
               the
               Quartermasters
               to
               euery
               Regiment
               ,
               how
               much
               ground
               they
               must
               cast
               vp
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               commission
               and
               strength
               of
               euery
               company
               ,
               which
               proportionally
               is
               equally
               divided
               among
               the
               companies
               ,
               that
               one
               companie
               do
               no
               more
               work
               then
               an
               other
               .
               In
               doing
               of
               which
               ,
               the
               Captaine
               and
               Officers
               of
               a
               companie
               are
               to
               ouersee
               it
               ,
               that
               the
               trench
               be
               done
               well
               and
               with
               expedition
               .
               Now
               the
               whole
               circūference
               of
               the
               quarter
               ,
               being
               measured
               out
               by
               line
               ,
               and
               
                 kilspitted
                 ,
              
               there
               is
               a
               generall
               
                 calculation
              
               made
               ,
               how
               many
               Regiments
               there
               are
               in
               the
               campe
               ,
               and
               how
               many
               companies
               each
               Regiment
               hath
               ,
               that
               one
               may
               know
               how
               many
               hundred
               companies
               there
               are
               in
               the
               army
               .
               And
               then
               by
               the
               rule
               of
               3
               (
               knowing
               the
               line
               and
               circumference
               )
               and
               the
               number
               of
               companies
               ,
               say
               ,
               the
               number
               of
               all
               the
               Regiments
               ,
               and
               Compagnies
               which
               are
               to
               make
               upe
               the
               line
               of
               
                 Circumvallation
                 ,
              
               amounts
               to
               so
               many
               feete
               ,
               or
               rodes
               ,
               how
               much
               ground
               then
               must
               a
               Regiment
               of
               ten
               companies
               haue
               that
               containes
               so
               many
               men
               .
               This
               
                 calculation
              
               being
               made
               ,
               the
               companies
               of
               euery
               Regiment
               draw
               out
               so
               many
               men
               ,
               after
               the
               Quartermaster
               hath
               furnished
               them
               with
               materials
               ,
               which
               is
               quickly
               done
               ,
               seing
               the
               men
               are
               relieved
               ,
               and
               many
               hands
               (
               as
               the
               proverbe
               is
               )
               makes
               light
               worke
               ,
               and
               will
               make
               hast
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               haue
               time
               to
               build
               their
               own
               huts
               and
               cabins
               to
               keepe
               them
               vnder
               covert
               .
            
             
               The
               quarters
               being
               thus
               fortified
               ,
               and
               the
               line
               of
               
                 Circumvallation
              
               made
               a
               double
               ditch
               for
               horses
               and
               strong
               
                 Redoubts
                 ,
                 Horne-works
                 ,
                 Crowne-works
                 ,
                 Batteries
                 ,
                 Half-moones
              
               and
               
               
                 Spurs
              
               upon
               the
               commanding
               places
               of
               most
               danger
               (
               as
               yout
               shall
               see
               in
               the
               
                 Ichnographies
              
               of
               the
               lines
               of
               Circumvallation
               before
               the
               siege
               of
               the
               
                 Bosch
                 ,
                 Mastrick
              
               and
               
                 Breda
              
               which
               shall
               be
               shown
               (
               God
               willing
               )
               in
               my
               third
               part
               of
               this
               booke
               ,
               all
               these
               things
               then
               being
               done
               ,
               after
               the
               demonstration
               of
               this
               Campe
               ,
               we
               come
               next
               to
               handle
               approches
               .
            
          
           
             
               THE
               DEMONSTRATION
               OF
               THE
               severall
               Quarters
               in
               this
               Campe
               .
            
             
               
                 A
                 Is
                 his
                 Excellenties
                 quarter
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 300
                 foote
                 in
                 depth
                 and
                 125
                 in
                 bredth
                 .
              
               
                 B
                 Is
                 the
                 Lords
                 the
                 States
                 quarter
                 being
                 300
                 foote
                 in
                 depth
                 and
                 342
                 in
                 bredth
                 .
              
               
                 C
                 The
                 Generall
                 of
                 the
                 ordinance
                 and
                 Magazin
                 300
                 foote
                 in
                 depth
                 and
                 800
                 in
                 bredth
                 .
              
               
                 D
                 The
                 quarter
                 of
                 the
                 Carriages
                 and
                 waggons
                 .
              
               
                 E
                 The
                 quarter
                 for
                 Marchants
                 ,
                 Tradsman
                 and
                 Victulars
                 .
              
               
                 F
                 Mons.
                 Chastillon
                 quarter
                 being
                 14
                 Companies
                 making
                 28
                 Rowes
                 of
                 Huts
                 300
                 deepe
                 and
                 500
                 foote
                 broade
                 .
              
               
                 G
                 Mons.
                 Bythunes
                 being
                 13
                 Comp.
                 making
                 28
                 Rowes
                 300
                 foote
                 deepe
                 and
                 500
                 in
                 bredth
                 .
              
               
                 H
                 The
                 Freeses
                 being
                 5
                 Comp.
                 making
                 15
                 Rowes
                 300
                 foote
                 deepe
                 and
                 235
                 foote
                 broad
                 .
              
               
                 I
                 Sir
                 Horace
                 Veres
                 Regiment
                 being
                 14
                 English
                 Comp.
                 making
                 31
                 Rowes
                 300
                 foote
                 deepe
                 and
                 548
                 broad
                 .
              
               
                 K
                 Mons.
                 Cicils
                 Reg.
                 being
                 7
                 Comp.
                 making
                 15
                 Rowes
                 300
                 foote
                 deepe
                 and
                 292
                 broad
                 .
              
               
                 L
                 Colonel
                 Ogles
                 Reg.
                 being
                 8
                 Comp.
                 making
                 16
                 Rowes
                 300
                 foote
                 deepe
                 and
                 308
                 broad
                 .
              
               
                 M
                 Mons.
                 Fulchs
                 being
                 6
                 Comp.
                 18
                 rowes
                 300
                 foote
                 deep
                 ,
                 and
                 300
                 broade
                 .
              
               
                 N
                 My
                 Lord
                 of
                 Bach-louch
                 being
                 6
                 comp.
                 12
                 rowes
                 300
                 foote
                 deepe
                 and
                 244
                 broade
                 .
              
               
                 O
                 Colonel
                 Egmont
                 his
                 Reg.
                 being
                 6
                 comp.
                 12
                 rowes
                 300
                 foote
                 deep
                 244
                 broad
                 .
              
               
                 P
                 7
                 comp.
                 Wallons
                 commanded
                 by
                 Count
                 Iohn
                 Ernest
                 14
                 rowes
                 300
                 foote
                 deepe
                 and
                 276
                 broad
                 ▪
              
               
                 Q
                 Count
                 Ernest
                 Lord
                 Marshall
                 10
                 Comp.
                 25
                 rowos
                 300
                 foote
                 deep
                 and
                 450
                 foote
                 broade
                 .
              
               
                 R
                 6
                 Comp.
                 of
                 Hollanders
                 12
                 rowes
                 300
                 foote
                 deep
                 and
                 242
                 broad
                 .
              
               
                 T
                 Prince
                 Henry
                 Generrll
                 of
                 the
                 Horse
                 4
                 Cornets
                 300
                 foote
                 deep
                 and
                 476
                 broad
                 .
              
               
                 V
                 Capt.
                 Qwicht
                 3
                 Cornets
                 300
                 foote
                 deepe
                 and
                 250
                 broad
                 .
              
               
                 W
                 Mons
                 .
                 Market
                 Lieut.
                 Generall
                 4
                 Cornets
                 300
                 foote
                 deep
                 and
                 349
                 broad
                 .
              
               
                 X
                 Mons
                 .
                 Ryhoven
                 4
                 Cornets
                 300
                 foote
                 doep
                 and
                 340
                 broad
                 .
              
               
                 Y
                 Mens
                 .
                 Bacx
                 4
                 Cornets
                 300
                 foote
                 deep
                 and
                 340
                 broad
                 .
              
               
                 Z
                 Mons.
                 Wagheman
                 3
                 Cornets
                 300
                 foote
                 deepe
                 and
                 253
                 broad
                 .
              
               
                 aa
                 Mons
                 .
                 Quaet
                 3
                 Cornets
                 333
                 foote
                 deep
                 and
                 350
                 broad
                 .
              
               
                 bb
                 Mons
                 .
                 la
                 Sale
                 4
                 Cornets
                 330
                 foote
                 deep
                 and
                 340
                 broad
                 .
              
               
                 cc
                 Mons
                 .
                 Stakenbrouck
                 4
                 Cornets
                 300
                 foote
                 deepe
                 and
                 340
                 broad
                 .
              
               
                 dd
                 The
                 Drost
                 Sallant
                 4
                 Cornets
                 300
                 foote
                 deep
                 and
                 340
                 broad
                 .
              
               
                 ee
                 Peter
                 Pany
                 commanding
                 the
                 Princes
                 guard
                 of
                 Horse
                 1
                 Corn
                 .
                 300
                 foote
                 deep
                 and
                 100
                 broad
                 .
              
            
             
             
          
        
         
         
         
           
             OF
             ALL
             MANNER
             OF
             APPROCHES
             ,
             AND
             their
             Profiles
             ,
             with
             the
             definition
             what
             approches
             are
             .
             THE
             FIFTH
             CHAPTER
             .
          
           
             THe
             Approch
             by
             which
             one
             approcheth
             safest
             towards
             a
             Towne
             ,
             or
             a
             Fortresse
             besieged
             ,
             are
             certaine
             hollow
             ditches
             ;
             called
             
               Trenches
            
             digged
             into
             the
             Earth
             ,
             whereby
             one
             may
             approch
             neare
             vnto
             a
             Towne
             ,
             or
             a
             fortresse
             covertly
             ,
             without
             any
             great
             harme
             ,
             if
             the
             lines
             be
             carryed
             well
             ,
             and
             kept
             from
             the
             sight
             of
             an
             enemy
             .
          
           
             In
             approching
             one
             ought
             to
             consider
             well
             ;
             1.
             
             
               The
               situation
               of
               the
               Towne
               or
               fort
               to
               be
               besieged
               .
            
             2.
             
             
               The
               propriety
               and
               forme
               of
               the
               approach
               .
            
             3.
             
             
               The
               beginning
               and
               distance
               of
               them
               ,
               and
               fourthly
               their
               profile
               .
            
          
           
             1.
             
             For
             the
             Site
             of
             the
             place
             ,
             one
             ought
             to
             consider
             well
             the
             propriety
             ,
             and
             nature
             thereof
             ,
             whether
             the
             ground
             bee
             high
             ,
             low
             ,
             hilly
             ,
             or
             plaine
             .
             In
             plaine
             and
             even
             ground
             ,
             one
             may
             finde
             foure
             kinds
             of
             Earth
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             1.
             a
             Clayie
             &
             a
             solid
             Earth
             ,
             2.
             
             Sandie
             ,
             3.
             a
             Spongie
             and
             rotten
             earth
             ,
             &
             4.
             moorish
             and
             a
             marchie
             ground
             which
             may
             bee
             covered
             &
             lie
             vnder
             water
             ,
             hauing
             no
             firme
             foundation
             to
             work
             vpon
             .
             Secondly
             ,
             hilly
             places
             whether
             they
             have
             a
             solid
             foundation
             ,
             3.
             
             Sandie
             ,
             and
             4.
             
             Stonie
             .
             Also
             one
             must
             take
             into
             consideration
             the
             Forrests
             ,
             woods
             ,
             wayes
             ,
             ditches
             ,
             hills
             ,
             and
             such
             like
             things
             ,
             as
             may
             lye
             round
             about
             it
             ,
             or
             go
             towards
             it
             .
          
           
             
               Of
               foure
               wanner
               of
               Approches
               .
            
             
               FIrst
               ,
               if
               one
               can
               not
               make
               choise
               of
               such
               ground
               as
               they
               desire
               ,
               then
               one
               must
               take
               it
               as
               it
               fals
               out
               ,
               whence
               there
               follows
               diuerse
               manner
               of
               Approches
               ;
               for
               if
               it
               be
               good
               ground
               ,
               then
               they
               run
               their
               lines
               directly
               from
               the
               left
               hand
               to
               the
               right
               ,
               &
               from
               the
               right
               hand
               to
               the
               left
               ,
               continuing
               it
               
                 alternatively
              
               till
               you
               come
               to
               your
               distance
               desired
               ,
               the
               half
               of
               which
               trench
               is
               digged
               into
               the
               Earth
               ,
               &
               the
               other
               halfe
               cast
               vp
               with
               a
               
                 parapet
              
               raised
               vpon
               it
               ,
               which
               serves
               as
               a
               blinde
               to
               keep
               your
               men
               from
               the
               sight
               of
               an
               enemy
               ,
               and
               thus
               you
               continue
               your
               approch
               by
               windings
               and
               turnings
               ,
               till
               you
               come
               to
               the
               
                 Counterscharfe
                 ,
              
               and
               moate
               of
               the
               Towne
               besieged
               ,
               and
               this
               kinde
               of
               approach
               you
               vse
               in
               good
               and
               firme
               Earth
               .
            
             
               The
               second
               kinde
               of
               Approach
               is
               that
               ,
               which
               is
               made
               in
               a
               
                 Sandie
                 ground
                 ,
              
               which
               you
               may
               run
               in
               the
               same
               manner
               with
               windings
               ,
               and
               turnings
               as
               you
               did
               the
               first
               ,
               saving
               that
               your
               
                 parapet
              
               will
               not
               hold
               with
               sand
               ,
               and
               therefore
               ,
               because
               Sand
               is
               not
               so
               good
               to
               work
               vpon
               ,
               and
               will
               not
               lie
               so
               firme
               as
               other
               Earth
               doth
               ,
               but
               will
               cost
               more
               labour
               ,
               and
               require
               more
               time
               then
               solid
               Earth
               ,
               therefore
               one
               must
               approch
               neerer
               and
               neerer
               by
               setting
               vp
               of
               Gabions
               .
            
             
               The
               third
               way
               hath
               another
               difference
               ,
               then
               those
               two
               aboue
               mentioned
               ,
               for
               sometimes
               one
               may
               finde
               good
               Earth
               ,
               and
               Sandie
               mingled
               together
               ,
               yea
               ,
               and
               somewhiles
               a
               
                 Marras
              
               on
               both
               sides
               ,
               in
               so
               much
               that
               one
               shall
               haue
               but
               a
               narrow
               way
               ,
               through
               which
               one
               is
               to
               carry
               his
               approch
               ,
               and
               as
               in
               the
               former
               you
               cannot
               run
               your
               lines
               from
               the
               left
               hand
               to
               the
               right
               ,
               or
               from
               the
               right
               hand
               to
               the
               left
               ,
               so
               in
               this
               you
               are
               driven
               to
               run
               a
               line
               directly
               vpon
               the
               Towne
               or
               Fortresse
               besieged
               .
            
             
               Now
               this
               manner
               of
               approach
               carried
               in
               a
               right
               line
               ,
               is
               not
               so
               laboursome
               &
               chargeable
               as
               the
               others
               before-named
               ,
               which
               are
               run
               with
               
                 oblique
                 lines
                 :
              
               but
               the
               greatest
               labour
               is
               ,
               such
               an
               Approach
               must
               be
               made
               deeper
               ,
               then
               the
               former
               ,
               &
               do
               require
               a
               double
               trench
               &
               
                 parapet
                 ,
              
               whereas
               the
               others
               haue
               but
               a
               single
               one
               ,
               and
               ever
               and
               anon
               there
               must
               be
               blinds
               sett
               vp
               because
               this
               kinde
               is
               more
               dangerous
               ,
               and
               in
               this
               approch
               the
               one
               half
               of
               the
               Earth
               is
               sett
               vp
               with
               a
               parapet
               on
               the
               one
               side
               ,
               and
               the
               other
               half
               on
               the
               other
               side
               .
            
             
               The
               Approch
               which
               is
               made
               through
               moorish
               ,
               and
               marchie
               grounds
               overflowne
               ,
               is
               almost
               impossible
               ,
               by
               reason
               of
               the
               inconstancie
               of
               the
               water
               ,
               which
               riseth
               ,
               and
               falleth
               according
               to
               the
               season
               ,
               and
               which
               causeth
               many
               inconveniences
               :
               for
               when
               one
               expects
               dry
               
               season
               ,
               the
               weather
               may
               alter
               and
               proue
               rainie
               and
               stormie
               ,
               which
               may
               not
               onely
               hinder
               the
               approch
               begun
               ,
               but
               also
               fill
               the
               trenches
               with
               water
               ,
               therefore
               in
               such
               cases
               ,
               one
               must
               accommodate
               themselves
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               weather
               ,
               and
               vse
               the
               wisedome
               ,
               &
               experience
               of
               jngeniers
               herein
               ,
               for
               the
               preuenting
               of
               these
               inconveniences
               .
            
             
               As
               the
               half
               of
               an
               ordinarie
               approch
               ,
               is
               digged
               into
               the
               ground
               ,
               so
               the
               other
               half
               is
               cast
               vpon
               ground
               :
               this
               kinde
               being
               made
               over
               water
               and
               
                 Marras
                 ,
              
               having
               no
               firme
               foundation
               ,
               the
               foundation
               of
               them
               is
               layd
               by
               filling
               vp
               the
               water
               with
               bundles
               of
               Boughs
               ,
               Brush
               ,
               faggots
               ,
               &
               such
               like
               things
               ,
               hauing
               Earth
               cast
               vpon
               them
               ,
               to
               settle
               them
               ,
               &
               make
               them
               lie
               fast
               ,
               &
               the
               Earth
               being
               brought
               vpon
               wheelebarrowes
               from
               some
               other
               place
               ,
               a
               
                 parapet
              
               is
               raised
               ,
               and
               blinds
               sett
               vp
               ,
               that
               the
               workemen
               ,
               &
               Souldiers
               may
               work
               and
               be
               in
               more
               safety
               ,
               which
               guards
               it
               .
            
             
               The
               fourth
               difference
               of
               approch
               ,
               is
               also
               made
               by
               Earth
               brought
               from
               some
               other
               places
               ,
               having
               
                 Fagots
                 ,
                 Brush
                 ,
                 Bavins
                 ,
              
               and
               planches
               layd
               vpon
               it
               ,
               with
               
                 parapets
              
               and
               blinds
               sett
               vp
               .
            
             
               Fifthly
               ,
               having
               want
               of
               good
               Earth
               ,
               and
               finding
               great
               store
               of
               Sand
               ,
               then
               the
               parapet
               must
               be
               made
               with
               
                 Gabions
                 ,
              
               and
               Cannon
               Baskets
               filled
               with
               Earth
               .
            
             
               The
               sixth
               &
               last
               manner
               taketh
               its
               originall
               from
               the
               former
               ,
               &
               is
               made
               with
               Redoubts
               in
               ioyning
               the
               one
               to
               the
               other
               .
            
             
               And
               if
               your
               meete
               with
               a
               stonie
               place
               ,
               then
               you
               must
               help
               your self
               with
               
                 Gabions
                 ,
              
               &
               fetch
               your
               Earth
               from
               some
               other
               place
               ,
               as
               you
               did
               in
               marchie
               grounds
               .
            
             
               These
               are
               all
               the
               severall
               kindes
               of
               Approches
               ,
               that
               we
               have
               mentioned
               here
               in
               this
               Chapter
               ,
               which
               one
               cannot
               make
               without
               difference
               and
               judgement
               ,
               because
               the
               one
               is
               more
               laborious
               ,
               and
               dangerous
               then
               the
               other
               ,
               as
               we
               have
               taught
               .
            
             
               But
               to
               the
               end
               all
               inconveniences
               may
               be
               avoided
               ,
               one
               must
               first
               informe
               himself
               well
               the
               nature
               of
               the
               place
               ,
               through
               which
               one
               is
               resolved
               to
               run
               an
               approch
               ,
               &
               take
               a
               speciall
               care
               ,
               that
               no
               errour
               and
               faults
               be
               committed
               through
               ignorance
               ,
               which
               may
               loose
               time
               expence
               and
               labour
               ,
               and
               may
               crosse
               the
               happy
               successie
               of
               an
               Armie
               ,
               for
               it
               were
               an
               absurd
               thing
               ,
               of
               one
               should
               make
               that
               approchin
               a
               moorish
               ground
               ,
               which
               is
               to
               bee
               made
               in
               a
               plaine
               place
               ,
               where
               there
               is
               good
               Earth
               ,
               where
               one
               hath
               elbow
               room
               ,
               and
               space
               enough
               to
               run
               oblique
               lines
               ,
               or
               whē
               one
               would
               make
               them
               above
               the
               ground
               ,
               when
               there
               is
               Earth
               enough
               to
               be
               digged
               out
               of
               the
               ground
               and
               cast
               vp
               .
            
             
               Besides
               ,
               one
               ought
               to
               consider
               well
               ,
               the
               distance
               of
               the
               first
               breaking
               of
               ground
               ,
               between
               it
               and
               the
               Towne
               or
               Fortresse
               to
               be
               approched
               to
               ,
               that
               one
               begins
               not
               roo
               neere
               ,
               nor
               too
               farre
               off
               ,
               for
               the
               beginning
               of
               the
               Approches
               being
               too
               farre
               from
               the
               Fortresse
               ,
               one
               looses
               both
               time
               and
               paines
               ,
               when
               one
               begins
               to
               breake
               ground
               from
               a
               place
               which
               is
               in
               safety
               .
            
             
               On
               the
               other
               side
               ,
               to
               begin
               an
               approch
               within
               the
               sight
               of
               an
               Ennemie
               ,
               one
               cannot
               so
               well
               defēde
               himself
               from
               musket
               shott
               ,
               because
               the
               Muskettiers
               may
               take
               a
               surer
               marke
               ,
               then
               when
               they
               shoot
               at
               
                 Randum
                 ,
              
               and
               it
               will
               be
               hort
               for
               the
               workmen
               ,
               before
               they
               can
               gett
               into
               the
               ground
               ,
               besides
               the
               workemen
               cannot
               be
               so
               well
               seconded
               ,
               and
               relieved
               without
               great
               danger
               ,
               especially
               if
               the
               besieged
               sallies
               out
               ,
               and
               gives
               them
               hort
               
                 Alarmes
                 ,
              
               so
               that
               they
               must
               be
               presently
               ,
               relived
               ,
               or
               else
               they
               will
               be
               driven
               to
               quit
               the
               approches
               and
               to
               retire
               ,
               if
               they
               be
               not
               seconded
               betimes
               .
            
          
           
             
               The
               distances
               betweene
               the
               beginning
               of
               an
               Approch
               ,
               and
               a
               Fortresse
               .
            
             
               HEnce
               one
               may
               clearely
               vnderstand
               ,
               the
               distance
               of
               the
               Approch
               to
               the
               Towne
               or
               Fortresse
               besieged
               ,
               and
               the
               place
               where
               one
               begins
               to
               breake
               ground
               first
               ,
               ought
               to
               be
               as
               farre
               ,
               as
               a
               musket
               can
               well
               carry
               from
               the
               outworks
               of
               the
               Fortresse
               ,
               which
               may
               be
               about
               some
               90
               ,
               80
               ,
               70
               ,
               or
               60
               rod
               at
               12
               foote
               the
               rodd
               ,
               or
               as
               the
               nature
               of
               the
               place
               wil
               afoard
               it
               .
            
             
             
               
                 The
                 beginning
                 of
                 an
                 Approch
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 or
                 first
                 breaking
                 of
                 Ground
                 .
              
            
             
               When
               one
               would
               begin
               an
               Approch
               ,
               there
               must
               be
               choise
               made
               of
               200
               ,
               300
               ,
               400
               ,
               or
               500
               lusty
               souldiers
               ,
               which
               are
               vsed
               to
               work
               ,
               now
               besides
               the
               ordinairies
               armes
               ,
               which
               they
               carrie
               ,
               they
               take
               downe
               alōg
               with
               them
               into
               the
               approches
               spades
               ,
               shovells
               ,
               pickaxses
               ,
               and
               others
               materials
               necessary
               for
               work
               ,
               and
               are
               set
               in
               order
               by
               the
               Ingenier
               in
               that
               place
               ,
               where
               the
               Approch
               begins
               ,
               &
               to
               the
               end
               they
               may
               begin
               with
               the
               more
               safety
               ,
               they
               have
               diverse
               
                 guards
                 of
              
               Foote
               ,
               and
               horse
               standing
               up
               and
               down
               ,
               here
               and
               there
               to
               defend
               them
               ,
               if
               the
               besieged
               should
               sally
               out
               vpon
               the
               workemen
               ,
               and
               because
               they
               may
               make
               a
               good
               beginning
               ,
               first
               they
               cast
               vp
               a
               
                 Redoubt
              
               or
               two
               ,
               from
               whence
               the
               trench
               &
               approch
               is
               run
               ,
               which
               are
               environned
               with
               a
               parapet
               ,
               &
               a
               good
               ditch
               ,
               &
               the
               sides
               of
               the
               redouts
               made
               some
               eigt
               rods
               square
               ,
               as
               you
               may
               see
               in
               the
               profile
               of
               trenches
               .
            
             
               Indeed
               ,
               sometimes
               as
               occasion
               may
               serve
               ,
               they
               make
               
                 demy
                 Bulwarkes
                 ,
              
               or
               it
               may
               bee
               
                 Whole
                 Bulwarkes
                 ,
              
               for
               which
               one
               takes
               a
               
                 Profilie
              
               answerable
               to
               the
               greatnesse
               ,
               for
               when
               they
               are
               litle
               one
               makes
               vse
               onely
               of
               the
               
                 Profile
              
               of
               ordinarie
               trenches
               ,
               and
               when
               they
               are
               great
               thier
               
                 Profile
              
               must
               be
               likewise
               correspondent
               vnto
               them
               .
            
             
               These
               workes
               and
               Redouts
               serve
               for
               a
               Retreat
               to
               the
               workemen
               ,
               if
               an
               Enemy
               should
               make
               a
               great
               sallie
               vpon
               them
               :
               for
               being
               retreated
               into
               the
               said
               
                 Redouts
                 ,
              
               they
               may
               resist
               an
               Enemie
               ,
               and
               stopp
               them
               ,
               till
               they
               are
               seconded
               ,
               so
               that
               such
               
                 Redouts
              
               are
               very
               necessary
               .
               For
               if
               the
               workemen
               had
               not
               a
               place
               to
               retreate
               into
               ,
               they
               would
               beforced
               to
               betake
               thēselves
               to
               their
               heeles
               ,
               and
               to
               abandon
               and
               loose
               their
               worke
               .
            
             
               But
               the
               
                 Inginiers
              
               which
               are
               employed
               therein
               ,
               ought
               to
               vse
               all
               the
               skill
               ,
               industrie
               ,
               and
               experience
               they
               have
               to
               run
               their
               lines
               in
               such
               a
               sort
               ,
               that
               those
               which
               are
               in
               the
               trenches
               and
               approches
               may
               not
               be
               discovered
               and
               seen
               by
               an
               ennemy
               .
               In
               a
               word
               ,
               they
               may
               runne
               their
               approches
               with
               the
               more
               safety
               ,
               and
               as
               much
               expedition
               as
               possbile
               bee
               towards
               the
               place
               ,
               or
               part
               of
               the
               Fortresse
               ,
               which
               de
               Generall
               desires
               to
               become
               master
               off
               .
            
             
               There
               are
               two
               principall
               parts
               in
               a
               Town
               or
               Fortress
               ,
               one
               of
               which
               must
               be
               battered
               ,
               if
               one
               is
               resolved
               to
               take
               it
               in
               ,
               and
               that
               is
               ,
               either
               a
               
                 Curtaine
                 ,
              
               or
               a
               
                 Bulwarke
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
               What
               part
               of
               a
               Fortresse
               ought
               to
               be
               approched
               to
               .
            
             
               IT
               is
               not
               good
               to
               approch
               to
               a
               
                 Curtaine
                 ,
              
               which
               is
               defended
               by
               the
               two
               next
               Bulwarkes
               ,
               and
               their
               flankes
               ,
               when
               you
               are
               to
               expect
               an
               enemies
               Canon
               continually
               on
               both
               sides
               of
               you
               ,
               especially
               ,
               when
               you
               would
               give
               an
               assault
               vpon
               it
               ;
               for
               afterward
               it
               may
               easely
               be
               cut
               off
               .
               Besides
               that
               the
               moate
               is
               broader
               before
               the
               Curtaine
               ,
               thē
               in
               other
               places
               whence
               it
               followeth
               manifestly
               ,
               that
               there
               is
               no
               advantage
               in
               approching
               vpon
               such
               a
               place
               .
            
             
               But
               a
               
                 Bulwarke
              
               is
               the
               safest
               ,
               &
               best
               to
               be
               approched
               to
               and
               taken
               in
               :
               my
               reasons
               are
               these
               first
               the
               moate
               is
               not
               so
               broad
               and
               large
               ,
               as
               it
               is
               before
               the
               
                 Curtaine
                 ,
              
               &
               a
               Bulwarke
               hath
               but
               a
               single
               defence
               ,
               coming
               from
               the
               Bulwark
               opposite
               to
               it
               ,
               which
               may
               be
               better
               beaten
               vpō
               by
               Batteries
               then
               the
               Curtaine
               can
               .
               Moreover
               ,
               a
               Bulwarke
               hath
               but
               a
               little
               defence
               of
               it self
               ,
               because
               on
               may
               be
               forced
               to
               retire
               from
               it
               ,
               &
               to
               make
               new
               workes
               ,
               &
               cuttings
               of
               behinde
               that
               part
               which
               is
               quitted
               .
               And
               because
               there
               is
               no
               so
               much
               space
               ,
               as
               is
               within
               the
               curtaine
               ,
               the
               fortification
               there
               of
               is
               more
               painefull
               ,
               and
               more
               incommodious
               ,
               &
               therefore
               it
               is
               better
               to
               approach
               to
               wards
               Bulwarkes
               ,
               then
               curtaines
               ,
               which
               is
               found
               by
               practize
               ,
               and
               daily
               experience
               .
            
             
               There
               are
               other
               works
               belonging
               to
               a
               Town
               ,
               or
               Fortresse
               ,
               as
               (
               
                 Crown-works
                 ,
                 Hoorn-works
                 ,
                 Tenailles
                 ,
                 Ravelings
                 ,
                 Halfe-moones
                 ,
              
               and
               others
               .
               The
               manner
               of
               carrying
               of
               approches
               wil
               be
               cleare
               and
               easie
               enough
               ,
               when
               wee
               come
               to
               shew
               an
               approch
               by
               figure
               vpon
               a
               Towne
               or
               Fortresse
               which
               is
               to
               be
               taken
               in
               .
            
             
               After
               one
               hath
               naturely
               resolved
               ,
               whether
               he
               will
               run
               an
               Approch
               vpon
               a
               Curtaine
               ,
               or
               a
               Bulwarke
               .
               The
               Ingenier
               being
               presēt
               at
               the
               breaking
               of
               the
               ground
               ,
               is
               to
               shew
               &
               informe
               the
               workemen
               well
               ,
               how
               they
               are
               to
               run
               their
               line
               ,
               and
               as
               necessity
               requires
               ,
               being
               of
               diverse
               lengths
               ,
               but
               most
               commōly
               some
               20
               ,
               or
               40
               rod
               long
               ,
               or
               sometimes
               shorter
               or
               longer
               
               and
               broken
               and
               turned
               as
               often
               as
               is
               necessary
               .
               The
               line
               then
               being
               laid
               out
               ,
               &
               marked
               they
               divide
               and
               place
               the
               Workemen
               in
               order
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               not
               hinder
               one
               another
               .
            
             
               Now
               they
               give
               to
               every
               man
               the
               length
               of
               foure
               or
               fiue
               foote
               ,
               and
               every
               one
               maketh
               as
               much
               hast
               as
               possible
               may
               bee
               ,
               to
               gett
               into
               the
               ground
               ,
               for
               the
               avoyding
               of
               the
               danger
               wherevnto
               he
               is
               exposed
               ,
               while
               he
               stands
               vpon
               the
               open
               feild
               ,
               therefore
               the
               Earth
               ,
               which
               he
               diggeth
               he
               casteth
               it
               vp
               before
               him
               ,
               and
               with
               all
               expedition
               maketh
               a
               hole
               like
               a
               graue
               :
               it
               is
               needlesse
               that
               at
               the
               first
               breaking
               ,
               the
               ditch
               should
               be
               any
               broader
               or
               deeper
               then
               three
               foot
               ,
               for
               the
               Earth
               being
               cast
               vp
               three
               foote
               aboue
               the
               Ground
               ,
               and
               the
               ditch
               likewise
               three
               foote
               deepe
               ,
               a
               man
               then
               hath
               covert
               enough
               .
            
             
               The
               Workemen
               then
               being
               got
               into
               the
               Ground
               ,
               they
               enlarge
               and
               deepen
               the
               Approches
               as
               necessity
               requires
               ,
               but
               those
               which
               are
               fardest
               of
               from
               the
               Towne
               ,
               they
               need
               not
               be
               soo
               deepe
               at
               the
               beginning
               ,
               as
               when
               they
               come
               neerer
               to
               the
               Fortresse
               .
               The
               bredth
               of
               the
               Approches
               ought
               to
               be
               some
               10
               or
               12
               foote
               broad
               ,
               as
               may
               be
               found
               necessarie
               :
               yea
               ,
               sometimee
               one
               is
               constrayned
               to
               make
               them
               larger
               ,
               least
               they
               might
               be
               to
               narrow
               ,
               in
               regard
               waggons
               may
               be
               driuen
               through
               them
               ,
               with
               materialls
               necessarie
               for
               the
               Gallerie
               ,
               as
               also
               Canon
               which
               must
               be
               drawne
               downe
               ,
               and
               mounted
               vpon
               the
               Batteries
               .
            
             
               But
               by
               how
               much
               larger
               the
               Approches
               are
               made
               ,
               by
               so
               much
               ought
               the
               parapet
               of
               the
               Trench
               to
               be
               heightned
               ,
               that
               the
               Enemie
               may
               not
               discover
               the
               Souldiers
               that
               are
               in
               them
               .
            
             
               Especially
               one
               ought
               to
               heighten
               those
               points
               ,
               and
               windings
               ,
               where
               the
               Line
               turnes
               ,
               otherwise
               it
               may
               proue
               very
               hurtfull
               and
               dangerous
               .
            
             
               While
               the
               Souldiers
               are
               busied
               in
               makeing
               of
               the
               Line
               ,
               others
               are
               employed
               in
               makeing
               of
               a
               Batterie
               ,
               to
               hinder
               the
               Enemie
               from
               Sallying
               out
               .
            
             
               When
               the
               night
               is
               past
               ,
               there
               are
               fresh
               workemen
               sent
               downe
               to
               relieve
               the
               first
               ,
               and
               to
               enlarge
               ,
               heighten
               and
               repaire
               that
               nights
               worke
               ,
               vnlesse
               some
               of
               them
               are
               willing
               to
               connue
               their
               worke
               ,
               and
               these
               commanded
               men
               ,
               are
               to
               have
               ten
               stiuers
               a
               peece
               ,
               which
               the
               Quartermaster
               of
               every
               Regiment
               ,
               who
               delivers
               the
               matterials
               doth
               solicite
               for
               ,
               and
               payes
               them
               .
            
             
               After
               the
               first
               nights
               worke
               (
               or
               it
               may
               be
               the
               same
               )
               there
               are
               
                 Corps
                 de
                 guard
              
               made
               ,
               to
               putt
               a
               good
               number
               of
               Souldiers
               into
               ,
               where
               they
               keepe
               their
               
                 Maine
                 guard
                 ,
              
               which
               are
               made
               sometimes
               within
               the
               lines
               ,
               with
               which
               the
               
                 Corps
                 de
                 guard
              
               ought
               to
               be
               
                 Parallels
                 ,
              
               or
               else
               vpon
               the
               point
               where
               the
               line
               turnes
               ,
               and
               sometimes
               without
               the
               Approches
               ,
               to
               which
               the
               
                 Corps
                 of
                 guard
              
               are
               ioyned
               to
               them
               by
               a
               line
               of
               
                 Communication
                 :
              
               so
               that
               they
               lie
               three
               or
               4
               Rod
               from
               them
               .
            
             
               It
               is
               not
               alwaies
               needfull
               that
               these
               Redoubts
               be
               made
               square
               ,
               but
               one
               may
               make
               them
               
                 long-wise
                 ,
              
               or
               else
               with
               5
               
                 Angles
                 ,
              
               and
               after
               diverse
               other
               manners
               ,
               as
               the
               Ground
               will
               best
               afford
               .
            
             
               Most
               commonly
               one
               workes
               by
               night
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               receiue
               the
               lesse
               harme
               ,
               and
               that
               the
               day
               following
               the
               worke
               may
               be
               repaired
               .
            
             
               When
               one
               line
               is
               finished
               as
               abouesaid
               ,
               and
               that
               it
               must
               be
               run
               no
               further
               that
               way
               ,
               the
               
                 Inginier
              
               turnes
               the
               line
               another
               way
               ,
               (
               bearing
               it
               from
               the
               Towne
               or
               Fortresse
               )
               and
               placeth
               the
               Workemen
               in
               order
               as
               abouesaid
               ,
               in
               continuing
               so
               by
               windings
               ,
               and
               turnings
               .
               till
               he
               hath
               gott
               something
               neere
               vnto
               the
               Fortresse
               beseiged
               ,
               and
               makeing
               good
               the
               Line
               continuly
               with
               
                 Corps
                 de
                 guards
              
               and
               Batteries
               .
            
             
               But
               the
               neerer
               they
               approach
               vnto
               the
               Fortresse
               ,
               the
               more
               subject
               they
               are
               to
               danger
               ,
               so
               that
               their
               pay
               is
               encreased
               every
               day
               ,
               as
               the
               Approach
               is
               advanced
               ,
               seing
               they
               hazard
               their
               liues
               for
               it
               ,
               they
               haue
               a
               halfe
               Rixdaller
               a
               night
               ,
               sometimes
               a
               whole
               Rixdaller
               other-whiles
               a
               Rixdaller
               and
               a
               halfe
               ,
               yea
               sometimes
               ten
               Rixdallers
               for
               an
               howers
               worke
               ,
               if
               it
               be
               very
               dangerous
               .
            
             
               Finally
               when
               you
               are
               approched
               with
               your
               trench
               so
               farre
               ,
               that
               you
               are
               continually
               in
               the
               sight
               of
               an
               Enemy
               ,
               &
               where
               you
               cannot
               get
               any
               more
               ground
               ,
               but
               with
               great
               danger
               ,
               they
               make
               vse
               then
               with
               an
               other
               manner
               of
               digging
               ,
               or
               an
               Approach
               called
               commonly
               a
               
                 Sapp
                 ,
              
               which
               is
               made
               in
               this
               mannet
               following
               .
            
             
               When
               a
               resolution
               is
               taken
               ,
               to
               approach
               vnto
               a
               
                 Curtaine
                 ,
              
               or
               a
               
                 Bulwarke
                 ,
              
               you
               run
               a
               right
               
               line
               upon
               that
               place
               ,
               which
               you
               intend
               to
               assault
               :
               as
               for
               example
               ,
               suppose
               it
               were
               upon
               the
               
                 Demiface
              
               of
               a
               Bulwark
               ,
               in
               such
               sort
               ,
               that
               it
               lies
               without
               the
               flancking
               blowes
               of
               the
               Fortresse
               .
            
             
               A
               man
               then
               kneeling
               upon
               his
               knees
               ,
               digs
               to
               get
               into
               the
               Ground
               ,
               and
               casts
               up
               the
               Earth
               before
               him
               on
               both
               sides
               ,
               with
               a
               short
               spade
               ,
               towards
               that
               part
               of
               the
               Fortresse
               ,
               till
               he
               hath
               digged
               three
               foote
               into
               the
               Ground
               ,
               and
               that
               he
               is
               covered
               with
               the
               Earth
               ,
               casting
               alwaies
               the
               Earth
               like
               a
               moald
               before
               him
               towards
               the
               Towne
               ,
               and
               on
               that
               side
               ,
               where
               the
               most
               danger
               lies
               ,
               he
               ought
               to
               cast
               up
               the
               Earth
               so
               high
               that
               it
               may
               be
               able
               to
               shelter
               those
               ,
               which
               comes
               to
               repaire
               and
               make
               the
               Sapp
               larger
               .
               After
               the
               first
               man
               which
               makes
               the
               Sapp
               is
               got
               into
               the
               ground
               and
               covered
               with
               earth
               ,
               he
               advanceth
               forward
               and
               continues
               the
               Sap
               ,
               till
               he
               hath
               got
               some
               six
               foot
               ,
               and
               then
               follows
               another
               Sapper
               presently
               ,
               who
               repaires
               and
               enlargeth
               the
               ditch
               to
               the
               bredth
               of
               six
               foot
               ,
               while
               the
               other
               advances
               forward
               three
               foote
               further
               in
               bredth
               and
               got
               so
               deep
               ,
               that
               he
               is
               alwaies
               covered
               with
               the
               Earth
               ,
               which
               he
               casts
               up
               before
               him
               ,
               and
               the
               other
               follows
               him
               continually
               enlarging
               the
               dich
               from
               three
               foot
               to
               six
               .
               After
               him
               comes
               a
               third
               man
               ,
               which
               finishes
               the
               whole
               Sapp
               ,
               and
               gives
               it
               the
               conuenient
               height
               ,
               depth
               ,
               and
               bredth
               answerable
               to
               the
               first
               approch
               .
               But
               one
               must
               have
               a
               singular
               care
               ,
               that
               the
               approches
               and
               Sapps
               bee
               not
               digged
               so
               deepe
               ,
               as
               that
               water
               may
               rise
               in
               them
               ,
               but
               that
               they
               may
               alwaies
               remain
               dry
               upon
               firme
               ground
               ,
               which
               the
               condition
               of
               the
               ditch
               wil
               shew
               it
               :
               For
               when
               the
               water
               within
               is
               very
               deep
               ,
               and
               the
               declinatiō
               high
               enough
               ,
               one
               may
               make
               the
               Approches
               as
               deepe
               as
               the
               ditch
               ,
               when
               the
               water
               that
               is
               in
               it
               ,
               is
               distant
               from
               the
               plain
               Earth
               .
            
             
               Touching
               the
               manner
               of
               Working
               ,
               an
               Agreement
               is
               made
               with
               certaine
               worke-men
               ,
               because
               a
               greater
               number
               of
               worke-men
               cannot
               worke
               in
               so
               narrow
               a
               passage
               ,
               they
               take
               on
               five
               or
               six
               worke-men
               ,
               and
               give
               them
               4
               ,
               5
               ,
               6
               ,
               yea
               ,
               sometimes
               more
               as
               six-dallers
               apeece
               ,
               as
               they
               can
               agree
               with
               them
               ,
               and
               as
               the
               danger
               is
               little
               ,
               or
               great
               .
            
             
               In
               this
               manner
               of
               work
               ,
               being
               come
               so
               neer
               for
               the
               safeguard
               of
               the
               Muskettiers
               ,
               which
               are
               to
               give
               fire
               ,
               there
               are
               
                 musket
                 baskets
              
               set
               up
               vpon
               the
               top
               of
               the
               Parapet
               of
               the
               approches
               ,
               closse
               one
               to
               another
               filled
               with
               Sand
               or
               Earth
               ,
               between
               which
               the
               Muskettiers
               puts
               out
               the
               noses
               of
               their
               muskets
               ,
               to
               give
               fire
               upon
               the
               besieged
               .
            
             
               And
               because
               the
               Approches
               ,
               the
               neerer
               you
               come
               to
               the
               Fortresse
               are
               made
               much
               deeper
               then
               at
               the
               first
               breaking
               of
               ground
               ,
               there
               are
               one
               or
               two
               foote
               Bankes
               made
               for
               the
               souldiers
               to
               mount
               up
               upon
               ,
               and
               to
               discharge
               their
               muskets
               or
               firelocks
               .
            
             
               As
               for
               example
               ,
               the
               figure
               following
               numbred
               153
               ,
               is
               the
               part
               of
               a
               Towne
               or
               Fortresse
               upon
               which
               wee
               are
               to
               run
               our
               approches
               ,
               and
               that
               upon
               firme
               and
               good
               ground
               .
            
          
           
             
               The
               First
               Example
               .
            
             
               For
               as
               much
               as
               the
               Fortresse
               is
               environed
               with
               a
               
                 Corridor
              
               or
               a
               Counterscharfe
               ,
               one
               must
               not
               take
               the
               distance
               from
               the
               great
               Rampart
               ,
               but
               from
               the
               Counterscharfe
               ,
               and
               begin
               the
               Approches
               some
               90
               rods
               distance
               from
               the
               
                 Corridor
                 ,
              
               because
               one
               may
               with
               the
               more
               safety
               put
               the
               spade
               into
               the
               Earth
               .
               Therefore
               one
               beginneth
               the
               first
               line
               of
               approch
               from
               the
               letter
               A
               ,
               and
               runs
               it
               to
               the
               letter
               B
               ,
               being
               some
               30
               rods
               long
               or
               thereabouts
               .
               The
               beginning
               of
               the
               line
               is
               fortified
               with
               a
               Redoubt
               marked
               with
               the
               letter
               C
               ,
               into
               which
               the
               workemen
               (
               if
               the
               besieged
               should
               fall
               out
               )
               may
               make
               their
               retreate
               ,
               and
               into
               which
               also
               the
               guards
               for
               the
               workmen
               may
               retire
               .
               The
               first
               line
               turneth
               at
               B
               ,
               taking
               its
               beginning
               neere
               unto
               the
               Corps
               de
               guard
               D
               ,
               and
               runs
               to
               E
               ,
               being
               some
               30
               rods
               in
               length
               ,
               where
               an
               other
               Redoubt
               is
               made
               marked
               with
               the
               letter
               F
               ,
               to
               hold
               a
               guard
               in
               it
               ,
               and
               because
               it
               might
               be
               dangerous
               to
               run
               this
               line
               any
               further
               ,
               it
               turneth
               from
               F
               to
               G
               ,
               and
               from
               G
               to
               H
               ▪
               where
               another
               Corps
               de
               guard
               is
               made
               .
               For
               the
               neerer
               you
               approch
               unto
               the
               Fortresse
               ,
               the
               more
               the
               approches
               must
               be
               strengthened
               with
               guards
               and
               batteries
               .
               Besides
               the
               Approches
               there
               ought
               to
               be
               made
               deeper
               ,
               and
               higher
               ,
               because
               you
               come
               neerer
               the
               Enemies
               ,
               Canon
               ,
               and
               his
               Musket
               shott
               ,
               which
               may
               shoot
               the
               surer
               upon
               you
               ,
               here
               then
               you
               begin
               to
               set
               up
               Musket
               baskets
               ,
               and
               make
               foot-bankes
               to
               your
               Approches
               ,
               that
               the
               Souldiers
               may
               gett
               up
               to
               them
               when
               they
               are
               commanded
               to
               give
               fire
               .
            
             
             
               When
               one
               is
               approched
               so
               neere
               by
               meanes
               of
               these
               turnings
               and
               traverses
               that
               the
               remainder
               may
               be
               run
               with
               a
               long
               Traverse
               ,
               then
               one
               begins
               to
               Sapp
               from
               H
               to
               I
               ,
               from
               which
               also
               one
               may
               make
               another
               line
               to
               approch
               unto
               the
               other
               side
               of
               the
               same
               Bulwarke
               ,
               or
               also
               the
               other
               Bulwarke
               ,
               as
               the
               line
               from
               I
               to
               K
               ,
               shews
               .
               Behinde
               these
               lines
               the
               Muskettiers
               gets
               up
               allwaies
               to
               discover
               ,
               and
               shoot
               at
               those
               that
               would
               peepe
               into
               them
               .
            
             
               There
               are
               likewise
               two
               Redoubts
               made
               on
               both
               sides
               for
               guards
               ,
               as
               the
               letters
               N
               and
               O
               ,
               do
               show
               .
            
             
               In
               the
               
                 Interim
              
               a
               Sapp
               is
               begun
               ,
               that
               runneth
               towards
               the
               Bulwark
               ,
               which
               one
               is
               resolved
               to
               mine
               in
               ,
               and
               which
               is
               made
               in
               the
               same
               manner
               ,
               as
               we
               have
               described
               above
               ,
               when
               you
               sapt
               into
               the
               Counterscharfe
               ,
               and
               that
               you
               are
               come
               to
               the
               brinke
               of
               the
               Moate
               ,
               then
               you
               are
               to
               fill
               and
               damme
               it
               up
               ,
               and
               to
               make
               a
               gallerie
               ,
               and
               blinds
               which
               wee
               will
               treate
               of
               when
               wee
               come
               to
               speak
               of
               a
               Gallerie
               .
            
             
               While
               you
               are
               busied
               about
               making
               your
               approches
               ,
               diverse
               batteries
               are
               made
               here
               and
               there
               ,
               which
               serve
               partly
               to
               spoile
               the
               Ramparts
               and
               partly
               to
               dismount
               and
               hinder
               the
               Enemies
               Canon
               from
               playing
               upon
               you
               ,
               and
               to
               keepe
               the
               besieged
               in
               awe
               ,
               that
               the
               workmen
               may
               worke
               with
               the
               more
               safety
               ,
               as
               you
               see
               by
               these
               fixe
               Batteries
               noted
               in
               the
               figure
               153
               ,
               and
               thus
               much
               for
               Approches
               upon
               good
               ground
               .
            
             
               Wee
               have
               divided
               the
               approches
               ,
               which
               run
               in
               a
               right
               line
               into
               three
               sorts
               :
               The
               first
               is
               in
               a
               narrow
               way
               ▪
               an
               earth
               which
               may
               be
               spitted
               out
               somewhat
               deepe
               ,
               and
               yet
               neverthelesse
               without
               turnings
               and
               Traverses
               :
               The
               other
               is
               when
               you
               cannot
               digge
               into
               the
               earth
               ,
               but
               there
               is
               ,
               or
               you
               shall
               have
               water
               presently
               ,
               as
               hapneth
               in
               low
               and
               moorish
               grounds
               .
            
          
           
             
               The
               Second
               Example
               .
            
             
               When
               you
               are
               to
               approch
               unto
               a
               Fortresse
               in
               a
               right
               line
               ,
               and
               that
               the
               nature
               of
               the
               way
               through
               which
               you
               are
               to
               carrie
               your
               approches
               ,
               is
               of
               such
               a
               condition
               ,
               that
               you
               cannot
               digg
               into
               the
               earth
               with
               spades
               ,
               then
               you
               must
               do
               as
               is
               showne
               in
               the
               figure
               154
               ,
               where
               they
               are
               covered
               with
               earth
               both
               on
               sides
               ,
               &
               are
               made
               a
               little
               deeper
               then
               ordinary
               Approches
               .
               Now
               seeing
               the
               danger
               is
               greater
               in
               this
               kind
               ,
               then
               in
               the
               first
               ,
               and
               that
               a
               right
               line
               causeth
               you
               to
               be
               continually
               in
               the
               sight
               of
               an
               Ennemy
               ,
               you
               must
               prevent
               ,
               and
               avoid
               that
               danger
               by
               making
               of
               blindes
               ,
               which
               are
               either
               made
               of
               bundles
               of
               rise
               ,
               or
               brush
               ▪
               or
               with
               thick
               oaken
               planckes
               foure
               or
               five
               ynches
               thick
               ,
               and
               as
               in
               this
               figure
               you
               may
               see
               ,
               for
               what
               use
               they
               serve
               .
            
          
           
             
               The
               third
               Example
               .
            
             
               There
               where
               one
               cannot
               digg
               ,
               as
               in
               Marras
               and
               moorish
               places
               ,
               a
               foundation
               must
               be
               made
               with
               sinkers
               ,
               that
               is
               bundles
               of
               boughs
               bound
               fast
               together
               ,
               upon
               which
               (
               as
               is
               said
               )
               earth
               is
               cast
               .
               Vpon
               this
               foundation
               one
               makes
               Traverses
               and
               Blinds
               with
               
                 Gabions
              
               as
               you
               may
               see
               in
               the
               figure
               155.
               
            
             
               These
               
                 Gabions
              
               are
               also
               filled
               with
               earth
               and
               made
               so
               strong
               ,
               that
               they
               are
               Canon
               proofe
               ,
               one
               may
               sett
               up
               also
               a
               double
               row
               of
               
                 Gabions
                 ,
              
               which
               sometimes
               have
               earth
               cast
               about
               them
               .
            
             
               The
               bredth
               of
               such
               Approches
               is
               from
               4
               to
               8
               rod
               ,
               as
               the
               place
               is
               narrow
               or
               broad
               ▪
               and
               as
               necessity
               and
               danger
               requires
               ,
               but
               the
               Ordinarie
               bredth
               is
               no
               more
               but
               four
               or
               five
               rod
               .
               One
               must
               have
               also
               a
               care
               ,
               that
               one
               Traverse
               endeth
               there
               where
               another
               beginneth
               ,
               to
               witt
               ,
               there
               where
               an
               alley
               is
               left
               .
            
             
               The
               like
               manner
               of
               Approches
               were
               made
               at
               the
               seige
               of
               the
               
                 Bosch
              
               on
               Count
               
                 Ernest
              
               his
               side
               ,
               to
               which
               as
               being
               a
               new
               found-worke
               ,
               it
               got
               a
               new
               name
               ,
               and
               was
               called
               the
               
                 Greate
                 Gallerie
                 .
              
            
             
               This
               manner
               of
               Approch
               may
               be
               used
               also
               in
               a
               stonie
               ground
               ,
               where
               one
               cannot
               digg
               the
               earth
               because
               of
               stones
               .
            
             
             
          
           
           
           
             
               The
               Fourth
               Example
               .
            
             
               Againe
               you
               meete
               sometimes
               with
               a
               foundatiō
               ,
               which
               one
               cannot
               passe
               through
               
                 dryshod
                 ,
              
               and
               cannot
               get
               deepe
               enough
               into
               the
               Earth
               ,
               but
               one
               is
               forced
               to
               approch
               in
               that
               manner
               as
               is
               represented
               in
               the
               figure
               156
               in
               taking
               the
               neerest
               way
               ,
               which
               may
               be
               to
               approch
               unto
               the
               Fortresse
               ,
               and
               the
               Approches
               is
               made
               of
               that
               Earth
               ,
               which
               is
               digged
               about
               it
               ,
               in
               stead
               of
               setting
               up
               of
               
                 Gabions
                 ,
              
               and
               as
               in
               the
               former
               Approaches
               the
               traverses
               ,
               and
               blinds
               were
               made
               of
               Gabions
               ,
               so
               here
               they
               are
               made
               with
               whole
               Redoubts
               :
               in
               the
               midst
               whereof
               there
               is
               a
               gape
               or
               a
               Sallie
               ,
               made
               in
               such
               sort
               ,
               that
               the
               one
               Redoubt
               is
               joyned
               to
               the
               other
               ▪
               the
               greatenesse
               of
               every
               Redoubt
               ,
               being
               some
               six
               or
               eight
               Foote
               in
               length
               ▪
               and
               as
               much
               in
               bredth
               .
            
             
               Such
               Traverses
               are
               oftentimes
               made
               so
               strong
               ,
               that
               they
               are
               able
               to
               resist
               a
               Canon-bullett
               when
               they
               have
               Earth
               enough
               ,
               for
               sometimes
               they
               are
               made
               sixe
               foote
               ,
               but
               the
               heigth
               of
               them
               is
               not
               alwayes
               alike
               ,
               seeing
               they
               must
               bee
               made
               higher
               there
               ,
               where
               most
               danger
               is
               .
            
             
               The
               gates
               are
               made
               in
               such
               sort
               with
               a
               falling
               plancke
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               bee
               drawne
               up
               ,
               and
               shut
               ,
               and
               are
               of
               that
               height
               ,
               and
               bredth
               ,
               that
               a
               waggon
               may
               come
               through
               them
               .
            
             
               It
               is
               a
               thing
               impossible
               to
               describe
               all
               the
               manner
               of
               approches
               ,
               because
               they
               are
               so
               mixed
               and
               of
               such
               great
               diversity
               .
            
             
               Neither
               is
               the
               ordinary
               way
               of
               approches
               alwayes
               a
               like
               ,
               because
               the
               one
               are
               made
               deeper
               ,
               and
               larger
               then
               an
               other
               :
               but
               commonly
               they
               are
               from
               8
               to
               14
               foote
               broad
               ,
               and
               three
               or
               4
               foote
               deep
               in
               the
               earth
               ,
               or
               thereabouts
               :
               the
               
                 Basis
              
               of
               the
               earth
               layd
               upon
               it
               ,
               in
               stead
               of
               a
               parapet
               ,
               ought
               to
               be
               betweene
               seven
               and
               eight
               foote
               .
            
             
               Wee
               have
               propounded
               as
               an
               example
               for
               them
               two
               
                 Profiles
                 ,
              
               marked
               with
               the
               numbers
               157
               ,
               and
               158
               ,
               whereof
               the
               greatnesse
               ,
               &
               measure
               of
               them
               ,
               is
               noted
               with
               letters
               and
               numbers
               in
               this
               table
               following
               :
            
             
               
                 
                   THE
                   DEMONSTRATION
                   .
                
                 
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     
                       FIGVRE
                       .
                    
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                
                 
                   
                     
                       The
                       Profile
                       of
                       the
                       Figure
                       marked
                       .
                    
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     157
                  
                   
                     158
                  
                
                 
                   
                     
                       The
                       inferiour
                       bredth
                       of
                       the
                       Approch
                       .
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       AB
                    
                  
                   
                     9
                  
                   
                     12
                  
                
                 
                   
                     
                       The
                       depth
                       of
                       the
                       Approches
                       .
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       FB
                       ,
                       EA
                    
                  
                   
                     3
                  
                   
                     4
                  
                
                 
                   
                     
                       The
                       Talud
                       or
                       Slooping
                       exteriour
                       .
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       FD
                       ,
                    
                  
                   
                     1
                     ½
                  
                   
                     2
                  
                
                 
                   
                     
                       The
                       Talud
                       inferiour
                       of
                       the
                       Approches
                       .
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       CE
                       ,
                    
                  
                   
                     1
                     /
                     ●
                  
                   
                     1
                  
                
                 
                   
                     
                       The
                       Bredth
                       of
                       the
                       Approches
                       above
                       the
                       Earth
                       .
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       CD
                       ,
                    
                  
                   
                     11
                  
                   
                     15
                  
                
                 
                   
                     
                       The
                       Basis
                       of
                       the
                       Parapet
                       above
                       the
                       Earth
                       .
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       LC
                       ,
                    
                  
                   
                     8
                  
                   
                     10
                  
                
                 
                   
                     
                       The
                       Talud
                       exteriour
                       of
                       the
                       parapet
                       .
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       KL
                       ,
                    
                  
                   
                     1
                     1
                     /
                     ●
                  
                   
                     2
                  
                
                 
                   
                     
                       The
                       Talud
                       interiour
                       of
                       the
                       parapet
                       .
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       GC
                       ,
                    
                  
                   
                     ½
                  
                   
                     1
                  
                
                 
                   
                     
                       The
                       height
                       exteriour
                       and
                       interiour
                       of
                       the
                       parapet
                       .
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       IK
                       ,
                       GH
                    
                  
                   
                     3
                  
                   
                     4
                  
                
                 
                   
                     
                       The
                       Top
                       of
                       the
                       parapet
                       .
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       HI
                       ,
                    
                  
                   
                     6
                  
                   
                     7
                  
                
              
            
             
               We
               have
               expresly
               omitted
               the
               foot-banks
               ,
               because
               they
               are
               not
               made
               in
               the
               beginning
               of
               the
               Approches
               ,
               which
               ought
               to
               bee
               made
               in
               the
               Approches
               after
               diverses
               maners
               sometimes
               this
               way
               ,
               and
               sometimes
               many
               as
               occasion
               may
               serve
               .
            
          
        
         
         
           
             OF
             COUNTER-APPROCHES
             .
             THE
             SIXTH
             CHAPTER
             .
          
           
             THE
             
               Beseigers
            
             having
             approached
             neere
             unto
             a
             Towne
             or
             a
             Fort
             ,
             it
             behoves
             then
             the
             beseiged
             to
             look
             well
             about
             them
             ,
             and
             not
             to
             be
             idle
             ,
             but
             stirring
             ,
             and
             to
             doe
             their
             uttermost
             endeavour
             to
             hinder
             ,
             and
             offend
             their
             Enemy
             .
          
           
             The
             defence
             which
             is
             made
             against
             these
             Approches
             is
             rightly
             called
             Counter
             Approches
             .
          
           
             This
             defence
             also
             is
             made
             after
             diverse
             manners
             ,
             first
             when
             the
             Beseiged
             are
             a
             great
             number
             ,
             so
             that
             oftentimes
             they
             are
             able
             to
             fall
             out
             ,
             and
             make
             Sallies
             ,
             which
             they
             ought
             to
             do
             as
             often
             as
             may
             be
             ,
             notwithstanding
             that
             they
             loose
             men
             ,
             which
             of
             necessity
             must
             happen
             ,
             because
             the
             Beseigers
             are
             much
             more
             stronger
             then
             the
             Beseiged
             ,
             and
             have
             farre
             more
             forces
             ,
             then
             those
             which
             are
             within
             the
             Fortresse
             .
          
           
             For
             by
             this
             meanes
             the
             Enemie
             will
             be
             hindred
             ,
             and
             his
             Approaches
             slowly
             advanced
             ,
             being
             many
             times
             beaten
             back
             ,
             and
             constrayned
             to
             retyre
             into
             his
             workes
             ,
             during
             which
             
               Alarme
               ,
            
             they
             cannot
             advance
             forward
             their
             workes
             ,
             neither
             can
             they
             begin
             them
             againe
             ,
             till
             the
             Beseiged
             are
             retreated
             .
          
           
             They
             ought
             to
             have
             a
             singular
             care
             ,
             when
             one
             makes
             a
             Sally
             ,
             that
             their
             men
             be
             not
             exposed
             to
             slaughter
             ,
             but
             must
             be
             commanded
             to
             fall
             on
             with
             discretion
             ,
             advantage
             ,
             and
             profit
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             that
             the
             Towne
             or
             Fort
             beseiged
             be
             not
             bereft
             of
             their
             men
             by
             foole-hardinesse
             ,
             rashnesse
             ,
             and
             imprudencie
             .
          
           
             For
             a
             Fortresse
             which
             wants
             men
             ,
             may
             bee
             compared
             to
             an
             empty
             purse
             which
             hath
             no
             money
             in
             it
             .
             It
             lies
             much
             upon
             the
             endevour
             of
             the
             Horse
             ,
             which
             are
             in
             Fortresses
             ,
             for
             making
             of
             Sallies
             ,
             and
             which
             ought
             to
             fall
             out
             oftner
             then
             the
             Foote
             ,
             because
             they
             can
             fall
             on
             and
             retreate
             with
             more
             speede
             ,
             and
             though
             some
             be
             lost
             ,
             yet
             the
             hurt
             will
             not
             be
             so
             great
             ,
             as
             the
             losse
             of
             foote
             ,
             which
             must
             be
             husbanded
             ,
             and
             spared
             as
             much
             as
             posible
             may
             be
             ,
             to
             repulse
             the
             assault
             of
             an
             Enemy
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             manner
             of
             defence
             is
             made
             by
             
               Canon
               ,
            
             which
             must
             play
             continually
             from
             all
             places
             upon
             the
             workemen
             and
             Approches
             ,
             to
             doe
             them
             as
             much
             harme
             as
             possible
             may
             be
             ,
             whence
             it
             comes
             to
             passe
             ,
             that
             the
             Workemen
             are
             amazed
             and
             frighted
             ,
             when
             they
             see
             many
             of
             their
             fellow
             workemen
             fall
             and
             slaine
             miserably
             by
             the
             Canon
             ,
             which
             will
             abate
             their
             courage
             ,
             and
             make
             them
             worke
             more
             faintly
             :
             in
             such
             sort
             ,
             that
             an
             Enemy
             is
             driven
             to
             leave
             of
             their
             worke
             ,
             till
             such
             time
             as
             the
             offensive
             side
             have
             made
             Batteries
             ,
             against
             the
             Beseiged
             .
          
           
             But
             when
             it
             is
             not
             feisible
             ,
             they
             must
             be
             constrayned
             at
             last
             to
             breake
             up
             ,
             and
             quit
             the
             seige
             ,
             otherwise
             if
             they
             continue
             ,
             it
             wil
             be
             exceeding
             chargeable
             to
             them
             ,
             because
             no
             men
             will
             undertake
             the
             work
             ,
             but
             such
             as
             wil
             be
             soundly
             payed
             for
             it
             .
          
           
             For
             every
             man
             hazards
             his
             life
             ,
             when
             Ordinance
             and
             Musketteirs
             play
             continually
             upon
             him
             ,
             and
             a
             man
             will
             not
             venter
             his
             life
             for
             nothing
             ,
             but
             will
             sell
             it
             at
             as
             deare
             a
             rate
             as
             he
             can
             :
             besides
             in
             so
             doing
             ,
             it
             prolongs
             the
             time
             for
             an
             Enemy
             ,
             so
             that
             a
             Fortresse
             may
             sometimes
             be
             relieved
             ,
             or
             when
             Winter
             ,
             or
             bad
             weather
             comes
             on
             ,
             they
             may
             be
             forced
             to
             abandon
             the
             Siege
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             manner
             is
             by
             makeing
             of
             all
             sorts
             of
             
               Outworkes
               ,
            
             and
             in
             takeing
             up
             the
             Ground
             ,
             whereunto
             an
             Enemie
             Approches
             ,
             which
             may
             be
             made
             during
             the
             siege
             ,
             and
             while
             an
             Enemie
             Approaches
             ,
             as
             by
             makeing
             of
             
               Ravelings
               ,
               Halfe-moones
               ,
               Horne-workes
               ,
               Tenailles
               ,
            
             and
             
               Traverses
            
             :
             for
             all
             these
             workes
             may
             be
             made
             ,
             while
             an
             Enemie
             advances
             his
             Approaches
             towards
             a
             Towne
             or
             Fortresse
             ,
             but
             it
             were
             better
             they
             had
             bin
             made
             before
             the
             Towne
             was
             beseiged
             ,
             for
             the
             gaining
             of
             time
             ,
             and
             saving
             of
             charges
             ,
             which
             might
             be
             employed
             in
             other
             works
             .
          
           
             The
             fourth
             maner
             is
             when
             the
             Beseiged
             make
             Counter
             Approches
             ,
             whereby
             they
             may
             resist
             an
             enemy
             that
             he
             may
             not
             get
             into
             the
             Outworkes
             and
             Counterscharfe
             with
             his
             approches
             ,
             where
             to
             hinder
             him
             ,
             they
             must
             cast
             up
             some
             Traverses
             ,
             and
             other
             lines
             running
             them
             
             from
             their
             outworks
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             to
             meet
             the
             Enemies
             works
             ,
             and
             so
             make
             them
             get
             ground
             (
             as
             it
             were
             by
             peece-meale
             )
             till
             they
             come
             to
             the
             Fortresse
             :
             But
             neverthelesse
             one
             must
             observe
             well
             ,
             that
             they
             must
             be
             carryed
             and
             made
             so
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             alwaies
             flank
             upon
             the
             Beseigers
             works
             ,
             and
             approches
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             Approchers
             may
             do
             them
             as
             little
             harme
             as
             may
             be
             ,
             alwaies
             making
             them
             so
             ,
             that
             they
             lie
             open
             towards
             the
             Towne
             or
             Fort
             Beseiged
             .
             from
             whence
             they
             are
             to
             be
             defended
             ,
             and
             must
             be
             so
             carried
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             give
             no
             advantage
             to
             an
             Enemy
             ,
             when
             he
             takes
             them
             in
             ,
             and
             see
             that
             they
             may
             be
             flanked
             from
             the
             Town
             and
             Fort
             both
             with
             Canon
             and
             Musket
             .
          
           
             At
             the
             last
             seige
             of
             
               Bergen
               op
               Zoom
               ,
            
             there
             were
             many
             such
             Counter
             Approches
             made
             ,
             wherewith
             the
             Beseiged
             gauled
             the
             Enemy
             shrewdly
             ,
             insomuch
             that
             he
             was
             not
             able
             (
             notwithstanding
             the
             losse
             of
             abundance
             of
             men
             )
             to
             get
             a
             foot
             of
             ground
             of
             them
             ,
             having
             chests
             in
             the
             Counter-Approches
             which
             played
             continually
             with
             muskettiers
             and
             firelocks
             upon
             the
             Enemy
             ,
             and
             casting
             fireworks
             among
             them
             ,
             taking
             up
             also
             the
             ground
             and
             advantagious
             places
             before
             the
             Enemy
             could
             approach
             unto
             them
             ,
             which
             did
             disharten
             them
             much
             ,
             for
             assoon
             as
             Prince
             
               Maurice
            
             of
             happy
             memory
             ,
             came
             to
             
               Rosendale
            
             with
             his
             Army
             to
             relieve
             the
             Towne
             ,
             
               Marquis
               Spinola
            
             seeing
             no
             hopes
             of
             getting
             it
             ,
             after
             the
             losse
             of
             twelve
             thousand
             men
             ,
             was
             driven
             to
             rise
             without
             it
             ,
             and
             quit
             the
             seige
             .
          
        
         
           
             OF
             ALL
             SORTS
             OF
             BRIDGES
             ,
             ESPECIALLY
             ,
             your
             flagg
             ,
             or
             Bulrush
             Bridges
             .
             THE
             SEVENTH
             CHAPTER
             .
          
           
             UPon
             an
             expedition
             of
             warre
             ,
             when
             of
             necessity
             an
             Army
             is
             to
             passe
             over
             a
             River
             ,
             or
             a
             Brook
             ,
             there
             are
             commonly
             carryed
             Boates
             ,
             or
             sloopes
             upon
             Waggons
             ,
             as
             hath
             been
             taught
             before
             ,
             having
             Beames
             ,
             or
             Boards
             ,
             all
             necessaries
             laid
             in
             the
             Boates
             to
             be
             used
             ,
             first
             they
             take
             downe
             the
             Beames
             and
             Posts
             ,
             and
             then
             the
             Plancks
             ,
             and
             Boards
             ,
             which
             is
             done
             in
             a
             trice
             ,
             when
             all
             things
             lie
             in
             order
             ,
             sometimes
             they
             carry
             onely
             Boats
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             onely
             plancks
             .
             To
             make
             then
             a
             Bridge
             over
             a
             River
             ,
             first
             these
             Boats
             (
             as
             many
             as
             you
             shall
             have
             use
             off
             to
             lay
             over
             the
             River
             )
             are
             launced
             into
             the
             water
             ,
             which
             are
             bound
             together
             with
             ropes
             ,
             and
             fastened
             with
             Cables
             and
             Ankors
             in
             the
             bottome
             over
             ,
             which
             sparres
             and
             beames
             are
             laid
             ,
             and
             then
             plancks
             and
             bords
             layd
             orderly
             upon
             them
             ,
             for
             men
             to
             march
             over
             .
             There
             are
             likewise
             such
             kind
             of
             bridges
             made
             with
             great
             boates
             in
             Fortresses
             lying
             upon
             a
             river
             side
             ,
             when
             an
             enemy
             is
             feared
             ,
             and
             where
             one
             dares
             not
             make
             any
             other
             bridge
             for
             it
             is
             drawn
             up
             every
             night
             like
             a
             draw-bridge
             ,
             that
             if
             an
             Enemy
             had
             any
             enterprise
             upon
             that
             place
             ,
             he
             might
             not
             passe
             over
             it
             .
          
           
             There
             are
             made
             likewise
             bridges
             over
             the
             moates
             of
             the
             outworkes
             of
             a
             Fortresse
             :
             but
             an
             Enemy
             being
             approached
             neere
             unto
             the
             Fortresse
             having
             made
             batteries
             to
             beate
             them
             down
             ,
             these
             bridges
             are
             broken
             down
             in
             the
             outworkes
             ,
             and
             sally
             bridges
             made
             ,
             to
             which
             they
             cannot
             do
             much
             harme
             ,
             for
             the
             making
             of
             which
             ,
             one
             takes
             some
             Barrels
             ,
             or
             Hoggs-heads
             bound
             about
             with
             iron
             ,
             and
             pitched
             ,
             unto
             which
             rings
             of
             iron
             are
             made
             fast
             for
             to
             put
             posts
             into
             them
             ,
             by
             which
             meanes
             these
             Barrels
             are
             ioyned
             together
             ,
             and
             lockt
             one
             to
             another
             ,
             upon
             which
             there
             are
             laid
             planckes
             for
             men
             to
             passe
             over
             and
             repasse
             ,
             and
             if
             one
             would
             take
             them
             up
             in
             the
             night
             ,
             they
             do
             it
             in
             such
             a
             manner
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             soon
             sundred
             one
             from
             another
             .
             An
             Enemy
             cannot
             so
             easily
             spoile
             such
             a
             Bridge
             ,
             because
             it
             lies
             even
             with
             the
             water
             ,
             and
             if
             one
             part
             of
             it
             should
             be
             shot
             a
             peeces
             ,
             one
             may
             presenly
             help
             it
             againe
             ,
             with
             other
             Barrels
             and
             posts
             .
          
           
             There
             is
             an
             other
             kind
             of
             Bridge
             ,
             over
             which
             one
             may
             give
             an
             assault
             ,
             whereof
             some
             of
             them
             are
             borne
             upon
             waggons
             ,
             and
             others
             upon
             boats
             ,
             and
             are
             made
             after
             the
             manner
             of
             
               Draw-bridges
               ,
            
             saving
             that
             they
             are
             lighter
             ,
             and
             are
             drawn
             upon
             the
             waggons
             ,
             or
             boates
             upon
             which
             they
             are
             laid
             ,
             but
             when
             one
             is
             to
             use
             them
             ,
             then
             they
             must
             take
             them
             downe
             .
             Read
             the
             Treasury
             of
             the
             
               Mechanick
               Secrets
            
             of
             
               Augustine
               de
               Ramely
               :
            
             The
             Artillery
             of
             
               Diego
               Vffano
               ,
            
             and
             the
             Theater
             of
             the
             instruments
             of
             
               Henry
               Leysing
               ,
            
             which
             treate
             of
             these
             things
             at
             large
             .
          
           
           
             But
             of
             all
             Bridges
             none
             are
             found
             more
             necessary
             and
             usefull
             then
             those
             that
             are
             made
             of
             flaggs
             and
             Bulrushes
             .
             For
             all
             others
             require
             great
             charges
             ,
             especially
             when
             some
             Ingenier
             takes
             some
             old
             invention
             from
             an
             ancient
             Author
             ,
             and
             gives
             it
             out
             for
             a
             new
             one
             :
             for
             it
             is
             reason
             such
             a
             one
             should
             be
             recompenced
             ,
             because
             of
             his
             invention
             ,
             and
             afterward
             becomes
             a
             directour
             for
             the
             making
             of
             it
             ,
             as
             though
             no
             other
             could
             be
             made
             ,
             but
             that
             which
             he
             hath
             invented
             ,
             and
             so
             by
             this
             meanes
             makes
             his
             benefit
             of
             it
             ,
             and
             his
             count
             and
             reckoning
             according
             to
             his
             desire
             ,
             by
             making
             a
             bridge
             at
             such
             a
             high
             rate
             and
             charge
             ,
             that
             makes
             his
             masters
             purse
             light
             ,
             and
             his
             owne
             heavy
             .
             But
             if
             you
             looke
             narrowly
             upon
             it
             ,
             you
             shall
             find
             it
             to
             be
             an
             old
             invention
             ,
             as
             one
             cast
             off
             ,
             and
             serves
             for
             no
             use
             .
             The
             like
             doth
             happen
             here
             ,
             for
             when
             you
             consider
             well
             many
             new
             invented
             Bridges
             ,
             made
             with
             great
             skill
             and
             industry
             ,
             yet
             neverthelesse
             they
             serve
             for
             little
             or
             no
             use
             .
             But
             your
             bridges
             made
             with
             flaggs
             ,
             or
             bulrushes
             ,
             are
             nothing
             so
             chargeable
             ,
             and
             yet
             neverthelesse
             of
             great
             use
             :
             we
             will
             shew
             here
             in
             few
             words
             ,
             how
             they
             are
             ,
             and
             in
             what
             manner
             to
             be
             made
             .
          
           
             The
             matter
             whereof
             they
             are
             made
             ,
             are
             called
             in
             Dutch
             
               Biesen
               ,
            
             in
             French
             a
             
               Ionc
               ,
            
             in
             Latine
             
               Iuncus
               ,
            
             and
             in
             English
             a
             
               Bulrush
               .
            
             This
             rush
             groweth
             in
             Rivers
             ,
             waters
             ,
             Brookes
             ,
             some
             foure
             ,
             five
             or
             six
             ▪
             foot
             high
             ,
             and
             is
             commonly
             found
             in
             brook
             pits
             Marras
             ,
             and
             wet
             places
             ,
             especially
             by
             Rivers
             sides
             ,
             whereof
             also
             many
             times
             houses
             are
             tharcht
             .
             The
             nature
             of
             this
             bulrush
             is
             to
             float
             above
             the
             water
             ,
             and
             are
             used
             (
             being
             bound
             up
             in
             a
             bundle
             )
             when
             boyes
             learnes
             first
             to
             swimme
             ,
             putting
             them
             under
             their
             arme-pits
             .
          
           
             This
             Bridge
             above
             mentioned
             is
             made
             with
             this
             rush
             after
             this
             manner
             following
             ,
             when
             they
             are
             ripe
             and
             growne
             to
             their
             length
             ,
             then
             they
             must
             be
             plucked
             up
             ,
             and
             well
             dried
             ,
             and
             when
             you
             would
             make
             such
             a
             Bridge
             ,
             you
             must
             bind
             up
             these
             Bullrushes
             in
             round
             bundles
             ,
             or
             foure
             square
             ,
             whereof
             the
             sides
             must
             be
             some
             ten
             inches
             broad
             ,
             and
             about
             foure
             or
             five
             foot
             long
             .
          
           
             Now
             having
             got
             good
             store
             of
             them
             ,
             one
             makes
             a
             hurdle
             of
             them
             ,
             enterlaced
             with
             small
             wit
             hs
             ,
             5
             ▪
             foot
             broad
             ,
             and
             7.
             or
             8.
             foot
             long
             :
             Vpon
             this
             hurdle
             one
             layes
             and
             binds
             in
             order
             the
             bundles
             ,
             one
             after
             an
             other
             ,
             and
             afterward
             one
             takes
             two
             long
             stakes
             ,
             a
             little
             greater
             then
             a
             pike
             ,
             which
             is
             fastened
             to
             the
             hurdle
             ,
             drawing
             and
             binding
             these
             bundles
             fast
             one
             to
             another
             ,
             which
             are
             likewise
             bound
             with
             canvas
             ,
             at
             the
             end
             of
             the
             hurdles
             one
             fastens
             at
             both
             ends
             two
             or
             three
             rings
             made
             with
             wit
             hs
             ,
             to
             joyne
             and
             fasten
             the
             joynctures
             of
             this
             bridge
             together
             .
          
           
             These
             kind
             of
             Bridges
             are
             of
             excellent
             use
             in
             Seiges
             ▪
             chiefely
             in
             places
             where
             one
             is
             resolved
             to
             take
             in
             a
             worke
             upon
             a
             suddain
             enterprise
             ,
             and
             would
             not
             be
             at
             the
             charge
             of
             making
             a
             Gallery
             .
          
           
             When
             one
             is
             resolved
             to
             take
             in
             such
             a
             work
             ,
             those
             which
             are
             appointed
             to
             force
             it
             ,
             being
             well
             armed
             as
             is
             requisite
             ,
             being
             come
             to
             the
             brink
             of
             the
             moate
             by
             the
             meanes
             of
             the
             Approches
             ,
             which
             are
             brought
             thether
             ,
             they
             send
             out
             before
             some
             venterous
             Souldiers
             ,
             which
             carrying
             this
             bridge
             launces
             it
             into
             the
             water
             ,
             and
             joynes
             the
             peeces
             together
             withall
             expedition
             (
             and
             while
             the
             musketteirs
             gives
             fire
             as
             fast
             as
             ever
             they
             can
             )
             till
             they
             have
             laid
             it
             over
             the
             bredth
             of
             the
             moat
             ,
             and
             fastened
             it
             on
             the
             other
             side
             ,
             which
             being
             done
             ,
             the
             Souldiers
             goes
             over
             it
             ,
             and
             strives
             to
             enter
             by
             all
             meanes
             to
             take
             in
             the
             work
             ,
             as
             they
             are
             commanded
             .
          
           
             But
             if
             there
             be
             any
             mine
             made
             ready
             ,
             they
             stay
             the
             putting
             over
             of
             the
             Bridge
             ,
             and
             the
             falling
             on
             ,
             till
             the
             mine
             be
             sprung
             ,
             for
             feare
             of
             breaking
             the
             Bridge
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             might
             spring
             backward
             .
          
           
             When
             the
             beseiged
             are
             resolved
             to
             make
             a
             sally
             ,
             they
             may
             likewise
             make
             use
             of
             these
             kind
             of
             Bridges
             ,
             all
             other
             commodities
             and
             utilities
             ,
             necessity
             the
             mother
             of
             such
             like
             inventions
             will
             shew
             you
             .
          
           
             Now
             for
             the
             better
             understanding
             of
             all
             things
             touching
             these
             bridges
             above
             described
             ,
             we
             have
             represented
             them
             in
             the
             figure
             159.
             where
             you
             shall
             see
             how
             they
             are
             made
             fast
             ,
             on
             that
             side
             which
             is
             to
             come
             into
             the
             water
             .
          
           
             But
             they
             are
             to
             weak
             ,
             where
             you
             are
             to
             put
             over
             a
             broad
             moat
             ,
             such
             as
             are
             before
             Townes
             and
             Royall
             Forts
             ,
             over
             which
             one
             must
             passe
             ,
             before
             they
             can
             come
             to
             the
             Wall
             ,
             for
             these
             
             serve
             onely
             for
             some
             suddaine
             peece
             of
             service
             ,
             and
             therefore
             it
             is
             needfull
             to
             make
             use
             of
             some
             other
             invention
             called
             a
             Gallery
             ,
             which
             is
             of
             excellent
             use
             though
             chargeable
             ,
             and
             which
             we
             will
             handle
             in
             the
             next
             chapter
             following
             .
          
        
         
           
             OF
             GALLERIES
             .
             THE
             SEVENTH
             CHAPTER
             .
          
           
             
               VEgecius
            
             in
             the
             16.
             chapter
             of
             his
             fourth
             book
             ,
             describeth
             a
             certain
             kind
             of
             work
             ,
             which
             the
             Ancients
             called
             
               Vinea
               ,
            
             and
             saith
             it
             was
             a
             work
             made
             of
             plancks
             ioyned
             together
             ,
             some
             eight
             foot
             high
             ,
             seven
             foot
             broad
             ,
             and
             sixteen
             foot
             long
             ,
             the
             roofe
             or
             toppe
             whereof
             was
             covered
             with
             boards
             ,
             and
             hurdles
             interlaced
             together
             ,
             and
             the
             sides
             with
             Boughes
             ,
             in
             such
             wise
             that
             it
             could
             not
             be
             spoyled
             with
             stones
             ,
             over
             which
             also
             was
             laid
             thick
             Oxen
             hydes
             ,
             newly
             killed
             ,
             or
             coverlids
             of
             hair
             cloth
             ,
             to
             keepe
             them
             from
             firing
             ,
             (
             whence
             it
             hapneth
             ,
             that
             we
             make
             use
             of
             such
             coverings
             in
             our
             moderne
             warres
             ,
             for
             to
             hinder
             the
             force
             and
             violence
             of
             Gun-powder
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             not
             so
             easily
             spoyled
             by
             fire
             (
             as
             hath
             bin
             said
             above
             )
             and
             these
             workes
             being
             in
             a
             readinesse
             ,
             one
             makes
             use
             of
             them
             to
             their
             advantage
             .
          
           
             When
             they
             have
             made
             good
             store
             of
             them
             ,
             then
             they
             joyne
             and
             fasten
             them
             together
             ,
             and
             the
             Beseigers
             being
             blinded
             and
             covered
             under
             them
             ,
             begin
             their
             approches
             to
             the
             wal●
             and
             sapp
             under
             the
             foundation
             of
             them
             to
             make
             them
             fall
             .
          
           
             There
             is
             no
             work
             which
             resembles
             more
             rightly
             this
             invention
             of
             the
             Ancients
             ,
             then
             our
             moderne
             Galleries
             :
             The
             preparation
             ,
             the
             use
             ,
             the
             height
             ,
             the
             breadth
             ,
             are
             almost
             all
             alike
             ,
             and
             do
             agree
             so
             together
             in
             all
             things
             ,
             that
             we
             must
             needs
             confesse
             our
             Gallery
             is
             no
             new
             invention
             ,
             but
             was
             in
             use
             among
             the
             Ancients
             ,
             and
             which
             of
             late
             yeares
             hath
             bin
             renewed
             again
             .
          
           
             For
             if
             one
             considers
             neerly
             their
             structure
             ,
             the
             Vinea
             of
             the
             Ancients
             was
             made
             with
             timber
             and
             plancks
             ,
             and
             our
             Galleries
             for
             the
             most
             part
             are
             made
             with
             postes
             and
             plancks
             joyned
             together
             :
             That
             had
             also
             posts
             to
             rest
             upon
             for
             its
             foundation
             ,
             and
             this
             hath
             also
             great
             posts
             to
             beare
             up
             the
             weight
             of
             the
             whole
             work
             :
             The
             sides
             of
             the
             Ancients
             Vinea
             was
             fortified
             against
             the
             force
             of
             the
             Balists
             ,
             because
             they
             were
             laid
             with
             hurdles
             and
             boughs
             ,
             wreathed
             together
             ,
             but
             our
             Galleries
             are
             covered
             with
             plancks
             ,
             and
             earth
             cast
             upon
             them
             ,
             so
             that
             they
             cannot
             be
             spoyled
             by
             Canon
             :
             The
             Vineas
             were
             kept
             from
             firing
             by
             the
             helpe
             of
             
               Oxehides
            
             wherewith
             they
             were
             covered
             ,
             and
             the
             sides
             of
             our
             Galleries
             have
             earth
             cast
             about
             them
             ,
             that
             fire-works
             may
             do
             them
             no
             harme
             .
          
           
             These
             Vineas
             served
             to
             come
             to
             the
             wall
             ,
             to
             sapp
             it
             ,
             but
             our
             Galleries
             are
             brought
             to
             the
             Basis
             and
             Barme
             of
             a
             Rampart
             ,
             to
             make
             a
             mine
             in
             a
             Bulwarke
             ,
             and
             so
             to
             blow
             it
             up
             .
          
           
             The
             hight
             and
             breadth
             of
             the
             one
             and
             the
             other
             do
             not
             differ
             much
             ,
             but
             it
             seemes
             the
             length
             is
             differing
             ,
             though
             in
             effect
             it
             differs
             not
             much
             ;
             For
             the
             Vinea
             the
             joynts
             of
             them
             being
             fastned
             one
             to
             another
             were
             reasonable
             long
             ,
             but
             our
             Galleries
             are
             set
             up
             with
             plancks
             and
             posts
             and
             as
             it
             were
             makes
             but
             one
             peece
             joyned
             together
             .
          
           
             Whence
             it
             appeareth
             ,
             that
             our
             Gallery
             is
             not
             wholy
             a
             new
             invention
             ,
             but
             hath
             been
             in
             use
             of
             old
             ,
             though
             in
             some
             things
             it
             is
             altered
             and
             changed
             .
          
           
             We
             will
             now
             take
             it
             in
             hand
             ,
             and
             shew
             after
             what
             manner
             it
             must
             be
             made
             ▪
             with
             all
             the
             appurtenances
             thereunto
             belonging
             .
          
           
             When
             an
             aproach
             then
             is
             brought
             so
             far
             ,
             where
             a
             Sap
             is
             to
             begin
             not
             far
             from
             the
             Town
             or
             Fortresse
             beseiged
             ,
             and
             that
             one
             is
             sapped
             to
             the
             Counterscharfe
             ,
             then
             one
             sees
             how
             a
             Gallery
             may
             be
             put
             over
             the
             moate
             .
             For
             the
             effecting
             whereof
             ,
             one
             must
             make
             provision
             of
             many
             things
             necessary
             thereunto
             ,
             and
             first
             of
             all
             get
             good
             store
             of
             longbrush
             and
             bundles
             of
             boughs
             ,
             to
             fill
             up
             the
             moate
             ,
             with
             a
             great
             number
             of
             plancks
             and
             posts
             ioyned
             and
             made
             together
             like
             a
             Gallowes
             ,
             all
             of
             them
             having
             one
             height
             and
             bredth
             ,
             which
             are
             so
             framed
             and
             made
             by
             the
             Carpenters
             before
             they
             are
             brought
             down
             into
             the
             Aproaches
             ,
             tha
             
             one
             may
             either
             take
             them
             asunder
             ,
             or
             pin
             them
             together
             without
             any
             great
             labour
             ,
             for
             being
             brought
             thither
             ,
             where
             they
             are
             to
             be
             used
             :
             Jt
             is
             easily
             done
             by
             marking
             the
             joynts
             and
             peeces
             with
             one
             and
             the
             same
             number
             which
             they
             may
             fit
             ,
             and
             joyne
             together
             without
             any
             great
             difficulty
             .
          
           
             Such
             a
             Gallowes
             hath
             five
             peeces
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             two
             posts
             which
             stand
             upright
             ,
             one
             croswise
             over
             them
             ,
             which
             ioynes
             the
             other
             two
             together
             ,
             and
             two
             props
             or
             supporters
             of
             timber
             to
             bear
             the
             crosse
             post
             up
             ,
             the
             two
             posts
             are
             set
             upright
             being
             8
             or
             9
             foot
             long
             ,
             and
             are
             cut
             halfe
             a
             foote
             in
             the
             upper
             end
             of
             them
             ,
             for
             the
             crosse
             beame
             ,
             or
             post
             to
             rest
             upon
             the
             other
             two
             posts
             ,
             and
             to
             ioyne
             them
             together
             ,
             and
             a
             foot
             and
             a
             halfe
             at
             the
             lower
             end
             is
             sharpned
             and
             set
             fast
             into
             the
             Ground
             ,
             so
             that
             it
             remaines
             seven
             foot
             high
             for
             the
             top
             of
             the
             Gallery
             .
             Yo
             shall
             see
             the
             forme
             of
             it
             set
             out
             in
             the
             160
             figure
             following
             ,
             whereof
             the
             length
             of
             them
             from
             
               a
               b
            
             to
             
               c
               d
            
             are
             each
             of
             them
             9.
             foot
             long
             ,
             and
             the
             bredth
             6.
             or
             7.
             inches
             ,
             the
             halfe
             of
             this
             breadth
             at
             the
             uppermost
             end
             of
             these
             two
             posts
             is
             cut
             the
             length
             of
             halfe
             a
             foot
             ,
             to
             lay
             the
             crosse
             beame
             upon
             them
             ,
             which
             ought
             to
             be
             cut
             in
             the
             like
             manner
             ,
             having
             the
             length
             of
             ten
             foot
             ,
             or
             thereabouts
             ,
             for
             the
             longer
             this
             crosse
             post
             is
             ,
             the
             broader
             will
             the
             Gallery
             be
             ,
             and
             the
             better
             for
             the
             souldiers
             to
             march
             five
             or
             fixe
             in
             front
             ,
             when
             they
             are
             to
             give
             an
             assault
             upon
             the
             breach
             ,
             the
             greatnesse
             is
             answerable
             to
             the
             two
             others
             ,
             being
             marked
             with
             
               A
               C.
            
             Now
             forasmuch
             as
             these
             posts
             are
             made
             in
             such
             a
             manner
             with
             joynts
             that
             they
             may
             soone
             be
             joined
             together
             or
             severed
             ,
             they
             cannot
             be
             so
             firme
             as
             those
             which
             are
             joined
             and
             pinned
             fast
             together
             by
             force
             ,
             without
             being
             afterwards
             taken
             asunder
             ,
             especially
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             great
             weight
             which
             they
             are
             to
             beare
             ,
             therefore
             there
             are
             props
             made
             to
             support
             the
             crosse
             post
             ,
             as
             you
             may
             see
             by
             
               E.F.
            
             and
             
               G.H.
            
             marked
             in
             the
             160.
             figure
             ,
             all
             which
             being
             done
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             peeces
             joined
             and
             pinned
             fast
             together
             as
             is
             fitting
             ,
             every
             peece
             is
             marked
             ,
             and
             holes
             bored
             through
             them
             to
             fasten
             them
             together
             in
             a
             little
             time
             ,
             when
             there
             is
             occasion
             to
             have
             them
             set
             up
             .
          
           
             
               Of
               the
               Bords
               and
               Planks
               for
               a
               Gallery
               .
            
             
               AFter
               this
               you
               must
               provide
               in
               a
               readinesse
               good
               store
               of
               Fir
               boards
               and
               plancks
               ,
               which
               must
               be
               as
               long
               as
               the
               two
               posts
               ,
               or
               rather
               four
               or
               five
               inches
               longer
               ,
               so
               that
               if
               the
               distance
               between
               post
               and
               post
               be
               5
               foote
               broad
               ,
               then
               these
               plancks
               must
               be
               five
               foote
               ,
               and
               a
               halfe
               long
               :
               for
               the
               odd
               half
               foot
               is
               divided
               into
               two
               equall
               parts
               ,
               taking
               up
               three
               inches
               on
               either
               side
               of
               the
               two
               posts
               ,
               into
               which
               holes
               are
               bored
               ,
               to
               naile
               the
               plancks
               and
               the
               posts
               fast
               together
               .
            
             
               The
               ordinary
               space
               between
               the
               posts
               joyned
               together
               is
               commonly
               4.
               or
               5.
               (
               but
               seldome
               )
               six
               foot
               in
               bredth
               ,
               which
               oftentimes
               is
               changed
               according
               to
               the
               condition
               of
               the
               place
               ,
               and
               as
               the
               danger
               is
               great
               or
               little
               .
            
             
               The
               thicknesse
               of
               the
               plancks
               is
               without
               any
               certain
               measure
               ,
               because
               it
               is
               needlesse
               to
               make
               them
               all
               of
               one
               thicknesse
               ,
               for
               it
               may
               so
               fall
               out
               ,
               that
               somtimes
               you
               must
               use
               a
               thick
               planck
               ,
               and
               some
               whiles
               a
               thinner
               is
               fitter
               to
               stop
               a
               hole
               withall
               ,
               as
               occasion
               may
               serve
               .
            
             
               Now
               for
               the
               joyning
               and
               fastening
               of
               your
               posts
               together
               ,
               you
               must
               provide
               good
               store
               of
               oaken
               pins
               ,
               and
               bore
               all
               the
               holes
               with
               a
               borer
               ,
               to
               the
               end
               the
               holes
               may
               not
               cleave
               ,
               now
               all
               these
               pins
               ought
               to
               be
               of
               one
               bignesse
               .
            
             
               Also
               in
               Galleries
               there
               are
               used
               nailes
               some
               greater
               and
               longer
               ,
               as
               you
               shall
               have
               use
               for
               ,
               some
               of
               them
               are
               4.
               or
               5.
               inches
               long
               for
               to
               naile
               the
               plancks
               with
               ,
               which
               covers
               the
               sides
               :
               some
               other
               6.
               or
               7.
               inches
               long
               ,
               which
               nailes
               the
               props
               into
               the
               posts
               ,
               you
               must
               have
               good
               store
               of
               them
               of
               all
               sises
               for
               to
               use
               them
               ,
               when
               necessity
               shall
               require
               .
               Your
               ordinary
               wheel-barrowes
               and
               shovels
               are
               here
               of
               exellent
               use
               ,
               but
               you
               must
               have
               shovels
               that
               have
               longer
               hafts
               then
               ordinary
               ,
               to
               cast
               the
               earth
               a
               good
               way
               into
               the
               moate
               ,
               which
               cannot
               be
               so
               well
               done
               with
               short
               hafts
               .
            
             
               Jn
               this
               place
               one
               ought
               to
               make
               use
               of
               thick
               plank-blinds
               ,
               which
               we
               have
               mentioned
               in
               the
               chapter
               of
               gabions
               and
               blinds
               ,
               which
               serve
               for
               a
               very
               good
               use
               in
               Galleries
               ,
               as
               we
               shall
               show
               you
               hereafter
               .
            
             
             
             
             
             
               A
               Gallerie
               raised
               without
               ,
               being
               covered
               with
               Earth
               ,
               is
               represented
               unto
               you
               in
               the
               161
               figure
               .
            
             
               After
               you
               have
               sapt
               through
               the
               Counterscharfe
               ,
               and
               that
               you
               are
               come
               to
               the
               edge
               or
               brinke
               of
               the
               moate
               ,
               and
               resolve
               to
               lay
               a
               Gallerie
               over
               it
               ,
               you
               must
               first
               of
               all
               provide
               good
               store
               of
               these
               bundles
               of
               long
               brush
               before
               mentioned
               ,
               brought
               downe
               in
               waggons
               ,
               and
               abundance
               of
               wheele-barrowes
               ,
               to
               fetch
               Earth
               into
               the
               Gallerie
               ,
               to
               cast
               these
               things
               into
               the
               moat
               ,
               and
               to
               fill
               it
               up
               ,
               even
               to
               that
               place
               ,
               where
               you
               intend
               to
               make
               a
               
                 Mine
                 ,
              
               and
               in
               so
               doing
               ,
               you
               shall
               by
               degrees
               fill
               up
               the
               moate
               ,
               and
               make
               a
               good
               foundation
               for
               your
               Gallerie
               to
               rest
               and
               stand
               upon
               .
            
             
               But
               because
               any
               cannot
               cast
               and
               lay
               these
               bush-faggots
               in
               order
               ,
               as
               one
               would
               ,
               you
               shall
               meet
               with
               some
               venturous
               souldier
               or
               another
               ,
               who
               for
               money
               will
               adventure
               in
               the
               night
               to
               goe
               out
               at
               the
               mouth
               of
               the
               Gallerie
               into
               the
               moate
               ,
               to
               lay
               them
               in
               order
               .
               And
               to
               the
               end
               they
               may
               not
               be
               seen
               by
               the
               Enemy
               ,
               one
               must
               observe
               well
               to
               make
               the
               
                 perpendicular
              
               of
               the
               face
               of
               the
               Bulwarke
               ,
               which
               will
               be
               the
               shortest
               way
               to
               come
               unto
               it
               .
            
             
               The
               moate
               then
               being
               filled
               with
               these
               long
               bundles
               ,
               and
               fagots
               of
               Brush
               abovesaid
               ,
               so
               that
               one
               may
               cast
               Earth
               upon
               them
               brought
               from
               the
               next
               sap
               ,
               the
               work-men
               fetches
               good
               store
               of
               Earth
               in
               wheel-barrowes
               upon
               plancks
               laid
               in
               the
               Gallerie
               ,
               and
               brings
               it
               to
               the
               mouth
               of
               the
               Gallerie
               ,
               casts
               it
               upon
               a
               heape
               and
               then
               two
               or
               three
               workemen
               which
               are
               apointed
               to
               worke
               in
               the
               mouth
               of
               the
               Gallerie
               ,
               casts
               it
               into
               the
               moate
               to
               settle
               the
               fagotts
               .
               This
               Earth
               cast
               up
               in
               the
               forme
               of
               a
               heape
               ,
               serves
               to
               cover
               and
               make
               a
               blinde
               for
               the
               work-men
               onely
               before
               ,
               but
               not
               on
               the
               sides
               ▪
               and
               therefore
               they
               must
               be
               constrayned
               to
               make
               blinds
               on
               that
               side
               which
               is
               most
               dangerous
               ,
               til
               the
               posts
               be
               set
               up
               ,
               yea
               oftentimes
               they
               must
               make
               blinds
               on
               both
               sides
               of
               the
               Gallerie
               ,
               if
               an
               Enemy
               flanks
               it
               from
               two
               places
               .
               After
               this
               one
               begins
               to
               set
               up
               one
               of
               the
               posts
               ▪
               ioyned
               and
               pinned
               together
               as
               hath
               been
               taught
               ,
               and
               as
               you
               may
               see
               in
               the
               160
               figure
               .
               And
               sets
               some
               men
               continually
               to
               fetch
               Earth
               in
               their
               wheele-barrowes
               ,
               others
               from
               the
               top
               of
               the
               heape
               casts
               the
               Earth
               with
               their
               Tong-shovels
               into
               the
               moate
               ,
               and
               gets
               more
               ground
               to
               set
               up
               the
               other
               past
               ,
               for
               haveing
               got
               a
               matter
               of
               five
               foot
               or
               there-abouts
               ,
               they
               sett
               up
               the
               other
               past
               ioyned
               together
               as
               is
               said
               ,
               after
               they
               have
               set
               forward
               the
               blinds
               for
               to
               cover
               the
               sides
               of
               it
               :
               which
               two
               posts
               being
               set
               up
               ,
               then
               they
               naile
               the
               plancks
               fast
               to
               both
               sides
               of
               the
               Gallerie
               ,
               and
               they
               set
               onely
               the
               others
               upon
               it
               without
               fastning
               them
               by
               covering
               the
               side
               onely
               with
               Earth
               ,
               which
               may
               be
               beaten
               downe
               by
               the
               Enemie
               ,
               till
               it
               is
               able
               to
               resist
               a
               Canon
               bullett
               ,
               and
               then
               casts
               Earth
               above
               the
               Gallerie
               ,
               about
               a
               foote
               or
               a
               foote
               and
               a
               halfe
               high
               ,
               which
               must
               be
               spread
               ,
               and
               laid
               even
               ,
               to
               the
               end
               ,
               fireworks
               may
               not
               lie
               upon
               it
               ,
               and
               spoile
               the
               Gallerie
               by
               fyring
               of
               it
               .
            
             
               It
               happens
               sometimes
               ,
               that
               one
               side
               of
               the
               Gallerie
               is
               out
               of
               the
               Enemies
               sight
               ,
               and
               cannot
               be
               beaten
               downe
               with
               their
               Canon
               ▪
               in
               such
               sort
               that
               one
               needs
               not
               cover
               it
               with
               Earth
               and
               then
               that
               time
               and
               charge
               is
               saved
               ,
               unlesse
               it
               lies
               so
               ,
               that
               an
               Enemie
               can
               sett
               fire
               on
               it
               with
               pitch
               ropes
               and
               other
               fire
               workes
               ,
               or
               spoyle
               it
               with
               his
               Canon
               ,
               which
               lies
               in
               his
               
                 Outworkes
                 ,
              
               which
               being
               so
               ,
               then
               of
               necessity
               ,
               you
               must
               cover
               that
               side
               ,
               till
               it
               is
               able
               to
               resist
               the
               Enemies
               Canon
               .
            
             
               And
               because
               it
               would
               be
               very
               darke
               if
               the
               whole
               Gallerie
               were
               covered
               with
               Earth
               ,
               and
               so
               very
               incommodious
               for
               the
               workmen
               ,
               therefore
               to
               helpe
               that
               on
               the
               safest
               side
               ,
               there
               are
               little
               windowes
               or
               holes
               made
               of
               a
               foote
               high
               ,
               and
               a
               foot
               and
               a
               halfe
               long
               ,
               betweene
               every
               three
               or
               foure
               postes
               ioyned
               together
               ,
               to
               give
               light
               into
               the
               Gallerie
               .
            
             
               This
               work
               is
               continually
               aduanced
               and
               the
               heape
               raised
               by
               the
               workemen
               ,
               which
               cast
               the
               Earth
               into
               the
               moate
               in
               a
               great
               quantity
               before
               them
               ,
               haveing
               alwaies
               a
               singular
               care
               ,
               that
               the
               heape
               from
               whence
               they
               cast
               their
               Earth
               growes
               not
               too
               low
               ,
               least
               the
               workemen
               be
               discovered
               .
               Afterward
               they
               sett
               up
               the
               third
               posts
               ioyned
               together
               in
               the
               same
               manner
               as
               hath
               been
               said
               ,
               and
               make
               fast
               the
               boards
               ,
               and
               planks
               to
               them
               ,
               this
               labour
               must
               be
               continued
               till
               the
               Gallerie
               is
               advanced
               even
               to
               the
               very
               soote
               and
               barme
               of
               the
               
                 Rampard
                 .
              
            
             
               All
               which
               is
               shown
               in
               the
               162
               figure
               where
               a
               Gallerie
               is
               made
               &
               covered
               ,
               as
               also
               to
               show
               that
               one
               of
               the
               posts
               ioyned
               and
               sett
               up
               ,
               which
               must
               be
               nailed
               to
               the
               other
               with
               planks
               ,
               and
               the
               heape
               of
               earth
               behinde
               ,
               which
               the
               man
               stands
               and
               works
               is
               also
               here
               pourtrayed
               out
               .
               
               When
               the
               Gallerie
               is
               brought
               over
               almost
               to
               the
               very
               foote
               of
               the
               Rampart
               ,
               then
               one
               may
               come
               to
               it
               with
               more
               safety
               ,
               for
               then
               the
               heape
               is
               taken
               away
               ,
               and
               a
               blinde
               made
               of
               thick
               oaken
               plankes
               to
               begin
               a
               mine
               into
               the
               Bulwarke
               .
            
             
               At
               the
               lower
               end
               of
               these
               posts
               abovesaid
               ,
               as
               you
               may
               see
               from
               B
               to
               D
               ,
               there
               is
               an
               other
               post
               besides
               of
               the
               same
               greatenesse
               ,
               which
               cannot
               be
               seene
               ,
               therefore
               wee
               have
               purposely
               omitted
               it
               ,
               but
               will
               remember
               to
               speake
               of
               it
               ,
               when
               we
               handle
               the
               makeing
               of
               the
               posts
               and
               palisadoes
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             THE
             EIGHTH
             CHAPTER
             .
             OF
             MINES
             .
          
           
             AS
             a
             
               Gallery
            
             is
             an
             ancient
             invention
             ,
             so
             likewise
             Mines
             ,
             which
             we
             make
             at
             this
             day
             have
             been
             heretofore
             in
             use
             amongst
             the
             
               Ancients
            
             also
             :
             And
             this
             is
             the
             last
             thing
             wherewith
             the
             besieged
             are
             troubled
             .
          
           
             A
             Mine
             then
             according
             to
             the
             definition
             of
             
               Vegetius
               ,
            
             is
             a
             Cave
             by
             which
             one
             makes
             secret
             goings
             under
             the
             Eearth
             ,
             to
             come
             by
             night
             unawares
             to
             a
             Fortresse
             ,
             or
             by
             which
             one
             diggeth
             into
             the
             foundation
             ,
             and
             bowels
             of
             a
             wall
             ,
             or
             of
             a
             Bulwark
             ,
             underpropping
             the
             earth
             with
             posts
             of
             wood
             ,
             and
             laying
             under
             it
             dry
             wood
             ,
             for
             when
             they
             would
             make
             a
             hole
             in
             the
             wall
             ,
             they
             set
             fire
             on
             this
             wood
             ,
             which
             being
             burnt
             with
             the
             props
             ,
             the
             wall
             fell
             down
             ,
             and
             the
             Besiegers
             being
             in
             a
             reddinesse
             attending
             the
             fall
             of
             the
             wall
             ,
             ran
             presently
             up
             by
             that
             breach
             ,
             to
             assault
             the
             Fortresse
             ;
             which
             is
             understood
             also
             of
             our
             moderne
             Mines
             which
             we
             make
             in
             by
             blowing
             up
             the
             powder
             that
             is
             laid
             in
             them
             ,
             whence
             it
             appeareth
             clearly
             ,
             that
             this
             is
             also
             an
             ancient
             invention
             ,
             being
             a
             little
             changed
             ,
             and
             amended
             at
             this
             day
             .
          
           
             This
             mineing
             (
             or
             digging
             under
             the
             earth
             )
             is
             called
             in
             Latine
             
               Cuniculus
               ,
            
             of
             which
             name
             ancient
             Writers
             ,
             as
             
               Iulius
               Caesar
               ,
               Livius
               ,
            
             and
             
               Curtius
            
             make
             often
             mention
             of
             in
             the
             description
             of
             this
             
               Stratagem
               ,
            
             it
             signifieth
             a
             Moole
             from
             whence
             the
             name
             is
             taken
             ,
             because
             the
             Mines
             made
             under
             
               Rampards
            
             and
             
               Bulwarks
               ,
            
             resembles
             the
             holes
             and
             passages
             which
             Mooles
             makes
             under
             the
             earth
             .
             There
             are
             others
             which
             derive
             this
             name
             from
             the
             Latine
             word
             
               Cuneus
               ,
            
             because
             the
             Mines
             are
             made
             in
             the
             fashion
             of
             a
             
               Wedge
               ,
            
             which
             is
             thick
             at
             the
             beginning
             ,
             and
             diminisheth
             little
             by
             little
             ,
             even
             as
             the
             Mines
             which
             make
             a
             rupture
             in
             those
             places
             where
             they
             are
             made
             ,
             may
             be
             compared
             to
             a
             wedge
             ,
             which
             cleaveth
             a
             piece
             of
             timber
             in
             sunder
             .
             Mines
             were
             of
             old
             called
             
               Cuniculary
               .
            
             He
             that
             is
             desirous
             to
             know
             more
             thereof
             ,
             let
             him
             read
             
               Vegetius
            
             and
             
               Vitruve
               ,
            
             who
             have
             written
             of
             Military
             inventions
             among
             the
             ancients
             .
          
           
             We
             will
             here
             describe
             in
             a
             few
             words
             ,
             how
             our
             
               moderne
               Mines
            
             are
             made
             at
             this
             day
             .
          
           
             The
             last
             meanes
             for
             the
             forcing
             of
             an
             Enemy
             besieged
             ,
             to
             make
             him
             yeeld
             ,
             is
             this
             making
             of
             a
             Cave
             or
             Mine
             under
             the
             earth
             ,
             which
             is
             begun
             and
             finished
             (
             as
             is
             said
             )
             after
             you
             have
             brought
             your
             
               Gallery
            
             over
             to
             the
             
               Barme
               ,
            
             or
             foot
             of
             a
             
               Rampard
            
             or
             Bulwark
             .
          
           
             But
             before
             it
             is
             begun
             ,
             you
             must
             have
             all
             things
             necessary
             ,
             and
             in
             a
             reddinesse
             ,
             for
             the
             effecting
             of
             this
             work
             ,
             first
             of
             all
             ye
             must
             have
             Spades
             ,
             Shovels
             ,
             Pickaxes
             ,
             and
             all
             kinde
             of
             Masons
             tooles
             ,
             with
             all
             things
             requisite
             to
             pierce
             and
             break
             the
             Wall
             ,
             wherewith
             the
             Rampart
             is
             made
             .
          
           
             Afterward
             ,
             one
             prepares
             props
             to
             support
             ,
             and
             beare
             up
             the
             Mine
             from
             falling
             or
             sinking
             ,
             being
             two
             ,
             or
             two
             inches
             and
             a
             halfe
             thick
             ,
             the
             length
             of
             them
             being
             not
             alike
             ,
             because
             the
             entrance
             into
             the
             Mine
             is
             made
             higher
             then
             towards
             the
             end
             of
             it
             .
             One
             is
             furnished
             also
             with
             firre
             planks
             ,
             for
             to
             line
             the
             Mine
             vvithin
             ,
             as
             above
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             not
             sink
             and
             fall
             down
             ,
             for
             it
             must
             be
             set
             with
             planks
             on
             all
             sides
             ,
             as
             vvell
             as
             the
             foundation
             ,
             especially
             if
             the
             earth
             be
             moulding
             and
             vvettish
             .
          
           
             But
             before
             you
             begin
             to
             make
             your
             Mine
             ,
             it
             vvill
             be
             necessary
             that
             you
             knovv
             the
             condition
             
             of
             the
             place
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             whether
             the
             Bulwark
             be
             hollow
             and
             vaulted
             ,
             or
             whether
             the
             foundation
             be
             laid
             with
             Branchages
             ,
             Logs
             ,
             or
             borne
             up
             with
             Piles
             :
             and
             whither
             water
             may
             not
             spoile
             your
             Mine
             ,
             if
             you
             should
             mine
             too
             low
             .
             In
             case
             that
             the
             Rampard
             or
             the
             Bulwark
             into
             which
             you
             intend
             to
             mine
             ,
             were
             laid
             with
             logs
             ,
             or
             supported
             upon
             great
             Piles
             ,
             which
             happens
             ordinarily
             in
             moorish
             and
             rotten
             places
             ,
             upon
             which
             you
             must
             build
             your
             Bulworks
             ,
             and
             Rampards
             ;
             or
             when
             one
             can
             get
             no
             other
             Earth
             but
             sand
             :
             you
             must
             trie
             and
             get
             out
             all
             these
             Piles
             with
             Cables
             or
             ropes
             by
             winding
             them
             out
             with
             an
             instrument
             ordained
             for
             this
             purpose
             .
             Now
             you
             must
             pierce
             and
             pull
             out
             these
             loggs
             by
             such
             wayes
             and
             meanes
             as
             is
             known
             unto
             Miners
             ,
             for
             the
             makeing
             of
             a
             way
             and
             a
             chamber
             to
             lay
             your
             Gunpowder
             in
             .
             When
             you
             are
             assured
             that
             you
             cannot
             digge
             no
             deeper
             ,
             but
             that
             shall
             come
             to
             water
             ,
             then
             you
             must
             raise
             your
             Mine
             a
             little
             higher
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             the
             powder
             may
             lie
             drie
             in
             it
             .
          
           
             The
             Miners
             then
             beginning
             to
             break
             into
             the
             wall
             ,
             do
             carry
             their
             Mine
             so
             close
             ,
             and
             secret
             as
             possible
             may
             be
             ,
             that
             the
             Besieged
             may
             not
             heare
             any
             noise
             ,
             or
             gather
             any
             notise
             ,
             where
             the
             mine
             is
             made
             ,
             and
             how
             it
             runs
             :
             for
             if
             they
             doe
             ,
             without
             all
             question
             ,
             they
             will
             make
             a
             
               Counter-mine
            
             to
             discover
             and
             spoile
             your
             Mine
             begun
             ,
             so
             that
             you
             shall
             be
             driven
             to
             begin
             a
             new
             one
             in
             another
             place
             ,
             as
             hath
             happened
             many
             times
             .
          
           
             The
             heighth
             ,
             and
             the
             bredth
             of
             the
             
               Mine
            
             must
             be
             made
             in
             such
             a
             manner
             ,
             as
             you
             may
             onely
             lay
             in
             the
             Barrels
             of
             powder
             ,
             for
             it
             ought
             to
             be
             no
             higher
             ,
             nor
             no
             broader
             ,
             because
             your
             intentiō
             is
             ,
             but
             onely
             to
             chamber
             your
             powder
             in
             it
             ,
             and
             therefore
             it
             must
             needs
             be
             so
             high
             as
             a
             man
             ,
             and
             no
             higher
             ,
             but
             that
             a
             man
             may
             onely
             work
             in
             that
             upon
             his
             kneés
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             stoops
             lower
             ,
             when
             he
             goes
             to
             lay
             the
             Powder
             into
             its
             chamber
             .
          
           
             The
             heighth
             then
             must
             be
             but
             4
             ,
             or
             4
             foot
             and
             a
             half
             high
             at
             the
             most
             ,
             and
             the
             bredth
             but
             3
             and
             a
             half
             .
             or
             foure
             foot
             ,
             according
             to
             vvhich
             measures
             ,
             the
             props
             and
             the
             planks
             are
             framed
             ,
             vvherevvith
             you
             are
             to
             underprop
             the
             Mine
             .
          
           
             When
             you
             begin
             to
             mine
             into
             a
             Rampard
             or
             Bulwark
             ,
             you
             take
             out
             the
             earth
             ,
             and
             carry
             it
             away
             in
             a
             vessell
             ,
             or
             a
             pall
             of
             leather
             ,
             which
             is
             light
             ,
             in
             handing
             it
             one
             to
             another
             ,
             till
             it
             be
             brought
             out
             of
             the
             hole
             ,
             or
             entrance
             out
             of
             the
             Mine
             ,
             and
             laid
             in
             the
             Gallerie
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             the
             Enemy
             may
             not
             see
             it
             ,
             and
             gesse
             where
             abouts
             your
             Mine
             is
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Master-miner
               ,
            
             which
             hath
             the
             conducting
             of
             the
             Mine
             ,
             ought
             to
             be
             a
             man
             of
             great
             experience
             ,
             how
             he
             ought
             to
             carry
             it
             ,
             lest
             he
             be
             mistaken
             ,
             and
             so
             make
             it
             in
             a
             place
             ,
             where
             he
             ought
             not
             to
             make
             it
             .
             Therefore
             he
             must
             have
             knowledge
             of
             a
             
               Compasse
               ,
            
             and
             how
             the
             
               needle
            
             stands
             ,
             that
             he
             may
             carry
             his
             Mine
             aright
             .
             He
             ought
             also
             to
             have
             skill
             in
             
               Geometry
               ,
            
             to
             the
             end
             he
             may
             know
             of
             what
             heighth
             he
             must
             carry
             his
             Mine
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             proportion
             of
             the
             Rampart
             .
          
           
             The
             nearer
             he
             comes
             unto
             the
             place
             where
             he
             is
             to
             make
             his
             Chamber
             ,
             the
             narrower
             ought
             the
             way
             of
             the
             mine
             to
             be
             ,
             in
             such
             sort
             ,
             that
             it
             must
             be
             no
             broader
             or
             higher
             at
             the
             entrance
             into
             the
             
               Chamber
               ,
            
             but
             that
             a
             Barrell
             of
             powder
             may
             scarcely
             passe
             through
             the
             way
             for
             the
             straighter
             and
             the
             narrower
             the
             passage
             is
             into
             the
             Chamber
             ,
             the
             easier
             the
             Mine
             is
             stopt
             .
          
           
             The
             place
             where
             the
             Chamber
             is
             ,
             ought
             to
             be
             so
             made
             ,
             that
             the
             powder
             doth
             not
             break
             neither
             the
             one
             ,
             nor
             the
             other
             side
             ▪
             but
             that
             it
             may
             blow
             the
             earth
             upward
             .
             Neverthelesse
             sometimes
             the
             Miners
             are
             commanded
             ,
             to
             make
             their
             Mine
             so
             ,
             as
             it
             may
             blow
             the
             earth
             into
             the
             Fortresse
             ,
             or
             else
             without
             which
             may
             be
             done
             ,
             if
             they
             make
             that
             side
             ,
             which
             is
             to
             be
             blown
             up
             ,
             not
             so
             thick
             as
             the
             other
             :
             for
             the
             nature
             of
             powder
             is
             such
             ,
             that
             it
             maketh
             the
             greatest
             operation
             alwaies
             towards
             the
             weakest
             place
             ,
             and
             though
             it
             blows
             it
             up
             ordinarily
             :
             yet
             commonly
             it
             searcheth
             most
             often
             the
             place
             ,
             where
             it
             may
             break
             out
             soonest
             in
             to
             the
             ayre
             ,
             which
             appeareth
             both
             in
             your
             Canon
             and
             Muskets
             .
          
           
             The
             bignesse
             of
             the
             
               Chamber
            
             is
             divers
             ,
             for
             it
             must
             be
             made
             according
             to
             the
             greatnesse
             and
             proportion
             of
             the
             wall
             or
             Rampard
             :
             neverthelesse
             one
             must
             observe
             ,
             that
             it
             be
             made
             as
             narrow
             as
             possible
             may
             be
             ,
             and
             yet
             must
             have
             room
             enough
             to
             lay
             the
             Barrels
             of
             powder
             into
             it
             :
             the
             ordinary
             heighth
             is
             some
             six
             or
             seven
             foot
             ,
             and
             the
             bredth
             foure
             or
             five
             foot
             .
          
           
             When
             the
             Chamber
             is
             ready
             ,
             then
             you
             lay
             in
             your
             Barrels
             ,
             the
             number
             whereof
             cannot
             be
             so
             precisely
             discribed
             .
             For
             one
             Rampard
             is
             greater
             then
             an
             other
             ,
             in
             so
             much
             ,
             that
             a
             greater
             
             quantity
             of
             powder
             is
             requisite
             more
             for
             one
             place
             then
             an
             other
             .
             The
             common
             opinion
             is
             ,
             that
             a
             Barrel
             of
             powder
             will
             blow
             up
             a
             rod
             ,
             or
             twelue
             foot
             of
             Earth
             .
             The
             Barrels
             are
             laid
             in
             such
             order
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             twinckling
             of
             an
             Eye
             ,
             they
             take
             fire
             all
             at
             one
             time
             ,
             which
             causeth
             a
             greater
             operation
             then
             if
             one
             Barrell
             should
             be
             blowne
             up
             one
             after
             another
             .
             After
             that
             your
             powder
             is
             chambred
             ,
             the
             with
             all
             expedition
             you
             must
             stop
             the
             entrance
             into
             the
             chamber
             ,
             with
             thick
             and
             strong
             planckes
             ,
             and
             stopp
             it
             hard
             ,
             and
             ramme
             it
             in
             with
             good
             Earth
             ,
             and
             leaue
             a
             little
             hole
             or
             traine
             ,
             to
             lay
             some
             powder
             in
             it
             ,
             which
             traine
             is
             carried
             to
             the
             very
             end
             of
             the
             mine
             ,
             and
             stops
             up
             the
             passage
             of
             it
             with
             firkins
             of
             Earth
             ,
             that
             the
             aire
             may
             neither
             come
             in
             or
             out
             .
             For
             the
             stronger
             the
             Mine
             is
             stopt
             ,
             it
             will
             take
             the
             greater
             effect
             .
             All
             things
             then
             being
             in
             a
             readinesse
             ,
             it
             is
             left
             so
             till
             one
             is
             commaunded
             to
             give
             fire
             to
             it
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             163
             figure
             is
             represented
             unto
             you
             a
             myne
             marked
             ,
             
               A
               B
               C
               D
               E
               ,
            
             is
             the
             way
             upon
             the
             Bulwark
             ,
             
               E
            
             is
             the
             entrance
             into
             the
             chamber
             ,
             
               F
               G
               H
            
             and
             
               I
               ,
            
             is
             the
             chamber
             it self
             ,
             wherein
             the
             powder
             is
             laid
             .
          
           
             Here
             a
             question
             might
             be
             moued
             ,
             whether
             mines
             ought
             to
             be
             carried
             with
             right
             lines
             ,
             or
             crooked
             ?
             The
             answer
             is
             ,
             that
             mines
             ,
             which
             are
             carried
             in
             a
             right
             line
             are
             sooner
             made
             ,
             but
             because
             they
             take
             not
             so
             good
             effect
             ,
             the
             other
             are
             to
             be
             preferred
             before
             them
             ,
             which
             are
             made
             with
             oblique
             lines
             .
             For
             the
             windings
             and
             the
             turnings
             of
             them
             ,
             adds
             strength
             unto
             them
             ,
             that
             the
             powder
             hath
             not
             so
             much
             force
             to
             break
             the
             stopping
             .
             Now
             suppose
             that
             it
             should
             break
             the
             stopping
             
               D
            
             :
             E
             :
             the
             rest
             therefore
             is
             not
             broken
             ,
             because
             the
             force
             of
             the
             powder
             is
             kept
             in
             by
             the
             Earth
             marked
             D
             ,
             and
             driven
             back
             to
             blow
             upwards
             ,
             or
             finding
             no
             vent
             to
             turne
             back
             againe
             ,
             where
             it
             vvas
             laid
             .
             But
             in
             a
             right
             line
             vvhen
             the
             povvder
             breakes
             the
             stopping
             ,
             the
             effect
             thereof
             is
             hindred
             and
             deminished
             ,
             for
             it
             is
             certaine
             ,
             that
             the
             stopping
             ,
             which
             is
             made
             nevvly
             is
             not
             so
             firme
             as
             the
             old
             setled
             Earth
             ,
             vvhich
             hath
             lain
             a
             long
             time
             in
             it
             .
          
        
         
         
           
             OF
             COVNTER-MINES
             THE
             NINTH
             CHAPTER
             .
          
           
             WHere
             there
             is
             an
             
               Offensiue
            
             Warre
             ,
             there
             is
             also
             a
             
               Defensiue
               ,
            
             as
             appeareth
             by
             mines
             :
             for
             the
             Beseiged
             having
             discouvered
             them
             ,
             vvhich
             one
             hath
             prepared
             for
             them
             ,
             and
             that
             there
             is
             no
             hope
             left
             ,
             but
             vvaiting
             for
             the
             Springing
             of
             an
             Enemies
             myne
             in
             their
             Rampard
             ,
             and
             to
             giue
             them
             an
             assault
             ,
             then
             they
             are
             to
             stand
             upon
             their
             defence
             ,
             and
             beginn
             to
             make
             mines
             also
             ,
             vvhich
             they
             eyther
             doe
             to
             offend
             an
             Enemy
             ,
             or
             to
             defend
             themselues
             by
             them
             .
             Therefore
             vvee
             must
             understand
             here
             ,
             three
             kinds
             of
             mines
             to
             vvit
             ,
             the
             vvorkes
             vvhich
             are
             made
             to
             finde
             out
             an
             Enemies
             mine
             ,
             2
             :
             The
             Countermines
             ,
             vvhich
             are
             made
             to
             spoyle
             an
             Enemies
             mine
             ,
             &
             3
             the
             cutting
             off
             of
             a
             Bulvvarke
             or
             a
             
               Rampard
            
             vvithin
             ,
             of
             the
             tvvo
             former
             ,
             vvee
             will
             treate
             in
             this
             Chapter
             .
          
           
             For
             the
             first
             kind
             of
             Countermines
             ,
             vvee
             understand
             those
             vvorkes
             ,
             and
             mines
             ,
             vvhich
             are
             made
             to
             discover
             ,
             and
             find
             out
             an
             Enemies
             
               Mine
               ,
            
             and
             to
             kill
             the
             miners
             in
             it
             .
          
           
             After
             one
             hath
             found
             it
             out
             ,
             as
             also
             for
             the
             casting
             dovvn
             of
             the
             same
             vvork
             ,
             and
             the
             taking
             avvay
             of
             the
             povvder
             chambred
             ,
             the
             Enemy
             vvill
             finde
             himself
             deceived
             ,
             vvhen
             he
             thinks
             to
             spring
             his
             Mine
             ,
             attending
             the
             operation
             thereof
             in
             vaine
             ,
             because
             the
             povvder
             is
             stolne
             out
             of
             it
             .
          
           
             For
             to
             finde
             out
             an
             Enemies
             mine
             ,
             there
             are
             tvvo
             manner
             of
             vvayes
             ,
             the
             one
             vvhich
             vvas
             used
             by
             the
             
               Ancients
               ,
            
             and
             the
             other
             practised
             at
             this
             day
             .
          
           
             
               Vitruvius
            
             in
             the
             said
             Chapter
             of
             his
             tenth
             book
             ,
             describeth
             the
             maner
             of
             the
             
               Ancients
               ,
            
             and
             saith
             that
             the
             Cite
             of
             
               Apolonia
               ,
            
             being
             besieged
             ,
             and
             the
             Besiegers
             having
             made
             some
             Mines
             under
             the
             earth
             to
             assault
             the
             Citizens
             ,
             on
             a
             sudden
             vvithin
             the
             vvalls
             ;
             the
             Citizens
             being
             advertised
             thereof
             ,
             vvere
             extreamly
             affrighted
             thereat
             ,
             and
             began
             to
             faint
             and
             lose
             their
             courage
             :
             because
             they
             knevv
             no
             remedy
             to
             prevent
             it
             ,
             and
             could
             by
             no
             means
             finde
             out
             the
             place
             vvhere
             the
             Mines
             vvere
             made
             .
             But
             
               Trypho
               Alexandrin
               ,
            
             vvhich
             lived
             in
             that
             age
             ,
             the
             
               Architector
            
             of
             this
             City
             ,
             caused
             to
             be
             made
             along
             under
             the
             vvalls
             a
             great
             many
             ditches
             ,
             and
             vvithall
             some
             Mines
             under
             the
             vvalls
             continuing
             them
             beyond
             the
             Enemies
             ,
             as
             farre
             as
             one
             could
             throvv
             a
             stone
             .
             He
             caused
             to
             be
             hanged
             in
             these
             ditches
             vessels
             of
             Copper
             ,
             under
             th●se
             places
             ,
             vvhere
             the
             Enemy
             vvrought
             ,
             vvhich
             made
             a
             noise
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             moving
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             vvhereupon
             he
             found
             out
             the
             Enemies
             Mines
             ,
             and
             filled
             Cauldrons
             of
             brasse
             full
             of
             boyling
             water
             ,
             and
             melted
             pitch
             ,
             to
             povvre
             it
             dovvn
             through
             those
             holes
             upon
             the
             heads
             of
             his
             Enemies
             mines
             .
             He
             cast
             dovvn
             also
             mens
             dung
             ,
             vvhich
             vvas
             mixed
             vvith
             hot
             sand
             and
             gravell
             ,
             vvhich
             he
             did
             by
             night
             into
             the
             Enemies
             Mines
             ,
             into
             vvhich
             he
             had
             made
             divers
             holes
             ,
             and
             by
             this
             meanes
             slevv
             a
             great
             many
             of
             them
             .
          
           
             
               Herodotus
            
             in
             his
             
               Melpomina
            
             makes
             mention
             of
             a
             
               Tinker
               ,
            
             vvhich
             dvvelt
             in
             the
             City
             of
             
               Barca
               ,
            
             besieged
             by
             the
             
               Persians
               ,
            
             vvho
             discovered
             the
             Enemies
             Mines
             by
             the
             meanes
             of
             a
             Buckler
             of
             Brasse
             ,
             vvhich
             he
             hung
             in
             divers
             places
             against
             the
             vvall
             ,
             and
             so
             found
             out
             at
             last
             the
             place
             under
             vvhich
             the
             Enemy
             mined
             .
          
           
             But
             at
             this
             day
             to
             finde
             out
             an
             Enemies
             Mine
             ,
             they
             use
             to
             make
             counter-ditches
             ,
             as
             hath
             been
             said
             ,
             and
             before
             a
             Mine
             is
             begun
             ▪
             it
             is
             necessary
             to
             be
             informed
             ,
             after
             the
             manner
             of
             the
             Ancients
             of
             the
             place
             ,
             vvhich
             may
             be
             undermined
             by
             an
             Enemy
             .
             But
             Mines
             are
             searched
             out
             after
             divers
             other
             vvayes
             .
          
           
             Some
             are
             of
             the
             opinion
             ,
             that
             round
             about
             the
             vvalls
             ,
             and
             Bulvvarks
             of
             a
             Tovvn
             or
             a
             Fortresse
             ,
             (
             to
             vvit
             ,
             vvhen
             the
             fortificatiō
             is
             first
             begun
             )
             one
             should
             make
             hiddē
             caves
             ,
             and
             passages
             under
             the
             earth
             ,
             by
             vvhich
             one
             might
             discover
             ,
             and
             finde
             out
             an
             Enemies
             mine
             .
             But
             this
             me thinks
             is
             not
             good
             ,
             because
             the
             vvalls
             and
             Bulvvarks
             are
             made
             thereby
             slender
             &
             vveake
             ,
             and
             these
             caves
             &
             being
             made
             vvith
             posts
             ,
             and
             planks
             ,
             vaults
             in
             tract
             of
             time
             are
             subject
             to
             rot
             ,
             and
             &
             the
             Mines
             afterward
             falling
             dovvn
             ,
             all
             that
             labour
             is
             lost
             .
             Also
             it
             is
             dangerous
             to
             make
             vauts
             in
             Rampards
             ,
             and
             Bulwarks
             ,
             seeing
             it
             is
             to
             be
             feared
             ,
             that
             such
             a
             work
             is
             not
             durable
             ,
             sith
             it
             must
             bear
             up
             so
             great
             and
             ponderous
             a
             vveight
             ,
             besides
             it
             vvill
             cost
             excessive
             expences
             .
             And
             though
             these
             Counter-mines
             should
             be
             thus
             made
             and
             
             ordained
             :
             yet
             it
             is
             not
             certaine
             ,
             but
             that
             an
             Enemy
             in
             myning
             may
             meet
             iust
             with
             one
             of
             these
             Mines
             ,
             and
             so
             take
             his
             way
             and
             advantage
             ,
             either
             over
             or
             under
             it
             ,
             and
             so
             leatt
             this
             Counter-mine
             alone
             .
          
           
             A
             second
             opinion
             is
             this
             ,
             &
             some
             findes
             it
             good
             ,
             that
             one
             should
             hang
             trees
             ,
             and
             other
             bushes
             in
             them
             ,
             which
             are
             found
             often
             in
             the
             Rampards
             of
             the
             
               Cimbri
               ,
            
             which
             being
             stirred
             with
             the
             least
             motion
             ,
             gives
             a
             sound
             ,
             whereby
             one
             may
             finde
             out
             the
             place
             where
             the
             mine
             is
             .
             But
             this
             is
             a
             thing
             uncertain
             ,
             because
             the
             least
             gale
             of
             wind
             ,
             will
             easily
             shake
             these
             bushes
             ,
             and
             branches
             of
             trees
             .
             And
             if
             they
             do
             so
             this
             must
             be
             done
             in
             a
             still
             and
             a
             calme
             vveather
             ,
             vvhen
             there
             is
             no
             vvinde
             stirring
             .
             And
             therefore
             I
             ansvvere
             ,
             one
             ought
             to
             search
             out
             an
             Enemies
             mine
             at
             all
             times
             ,
             for
             it
             vvere
             an
             absurd
             thing
             ,
             for
             one
             to
             stay
             from
             finding
             an
             Enemies
             mine
             out
             &
             till
             a
             calme
             time
             comes
             ,
             vvho
             vvill
             advance
             (
             as
             much
             as
             possible
             may
             be
             )
             his
             vvork
             ,
             vvithout
             staying
             for
             still
             or
             faire
             vveather
             .
             Therefore
             this
             vvay
             serves
             but
             for
             little
             use
             .
          
           
             A
             third
             and
             a
             better
             vvay
             ,
             and
             which
             is
             the
             ordinary
             way
             ,
             is
             to
             set
             a
             drum
             in
             the
             place
             suspected
             ,
             vvith
             some
             Dice
             ,
             pease
             ,
             or
             beanes
             vpon
             the
             head
             of
             it
             ,
             vvhich
             upon
             any
             stirring
             ,
             will
             leap
             upon
             the
             drum
             ,
             when
             it
             stands
             over
             the
             place
             vvhere
             one
             vvorks
             .
             Neverthelesse
             you
             must
             not
             let
             it
             stand
             in
             one
             place
             onely
             ,
             but
             remove
             it
             novv
             and
             then
             from
             one
             place
             to
             another
             ,
             yea
             so
             often
             ,
             till
             you
             are
             assured
             of
             the
             place
             ,
             vvhich
             is
             shaken
             by
             the
             work
             vvhich
             is
             made
             under
             it
             .
             Some
             make
             use
             of
             a
             Bason
             of
             litany
             filled
             vvith
             water
             ,
             and
             imagines
             ,
             that
             the
             mine
             is
             there
             ,
             vvhere
             the
             water
             moveth
             ,
             but
             that
             is
             uncertaine
             as
             that
             of
             the
             
               Cimbri
            
             is
             ,
             spoken
             of
             before
             ,
             but
             that
             of
             a
             drum
             is
             held
             to
             be
             the
             best
             and
             surest
             way
             .
             Notvvithstanding
             one
             may
             make
             good
             use
             of
             Basons
             ,
             vvhen
             they
             are
             set
             upon
             a
             
               Rampard
               ,
            
             as
             a
             drum
             with
             peas
             or
             other
             things
             .
             For
             by
             such
             a
             meanes
             one
             may
             knovv
             the
             place
             ,
             vvhich
             is
             undermined
             .
             The
             use
             of
             Basons
             vvithout
             all
             question
             ,
             took
             its
             Originall
             from
             the
             Invention
             of
             a
             Kettle
             ,
             vvhereof
             vvee
             haue
             spoken
             even
             novv
             .
          
           
             A
             fourth
             opinion
             besides
             these
             vvhich
             is
             in
             use
             also
             ;
             is
             a
             great
             long
             iron
             Borer
             ,
             to
             bore
             into
             the
             Earth
             ,
             wherevvith
             those
             which
             searched
             the
             Earth
             ,
             bores
             a
             hole
             with
             it
             into
             the
             
               Rampard
               ,
            
             &
             laying
             his
             eare
             to
             the
             hole
             to
             listen
             well
             if
             he
             can
             heare
             any
             noize
             ,
             vvhich
             is
             practised
             in
             suspected
             places
             .
             Many
             other
             Inventions
             are
             invented
             by
             necessity
             the
             mother
             of
             practise
             .
          
           
             To
             resist
             then
             the
             mines
             of
             an
             Enemie
             ,
             one
             makes
             use
             of
             this
             practise
             following
             .
             After
             you
             haue
             curiously
             searched
             out
             the
             Enemies
             mines
             ,
             and
             that
             you
             are
             assured
             of
             the
             place
             under
             vvhich
             they
             are
             hid
             then
             you
             may
             find
             them
             out
             vvithout
             all
             question
             ,
             &
             nothing
             remaynes
             then
             ,
             but
             to
             make
             a
             
               Counter-mine
            
             against
             them
             ,
             vvhich
             is
             made
             in
             the
             same
             manner
             as
             vve
             haue
             discribed
             in
             the
             former
             chapter
             ,
             treating
             of
             mines
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             by
             under-propping
             the
             Earth
             vvith
             posts
             and
             laying
             planks
             betvveene
             them
             ,
             that
             the
             Earth
             may
             not
             tumble
             dovvn
             .
             Now
             because
             one
             is
             not
             assured
             to
             meed
             iust
             vvith
             the
             Enemies
             myne
             vvhich
             may
             be
             made
             either
             too
             high
             ,
             or
             too
             low
             ,
             therefore
             you
             must
             make
             many
             ,
             till
             by
             one
             of
             them
             you
             haue
             found
             it
             out
             ,
             &
             are
             come
             to
             the
             
               Chamber
            
             to
             take
             avvay
             the
             powder
             .
          
           
             When
             an
             Enemies
             myne
             is
             carryed
             so
             secret
             ,
             and
             hidden
             ,
             that
             one
             cannot
             finde
             it
             out
             ,
             then
             the
             besieged
             must
             of
             necessity
             resolue
             to
             quit
             that
             part
             of
             the
             
               Rampard
            
             or
             Bulwarke
             under
             which
             they
             suspect
             there
             is
             a
             mine
             ,
             and
             so
             cut
             it
             of
             invvardly
             .
             But
             for
             their
             advantage
             they
             make
             ready
             also
             their
             
               Countermine
            
             made
             in
             that
             place
             ,
             &
             chambers
             their
             povvder
             attending
             the
             effect
             of
             the
             Enemies
             mine
             ,
             and
             vvhen
             he
             springs
             his
             mine
             ,
             then
             they
             retire
             themselues
             into
             their
             nevv
             vvorke
             cut
             off
             ,
             and
             the
             Enemy
             being
             lodged
             in
             that
             peece
             of
             the
             Bulvvarke
             or
             Rampart
             ,
             vvhich
             they
             haue
             quitted
             ,
             then
             they
             blovv
             up
             their
             
               Countermine
               ,
            
             and
             slay
             all
             those
             ,
             vvhich
             they
             find
             in
             it
             .
          
           
             The
             like
             also
             is
             done
             in
             outvvorkes
             ,
             and
             Counterskarfes
             ,
             vvhen
             one
             is
             driven
             to
             quitt
             them
             ,
             and
             that
             one
             cannot
             keepe
             them
             any
             longer
             .
          
        
         
         
           
             OF
             PALISADOES
             ,
             PALES
             ,
             TVRNE-PIKES
             ▪
             BARRICADOES
             ,
             QVADRANT-TANTERNAILES
             :
             AND
             BEARES
             .
             THE
             TENTH
             CHAPTER
             .
          
           
             WEe
             haue
             often
             made
             mention
             of
             
               Palisadoes
            
             and
             the
             use
             of
             them
             ,
             especially
             vvhen
             they
             are
             struck
             into
             the
             ground
             about
             dry
             moates
             ,
             for
             then
             they
             serue
             ,
             in
             stead
             of
             vvater
             against
             the
             sudden
             assault
             of
             an
             Enemie
             ,
             so
             that
             not
             onely
             the
             moates
             before
             great
             vvalls
             ,
             and
             Rampards
             ,
             ought
             to
             be
             set
             with
             them
             ,
             but
             also
             all
             Outvvorkes
             must
             be
             fortified
             vvith
             them
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             likevvise
             of
             excellent
             use
             in
             the
             Field
             ,
             vvhen
             trenches
             are
             set
             round
             vvith
             them
             ,
             and
             struck
             in
             round
             about
             Forts
             ,
             and
             vvorkes
             ,
             vvhich
             lie
             in
             the
             most
             dangerous
             places
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             of
             no
             lesse
             use
             also
             in
             Fortresses
             ,
             especially
             vvhen
             the
             Beseiged
             are
             constrayned
             to
             make
             cuttings
             off
             vvithin
             a
             tovvne
             ,
             or
             Fort
             :
             moreover
             they
             are
             good
             to
             be
             struck
             in
             upon
             the
             topp
             of
             Breaches
             ,
             vvhereof
             vve
             vvill
             treat
             in
             the
             next
             chapter
             .
          
           
             These
             
               Palisadoes
            
             then
             are
             made
             in
             this
             manner
             follovving
             ,
             one
             makes
             choise
             of
             good
             and
             strong
             
               Sparrs
            
             being
             some
             3
             or
             4
             ynches
             in
             
               Diameter
               ,
            
             but
             of
             severall
             lengths
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             place
             into
             vvhich
             they
             are
             to
             be
             struck
             ,
             vvhereof
             some
             of
             them
             may
             be
             5
             ,
             6
             ,
             or
             7
             foote
             long
             .
             Novv
             the
             lovver
             end
             of
             them
             must
             be
             sharpened
             and
             pointed
             ,
             and
             the
             upper
             end
             flatt
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             be
             driven
             into
             the
             ground
             vvith
             a
             mallet
             or
             a
             beetle
             :
             one
             bores
             also
             a
             hole
             some
             3
             or
             4
             ynches
             under
             the
             head
             of
             the
             
               Palisadoe
               ,
            
             &
             an
             other
             some
             three
             ynches
             under
             the
             first
             hole
             ,
             and
             a
             third
             hole
             on
             the
             side
             through
             the
             middest
             of
             the
             tvvo
             others
             ,
             in
             such
             sort
             ,
             that
             the
             nailes
             ,
             vvhich
             are
             driven
             through
             it
             ,
             resemble
             as
             it
             vvere
             the
             corners
             .
             In
             some
             also
             they
             use
             to
             driue
             in
             tvvo
             nailes
             ,
             so
             that
             they
             are
             not
             struck
             in
             a
             right
             
               Angle
               ,
            
             but
             rises
             a
             little
             tovvards
             the
             head
             of
             the
             
               Palisadoe
               .
            
             The
             length
             of
             these
             nailes
             ,
             must
             be
             some
             eight
             or
             tvvelue
             ynches
             ,
             and
             so
             bigg
             ,
             that
             they
             cannot
             be
             easely
             bowed
             or
             broken
             ,
             and
             the
             
               Head
            
             vvhich
             is
             driven
             into
             the
             
               Palisadoe
            
             is
             some-vvhat
             greater
             ,
             then
             that
             vvhich
             sticks
             out
             ,
             vvhich
             ought
             to
             be
             very
             sharpe
             .
          
           
             When
             you
             are
             to
             use
             these
             
               Sparrs
               ,
            
             vvhereof
             you
             must
             haue
             good
             store
             ,
             you
             take
             first
             of
             the
             shortest
             size
             ,
             being
             but
             fiue
             foot
             long
             ,
             and
             strick
             in
             a
             long
             ranke
             of
             them
             ,
             as
             you
             shall
             finde
             necessarie
             .
             They
             are
             driven
             into
             the
             ground
             the
             depth
             of
             a
             foot
             and
             a
             half
             ,
             or
             sometimes
             more
             ,
             according
             as
             the
             Earth
             is
             conditioned
             ,
             and
             thus
             you
             shall
             make
             your
             first
             ranke
             :
             then
             you
             shall
             driue
             in
             an
             other
             ranke
             of
             
               Palisadoes
               ,
            
             being
             six
             foote
             long
             ,
             vvhich
             are
             set
             behind
             the
             first
             ranke
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             they
             may
             run
             in
             a
             right
             line
             vvith
             the
             first
             ,
             but
             must
             be
             struck
             in
             a
             little
             sidelings
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             ,
             that
             their
             nailes
             may
             fill
             all
             places
             necessarie
             ,
             and
             the
             heads
             of
             these
             
               Palisadoes
               ,
            
             ought
             to
             stand
             about
             halfe
             a
             foote
             higher
             ,
             then
             the
             others
             :
             In
             the
             same
             manner
             you
             driue
             in
             the
             third
             ranke
             ,
             vvhich
             must
             be
             half
             a
             foot
             higher
             then
             the
             second
             ,
             and
             thus
             you
             may
             doe
             ,
             if
             you
             vvill
             driue
             in
             a
             fourth
             ranke
             ,
             yea
             as
             many
             as
             it
             pleases
             you
             .
             These
             
               Palisadoes
            
             are
             represented
             unto
             you
             in
             the
             164
             figure
             .
          
           
             For
             the
             
               Palisadoes
               ,
            
             vvhich
             are
             used
             against
             assaults
             there
             are
             two
             sorts
             of
             them
             .
             The
             first
             is
             that
             sort
             of
             
               Palisadoes
            
             vvhich
             are
             sett
             upon
             the
             
               Parapets
            
             of
             Forts
             ,
             
               Outworks
               ,
            
             and
             
               Redoubts
               ,
            
             for
             to
             hinder
             an
             Enemy
             that
             they
             may
             not
             so
             soone
             assault
             or
             scale
             a
             place
             :
             these
             ought
             to
             be
             3
             or
             4
             ynches
             in
             
               Diameter
               ,
            
             and
             some
             6
             or
             7
             foote
             long
             ,
             vvhereof
             the
             half
             past
             is
             driven
             into
             the
             
               Parepett
               ,
            
             and
             the
             other
             half
             stands
             upright
             .
          
           
             For
             the
             other
             sort
             ,
             those
             great
             headed
             piles
             or
             pales
             ,
             clasped
             together
             vvith
             chaines
             ,
             and
             plates
             of
             yron
             ,
             vvhich
             stād
             alwaies
             upon
             
               Rāpards
            
             and
             Bulvvarkes
             covered
             vvith
             a
             little
             roof
             against
             the
             time
             of
             necessity
             ,
             vvhen
             as
             an
             Enemy
             seekes
             to
             assault
             a
             Fortresse
             .
             For
             by
             this
             meanes
             he
             is
             repulsed
             ,
             vvhen
             he
             vvould
             scale
             a
             Rampard
             ,
             because
             these
             
               Palisadoes
               ,
            
             or
             logs
             
             being
             cast
             dovvne
             a
             vvall
             ,
             annoyes
             greatly
             the
             Beseigers
             ,
             in
             regard
             of
             their
             vveight
             ,
             vvhich
             they
             are
             not
             able
             to
             resist
             ,
             though
             they
             be
             armed
             with
             head
             peeces
             .
          
        
         
           
             OF
             PALISADOES
             ,
             PALES
             ,
             VRIZ-RVYTERS
             ,
             CAVALLIERS
             DE
             FRIZE
             ,
             Called
             in
             English
             Turne-piks
             .
             THE
             TENTH
             CHAPTER
             .
          
           
             WEe
             haue
             observed
             in
             our
             declaration
             of
             Originall
             names
             vvhence
             ,
             the
             
               Cavalleries
               De
               Frize
            
             tooke
             their
             name
             :
             to
             witt
             ,
             at
             the
             siege
             of
             
               Groeninghen
               in
               Frizeland
               ,
            
             vvhere
             they
             served
             for
             great
             use
             ,
             by
             stopping
             and
             hindring
             the
             Enemies
             horse
             ,
             when
             they
             came
             to
             relieue
             the
             Tovvn
             ,
             and
             then
             got
             this
             name
             of
             
               Vrize
               ruyters
            
             in
             Dutch
             ,
             
               Cavalliers
               de
               Frize
            
             in
             French
             ,
             and
             
               Frize
               Horses
               or
               Turne-pikes
            
             in
             English
             ,
             and
             besides
             the
             stopping
             of
             a
             suddaine
             charge
             of
             Horse
             ,
             they
             are
             of
             excellent
             use
             ,
             to
             be
             clapt
             on
             the
             topp
             of
             a
             breach
             ,
             or
             some
             vveake
             place
             of
             a
             Trench
             ,
             or
             a
             vvall
             ,
             and
             good
             store
             of
             them
             ought
             to
             be
             carryed
             along
             vvith
             an
             Army
             on
             vvaggons
             ,
             to
             be
             sett
             up
             in
             some
             
               Avenus
               ,
            
             or
             passages
             ,
             to
             stop
             and
             hinder
             the
             sudden
             attempt
             of
             an
             Enemy
             ,
             vvhen
             one
             hath
             no
             time
             to
             cast
             up
             a
             trench
             .
          
           
             In
             Fortresses
             they
             are
             also
             of
             greater
             use
             then
             chaines
             or
             Barres
             ,
             vvhich
             crosseth
             the
             streets
             ,
             For
             a
             man
             may
             skip
             over
             a
             chaine
             ,
             and
             a
             good
             Horse
             will
             leap
             over
             it
             :
             But
             being
             beset
             and
             crossed
             vvith
             
               Turne-pikes
               ,
            
             neither
             Foot
             nor
             Horse
             are
             able
             to
             passe
             over
             them
             ,
             seeing
             they
             have
             staves
             and
             sharp
             points
             through
             them
             on
             all
             sides
             .
             They
             may
             be
             set
             up
             also
             in
             the
             streets
             of
             
               Suburbs
            
             and
             other
             places
             instead
             of
             Barres
             ,
             and
             vvhere
             some
             broad
             places
             are
             to
             be
             kept
             ,
             in
             joyning
             many
             of
             them
             together
             ,
             vvhich
             is
             done
             ordinarily
             in
             the
             expeditions
             of
             Warres
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             made
             in
             this
             manner
             following
             ,
             you
             take
             a
             tree
             of
             firme
             wood
             ,
             vvhich
             will
             not
             cleave
             ,
             vvhere
             of
             the
             
               Diameter
            
             is
             five
             or
             sixe
             inches
             ,
             and
             some
             10
             ,
             or
             14
             foot
             long
             ,
             vvhich
             is
             made
             vvith
             six
             corners
             ,
             so
             that
             it
             hath
             six
             sides
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             these
             sides
             ,
             one
             bores
             three
             or
             foure
             inches
             one
             from
             another
             cros-wise
             ,
             and
             thē
             puts
             through
             these
             holes
             round
             javelings
             ,
             vvhereof
             the
             
               Diameter
            
             is
             an
             inch
             and
             a
             half
             ,
             or
             at
             the
             most
             two
             inches
             ,
             the
             lengt
             of
             them
             is
             sixe
             or
             size
             foot
             ,
             and
             so
             made
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             all
             of
             one
             length
             ,
             which
             are
             made
             of
             a
             strong
             and
             a
             firme
             piece
             of
             timber
             ,
             which
             will
             not
             easily
             bend
             ,
             nor
             will
             be
             weakned
             by
             raine
             ,
             these
             are
             thrust
             through
             these
             holes
             ,
             so
             that
             they
             are
             of
             a
             just
             length
             on
             both
             sides
             ,
             and
             have
             as
             many
             javelings
             on
             the
             one
             side
             ,
             as
             on
             the
             other
             :
             so
             that
             the
             
               Turnepike
            
             is
             alike
             over
             all
             ,
             and
             falleth
             alvvaies
             after
             one
             fashion
             ,
             as
             it
             lies
             ,
             and
             as
             one
             vvould
             have
             it
             .
             Both
             the
             ends
             of
             these
             javelings
             are
             headed
             ,
             and
             sharp
             pointed
             vvith
             yron
             ,
             and
             the
             ends
             of
             the
             tree
             are
             plated
             about
             vvith
             rings
             of
             iron
             ,
             that
             the
             tree
             of
             the
             
               Turnepike
            
             may
             not
             cleave
             and
             in
             the
             middest
             of
             both
             ends
             there
             are
             rings
             and
             clasps
             made
             to
             tye
             tvvo
             or
             three
             of
             these
             
               Turne-pikes
            
             together
             with
             chaines
             ,
             if
             occasion
             should
             serve
             ,
             all
             vvhich
             is
             represented
             in
             the
             165
             figure
             .
          
           
             Where
             there
             are
             some
             
               Banks
            
             near
             unto
             a
             Fortresse
             or
             water
             ,
             vvhere
             Shipping
             may
             passe
             to
             and
             again
             ,
             or
             vvhere
             a
             water
             may
             be
             vvaded
             through
             ,
             there
             are
             made
             pales
             or
             
               Barricadoes
               ,
            
             represented
             in
             the
             166
             figure
             ,
             which
             are
             made
             vvith
             Sparres
             of
             strong
             vvood
             ,
             squared
             out
             ,
             being
             some
             4
             or
             5
             inches
             big
             and
             some
             nine
             or
             ten
             foot
             long
             ,
             vvhich
             are
             set
             between
             2
             great
             posts
             ,
             about
             5
             or
             6
             inches
             one
             from
             another
             ,
             as
             ye
             may
             see
             in
             thee
             166
             figure
             .
          
           
             The
             fouresquare
             
               Tanternailes
            
             is
             a
             very
             necessary
             thing
             for
             defence
             ,
             having
             alvvaies
             one
             of
             the
             points
             standing
             upvvard
             .
             For
             they
             have
             foure
             points
             as
             sharp
             as
             a
             naile
             ,
             whereof
             three
             stands
             upon
             the
             ground
             ,
             and
             the
             fourth
             hovvsoever
             it
             lies
             ,
             standing
             bolt
             upright
             .
             They
             are
             of
             divers
             greatnesse
             ,
             for
             those
             vvhich
             are
             commonly
             used
             in
             this
             Country
             ,
             are
             lesser
             then
             
             those
             which
             are
             cast
             into
             a
             Moate
             .
             The
             point
             whereof
             3
             or
             4
             ,
             or
             5
             inches
             long
             .
             A
             Fortresse
             ought
             to
             have
             good
             store
             of
             them
             for
             to
             cast
             them
             into
             a
             moate
             ,
             into
             a
             Falsebray
             ,
             or
             upon
             a
             Breach
             ,
             because
             they
             prick
             and
             hurt
             shrodly
             the
             Souldiers
             feet
             which
             strives
             to
             enter
             .
             They
             are
             represented
             to
             you
             in
             the
             167
             figure
             .
          
           
             Your
             
               Dodanes
            
             or
             
               Beares
            
             made
             of
             stone
             or
             brick
             are
             set
             upon
             a
             banke
             by
             a
             river
             side
             ,
             to
             keep
             the
             water
             from
             overflowing
             ,
             (
             or
             running
             out
             of
             a
             moat
             .
             The
             Dutches
             cals
             it
             a
             
               Beare
               ,
            
             because
             it
             represents
             the
             shape
             of
             a
             
               Beare
               ,
            
             but
             the
             French
             terme
             it
             
               des
               d'Asnes
               ,
            
             and
             of
             one
             word
             corrupted
             
               Dodanes
               ,
            
             that
             is
             ,
             an
             
               Asses
               backe
            
             ▪
             because
             it
             hath
             some
             resemblance
             of
             an
             Asses
             back
             ,
             upon
             which
             disobedient
             Souldiers
             ,
             who
             committed
             some
             notable
             offence
             must
             ride
             upon
             some
             houres
             one
             after
             another
             ,
             which
             we
             call
             in
             English
             a
             
               Woodden
               horse
               ,
            
             and
             hath
             the
             fashion
             of
             an
             Asses-backe
             .
          
           
             Master
             
               Symon
               Stephens
               ,
            
             Prince
             
               Maurice
            
             his
             old
             Mathematician
             ,
             in
             his
             new
             Booke
             of
             Fortification
             ,
             and
             Sluces
             ,
             makes
             mention
             of
             some
             great
             faults
             committed
             in
             the
             making
             of
             these
             
               Beares
               ,
            
             because
             the
             foundation
             ,
             which
             should
             sustaine
             and
             beare
             up
             this
             
               ponde●ous
            
             Work
             ,
             ought
             to
             be
             exceeding
             strong
             ,
             and
             foundly
             laid
             ,
             for
             otherwise
             the
             expence
             ,
             and
             the
             labour
             which
             it
             costs
             wil
             be
             cast
             away
             in
             vaine
             .
             For
             the
             preventing
             whereof
             ,
             he
             gives
             good
             councill
             to
             sinke
             into
             the
             bottome
             of
             the
             moate
             ,
             piles
             or
             
               Mast
               trees
            
             bound
             fast
             together
             and
             of
             one
             and
             the
             same
             bignes
             and
             length
             ,
             which
             wil
             make
             a
             strong
             and
             a
             firm
             foundatiō
             ,
             wherupon
             afterward
             you
             may
             build
             your
             
               Beare
               .
            
          
           
             It
             must
             be
             made
             a
             good
             deale
             higher
             ,
             then
             the
             water
             ,
             when
             the
             tides
             ,
             or
             the
             rivers
             are
             swolne
             up
             to
             the
             very
             bankes
             ,
             and
             it
             must
             be
             made
             so
             thick
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             be
             able
             to
             resist
             the
             force
             and
             violence
             of
             the
             water
             ,
             and
             the
             stones
             and
             bricks
             so
             laid
             and
             plaistred
             together
             ,
             that
             the
             water
             cannot
             eate
             or
             soake
             through
             it·
             And
             because
             these
             
               Beares
            
             in
             moates
             might
             serve
             as
             a
             way
             to
             straddle
             over
             and
             get
             into
             the
             Towne
             or
             Fortresse
             by
             ,
             at
             both
             ends
             there
             is
             two
             palissadoes
             set
             the
             one
             upon
             the
             banke
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             one
             either
             side
             next
             the
             Moate
             ,
             as
             you
             may
             see
             in
             the
             166.
             figure
             before
             which
             also
             is
             struck
             into
             the
             ground
             ,
             many
             other
             small
             palissadoes
             of
             4
             or
             5
             foot
             length
             before
             mentioned
             .
             But
             the
             top
             of
             the
             Beare
             is
             made
             with
             a
             sharpe
             Edge
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             it
             a
             little
             round
             
               turrit
            
             to
             hinder
             ,
             and
             keepe
             backe
             those
             that
             would
             clime
             over
             it
             :
             Sometimes
             there
             are
             made
             two
             round
             turrets
             when
             it
             is
             made
             over
             a
             broad
             water
             or
             moate
             ,
             the
             figure
             168.
             will
             shew
             you
             the
             
               pouretrature
            
             of
             such
             a
             Beare
             .
          
        
         
         
           
             OF
             RETRENCHINGS
             ,
             OR
             INWARD
             CUTTINGS
             OFF
             ,
             AND
             HOW
             ONE
             MUST
             RESIST
             AN
             ASSAVLT
             .
             THE
             ELEVENTH
             CHAPTER
             .
             Interiour
             .
          
           
             THE
             Art
             of
             Fortification
             is
             not
             onely
             of
             perfect
             Fortresses
             ,
             provided
             with
             all
             kinde
             of
             Outward-workes
             ,
             but
             also
             hath
             besides
             an
             other
             use
             ,
             seing
             that
             it
             teacheth
             also
             how
             one
             ough
             to
             prepare
             and
             furnish
             a
             Towne
             or
             Fortresse
             with
             new
             workes
             ,
             When
             the
             others
             are
             ruinated
             .
             This
             part
             of
             Fortification
             is
             called
             in
             French
             
               un
               Retrenchement
               Interieur
               ,
            
             in
             Latine
             
               Recessus
               ,
            
             and
             in
             English
             
               an
               Inward
               Cutting
               off
               :
            
             because
             such
             workes
             are
             made
             to
             no
             other
             end
             ,
             but
             to
             make
             a
             Retreate
             into
             ,
             when
             the
             others
             are
             lost
             .
             For
             ,
             when
             one
             cannot
             maintain
             ,
             and
             defend
             a
             whole
             worke
             ,
             or
             a
             part
             thereof
             ,
             because
             an
             enemie
             striveth
             with
             all
             his
             power
             to
             become
             master
             of
             it
             one
             must
             then
             resolve
             ,
             when
             he
             is
             driven
             out
             of
             one
             work
             ,
             how
             he
             may
             retire
             into
             another
             ,
             and
             defend
             himselfe
             againe
             ,
             against
             the
             assault
             of
             an
             Enemy
             ,
             because
             it
             would
             be
             very
             hurtfull
             to
             defend
             one selfe
             ,
             when
             he
             lies
             open
             to
             an
             Enemy
             .
          
           
             This
             
               Inward
               Cuttings
               off
            
             is
             of
             two
             sorts
             ,
             the
             one
             in
             
               Outworkes
               ,
            
             the
             other
             in
             a
             
               Fortresse
            
             it selfe
             .
          
           
             Besides
             ,
             it
             is
             in
             
               Generall
            
             or
             
               particular
               .
            
          
           
             Wee
             wil
             first
             handle
             the
             Cuttings
             off
             ,
             which
             are
             made
             in
             outward
             works
             ,
             which
             are
             the
             first
             ,
             which
             an
             Enemy
             seekes
             to
             take
             in
             ,
             and
             afterwards
             the
             Cuttings
             off
             ,
             which
             must
             bee
             made
             in
             a
             Towne
             or
             Fortresse
             it selfe
             .
          
           
             Touching
             a
             generall
             cutting
             off
             ,
             it
             is
             only
             used
             in
             Crown-works
             ,
             Horn-works
             ,
             or
             Tenailles
             .
          
           
             The
             same
             is
             also
             of
             two
             sorts
             ▪
             Regular
             ,
             and
             Irregular
             .
          
           
             A
             Generall
             cutting
             off
             is
             ,
             when
             a
             worke
             is
             made
             in
             all
             things
             like
             unto
             that
             ,
             which
             is
             Cut
             off
             ,
             in
             such
             sort
             ,
             that
             a
             Crown-worke
             is
             made
             within
             a
             Crown-work
             ,
             a
             Horn-work
             within
             a
             Horn-worke
             ,
             and
             a
             Tanaille
             within
             a
             Tanaille
             .
          
           
             Irregular
             cuttings
             off
             of
             outward
             works
             ,
             is
             that
             which
             is
             that
             which
             keeps
             not
             the
             form
             of
             the
             worke
             ,
             which
             is
             cutt
             off
             within
             ,
             yet
             Neuerthelesse
             shutteth
             up
             the
             worke
             with
             a
             continued
             Parapet
             .
          
           
             A
             perticular
             cutting
             off
             is
             ,
             when
             a
             worke
             is
             made
             out
             of
             broken
             workes
             ,
             or
             severed
             one
             from
             an
             other
             ,
             in
             such
             wise
             that
             there
             is
             made
             one
             ,
             two
             ,
             or
             three
             Reuelings
             ,
             in
             stead
             of
             a
             Horn-worke
             ,
             or
             two
             Demy
             Bulwarkes
             .
          
           
             You
             must
             observe
             well
             ,
             touching
             every
             kind
             of
             cutting
             off
             here
             set
             downe
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             have
             a
             good
             defence
             ,
             and
             if
             it
             be
             possible
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             also
             be
             defended
             from
             some
             other
             places
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             lie
             open
             to
             that
             side
             which
             lookes
             into
             the
             Towne
             or
             Fortresse
             besieged
             .
          
           
             A
             Generall
             cutting
             off
             in
             Crown-works
             is
             done
             as
             followeth
             ,
             one
             fals
             backward
             some
             20
             or
             24
             foote
             ,
             yea
             more
             or
             lesse
             ,
             according
             as
             the
             condition
             of
             the
             place
             is
             ,
             and
             as
             necessity
             requires
             ,
             and
             one
             maks
             the
             work
             within
             it
             ,
             like
             unto
             the
             other
             which
             is
             cut
             off
             .
             And
             though
             his
             work
             being
             cut
             off
             ,
             is
             lesser
             then
             the
             other
             ,
             yet
             it
             will
             give
             an
             Enemy
             enough
             to
             doe
             when
             he
             shall
             attempt
             the
             taking
             of
             it
             in
             .
             Your
             Crown-workes
             are
             made
             commonly
             after
             the
             proportion
             of
             a
             small
             Fort
             Royall
             ,
             where
             the
             proportion
             of
             the
             Polygones
             are
             of
             5550
             or
             45
             rodd
             ,
             When
             you
             resolve
             to
             cut
             off
             a
             worke
             a
             little
             more
             inward
             ,
             it
             will
             become
             narrower
             in
             a
             regard
             of
             the
             great
             work
             ,
             yet
             will
             be
             great
             enough
             to
             defend
             it selfe
          
           
             The
             Generall
             Cuttings
             of
             Crown-works
             ,
             will
             cost
             no
             great
             labour
             ,
             which
             may
             easily
             be
             showne
             ,
             in
             regarde
             it
             is
             very
             common
             .
             An
             example
             thereof
             you
             may
             see
             in
             the
             169
             figure
             :
             
             
             
             
             The
             cutting
             off
             being
             made
             ,
             one
             is
             forced
             to
             make
             a
             ditch
             ,
             between
             the
             worke
             quitted
             and
             the
             cutting
             off
             ,
             which
             ought
             neverthelesse
             to
             be
             done
             ,
             because
             one
             takes
             the
             Earth
             out
             of
             the
             ditch
             ,
             to
             make
             up
             the
             cutting
             off
             withall
             :
             one
             must
             observe
             also
             that
             this
             cutting
             off
             must
             be
             made
             ,
             as
             strong
             as
             possible
             may
             be
             .
             The
             cuttings
             off
             are
             maide
             only
             ,
             while
             an
             Enemy
             is
             approaching
             towards
             you
             ,
             but
             also
             when
             Towns
             and
             Forts
             are
             first
             fortified
             .
          
           
             Your
             General
             cuttings
             off
             in
             Tenailles
             doth
             not
             differ
             from
             that
             which
             is
             made
             in
             Horn-works
             ,
             saveing
             that
             one
             make
             a
             Tenaile
             ,
             in
             stead
             of
             a
             Horn-worke
             .
          
           
             The
             particular
             cuttings
             off
             of
             Horn-works
             is
             after
             so
             many
             wayes
             ,
             that
             one
             cannot
             shew
             here
             all
             the
             kinds
             of
             them
             .
             A
             Cutting
             off
             is
             represented
             unto
             you
             in
             the
             171
             figure
             ,
             where
             a
             Horn-worke
             is
             cut
             off
             ,
             and
             two
             Revelings
             made
             in
             the
             sides
             of
             it
             ,
             which
             are
             defended
             by
             a
             third
             ,
             which
             are
             behinde
             the
             others
             :
             &
             though
             they
             have
             a
             sufficient
             defence
             of
             themselves
             ,
             yet
             the
             defence
             of
             the
             other
             Reveling
             is
             added
             to
             them
             over
             &
             above
             ,
             and
             is
             defended
             from
             the
             Tenaille
             ,
             which
             is
             after
             it
             .
          
           
             Besides
             this
             ,
             there
             is
             another
             kinde
             of
             cutting
             of
             a
             Horn-worke
             showne
             in
             the
             172
             figure
             .
             In
             imitating
             these
             cuttings
             off
             one
             may
             make
             many
             others
             ,
             as
             necessity
             may
             permit
             ,
             and
             as
             an
             Enemy
             attempts
             upon
             you
             ,
             all
             which
             is
             impossible
             to
             marke
             out
             here
             .
          
           
             A
             Generall
             cutting
             off
             a
             great
             wall
             or
             Rampard
             is
             used
             very
             seldome
             ,
             because
             the
             Besiegers
             and
             the
             Besieged
             will
             at
             last
             grow
             weary
             thereof
             ,
             Neverthelesse
             ,
             this
             hapned
             in
             the
             seige
             of
             Ostend
             ,
             which
             lasted
             three
             yeares
             ,
             three
             months
             and
             odd
             dayes
             :
             for
             assoone
             as
             the
             Enemy
             had
             got
             into
             the
             wall
             by
             sapping
             and
             springing
             of
             mines
             ,
             they
             presenly
             had
             an
             other
             Cutting
             off
             ready
             to
             entertaine
             them
             :
             in
             so
             much
             that
             dureing
             this
             seige
             ,
             there
             were
             many
             Counter-approches
             against
             approches
             ,
             Counter
             mines
             against
             the
             Enemies
             mines
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             Enemy
             could
             not
             get
             for
             a
             long
             time
             sarcely
             an
             inch
             of
             ground
             upon
             our
             men
             ,
             for
             there
             were
             above
             forty
             mines
             sprung
             on
             both
             sides
             &
             when
             the
             Earth
             fel
             out
             ,
             men
             fought
             for
             that
             and
             turned
             up
             the
             Earth
             against
             them
             ,
             for
             these
             Generall
             and
             Royall
             cuttings
             off
             ,
             lasted
             ,
             till
             the
             Enemie
             had
             got
             more
             then
             halfe
             the
             Towne
             ,
             before
             they
             gate
             over
             the
             whole
             .
             And
             though
             such
             a
             seige
             ,
             and
             such
             a
             great
             cuttings
             off
             ,
             happens
             but
             seldome
             ,
             yet
             you
             shall
             see
             an
             example
             thereof
             in
             the
             figure
             173
             ,
             where
             is
             showne
             how
             one
             ought
             to
             quit
             a
             whole
             part
             of
             a
             Towne
             ,
             or
             Fortresse
             ,
             vvith
             the
             Curtaine
             and
             Bulvvarks
             ,
             and
             hovv
             one
             by
             a
             cutting
             of
             a
             Bullvvarke
             ,
             or
             a
             Curtaine
             is
             more
             usual
             ,
             vvhereof
             vve
             savv
             an
             example
             at
             the
             seige
             of
             the
             Bosch
             in
             the
             Vucher
             Bulvvarks
             as
             also
             the
             last
             year
             at
             the
             seige
             of
             Breda
             vvhere
             both
             the
             Ginnekeis
             and
             Haghish
             Hornvvorks
             ,
             vvith
             both
             these
             Bulvvarks
             ,
             vvere
             most
             dangerously
             cut
             off
             Novv
             to
             represent
             unto
             you
             some
             cuttings
             off
             ,
             vvhich
             you
             may
             see
             in
             the
             173
             figure
             marked
             vvith
             A
             ,
             B
             ,
             and
             C.
             The
             letter
             C
             shovvs
             you
             hovv
             one
             ought
             to
             quit
             a
             vvhole
             Bulvvark
             ,
             and
             hovv
             you
             ought
             to
             make
             your
             Capital
             line
             after
             a
             Bulvvark
             is
             cut
             off
             .
          
           
             Likevvise
             other
             kinds
             of
             cuttings
             off
             of
             Bulvvarks
             ,
             are
             represented
             unto
             you
             in
             the
             figure
             174
             ,
             175
             ,
             176
             ,
             177
             ,
             and
             178
             ,
             after
             vvhich
             manner
             ,
             you
             may
             make
             many
             others
             and
             change
             ,
             and
             order
             them
             ,
             as
             an
             Enemie
             comes
             neere
             you
             ,
             and
             as
             the
             commodiousnesse
             of
             the
             place
             shall
             require
             .
          
           
             It
             happens
             also
             sometimes
             that
             Curtaines
             are
             cut
             of
             invvardly
             ,
             vven
             as
             an
             Enemy
             may
             assault
             them
             vvith
             advantage
             ,
             becaus
             of
             their
             length
             .
             You
             may
             then
             cut
             them
             of
             as
             is
             shovvn
             in
             172
             figure
             ,
             vvhen
             you
             have
             time
             enough
             to
             cut
             them
             of
             Royally
             .
             But
             if
             time
             vvil
             not
             permitt
             you
             to
             make
             a
             royall
             fortification
             ,
             then
             you
             must
             make
             use
             of
             Traverses
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             impossible
             to
             cut
             of
             a
             False-bray
             ,
             because
             of
             the
             little
             space
             ,
             vvhich
             is
             in
             it
             .
             Notvvthstanding
             one
             may
             cast
             up
             some
             Traverses
             in
             it
             ,
             especially
             on
             that
             side
             ,
             vvhich
             the
             Enemy
             seeks
             to
             take
             in
             ,
             and
             tovvards
             vvhich
             part
             he
             vvould
             advance
             his
             gallery
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             you
             may
             not
             give
             too
             much
             to
             an
             Enemy
             ,
             but
             keep
             and
             maintaine
             the
             place
             as
             much
             as
             possible
             may
             be
             .
             For
             the
             Besieged
             may
             lay
             hold
             on
             the
             same
             advantage
             ,
             as
             their
             Enemy
             doth
             ,
             vvhen
             he
             is
             once
             got
             into
             the
             False-bray
             ,
             and
             though
             vvhen
             he
             is
             in
             that
             they
             may
             cover
             the
             roof
             of
             it
             vvith
             planks
             one
             may
             neverthelesse
             set
             fire
             on
             it
             ,
             and
             disaccommodate
             the
             Enemy
             on
             all
             sides
             .
          
           
             As
             for
             other
             vvorks
             as
             Revelings
             and
             Halfmoons
             ,
             you
             may
             see
             hovv
             they
             are
             cut
             of
             after
             the
             same
             manner
             ,
             as
             the
             Bullvvarks
             are
             ,
             if
             the
             vvorke
             vvhich
             is
             to
             be
             cut
             of
             be
             great
             enough
             and
             have
             place
             enough
             in
             it
             to
             be
             cut
             off
             .
          
           
           
             But
             forasmuch
             as
             all
             this
             here
             showne
             ,
             concerneth
             principally
             the
             defence
             ,
             which
             ought
             to
             bee
             considered
             in
             ordinary
             Fortresses
             ,
             so
             one
             must
             have
             a
             speciall
             care
             to
             the
             materials
             whereof
             these
             workes
             are
             made
             :
             for
             in
             making
             of
             them
             ,
             you
             must
             choose
             the
             best
             Earth
             that
             is
             to
             be
             got
             ,
             which
             will
             make
             your
             workes
             the
             stronger
             .
          
           
             In
             outworkes
             you
             may
             alwayes
             take
             in
             the
             earth
             ,
             which
             is
             digged
             out
             of
             the
             moate·
             But
             because
             that
             sandy
             earth
             ,
             or
             earth
             mingled
             with
             sand
             ,
             is
             not
             so
             good
             ,
             it
             is
             lyned
             with
             rise
             ,
             or
             Brush
             ,
             which
             is
             layd
             betwixt
             and
             upon
             it
             .
          
           
             In
             great
             Bulwarks
             ,
             where
             there
             is
             not
             Earth
             enough
             ,
             and
             besides
             that
             is
             sandy
             ,
             it
             must
             bee
             laid
             with
             rowes
             of
             Brush
             ,
             driving
             them
             in
             with
             stakes
             ,
             and
             sparrs
             of
             houses
             shot
             down
             with
             Canon
             .
             But
             when
             the
             ground
             is
             so
             sandy
             ,
             that
             you
             cannot
             work
             it
             alone
             ,
             then
             you
             must
             lay
             dung
             ,
             and
             straw
             ,
             and
             other
             things
             betwixt
             it
             to
             make
             it
             hold
             together
             ,
             and
             you
             must
             wet
             the
             Earth
             as
             many
             times
             as
             is
             needful
             .
             You
             may
             fortifie
             your
             Parapets
             with
             Gabions
             ,
             when
             you
             cannot
             make
             them
             otherwise
             ,
             and
             likewise
             you
             may
             set
             great
             musket
             baskets
             upon
             the
             top
             of
             the
             Parapet
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             be
             covered
             the
             better
             .
          
           
             In
             Outworks
             one
             may
             make
             use
             of
             the
             ordinary
             Profile
             ,
             when
             you
             have
             time
             enough
             to
             make
             cuttings
             off
             ,
             or
             you
             may
             make
             them
             long
             before
             hand
             .
             But
             the
             works
             which
             are
             made
             in
             great
             hast
             ,
             have
             no
             certaine
             rule
             :
             howsoever
             ,
             you
             must
             make
             them
             as
             strong
             as
             possible
             may
             be
             ,
             and
             as
             meanes
             ,
             and
             time
             will
             give
             you
             leave
             .
          
           
             Touching
             the
             cuttings
             off
             of
             Bulwarks
             and
             Curtains
             ,
             one
             can
             give
             likewise
             no
             certain
             rule
             ,
             only
             this
             you
             must
             ever
             have
             a
             care
             ,
             that
             all
             inward
             works
             and
             cuttings
             off
             ,
             lie
             open
             toward
             the
             Town
             or
             Fortres
             with
             this
             proviso
             also
             ,
             that
             they
             be
             not
             made
             so
             high
             ,
             but
             that
             the
             great
             works
             may
             over-look
             and
             command
             them
             :
             For
             if
             the
             Rampard
             of
             the
             cutting
             off
             be
             lower
             ,
             then
             the
             high
             Rampard
             of
             the
             Town
             ,
             then
             the
             Enemies
             Canon
             can
             do
             it
             no
             great
             harm
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             defended
             from
             the
             great
             Rampard
             .
             Againe
             ,
             the
             Enemy
             cannot
             discover
             the
             place
             and
             the
             forme
             of
             the
             cutting
             off
             ,
             according
             to
             which
             one
             may
             governe
             themselves
             otherwise
             .
             It
             is
             certain
             also
             ,
             that
             one
             cannot
             beate
             an
             Enemy
             from
             a
             high
             place
             ,
             which
             is
             neer
             at
             hand
             because
             he
             is
             blinded
             and
             covered
             with
             the
             Wall
             or
             Rampard
             .
          
           
             All
             these
             things
             being
             finished
             ,
             when
             one
             is
             assured
             ,
             that
             an
             Enemy
             is
             ready
             to
             spring
             his
             Mine
             ,
             which
             cannot
             be
             found
             out
             ,
             one
             must
             then
             strengthen
             ,
             &
             double
             the
             guards
             in
             every
             place
             ,
             &
             bring
             your
             canon
             to
             those
             places
             ,
             where
             they
             may
             most
             gaul
             and
             flanck
             the
             enemy
             .
             One
             ought
             to
             have
             an
             eye
             ,
             aswell
             on
             other
             places
             ,
             as
             only
             upon
             the
             Breach
             ,
             which
             is
             made
             by
             the
             springing
             of
             the
             mine
             .
             For
             an
             Enemy
             hopeing
             that
             he
             may
             have
             drawn
             ,
             the
             most
             of
             the
             forces
             in
             a
             Town
             or
             Fortresse
             to
             defend
             the
             Breach
             ,
             may
             attempt
             some
             other
             place
             of
             the
             Fortresse
             ,
             which
             is
             not
             thought
             upon
             &
             so
             become
             master
             of
             such
             a
             place
             ,
             which
             is
             not
             provided
             with
             a
             sufficient
             defence
             .
          
           
             After
             that
             the
             Breach
             is
             made
             ,
             the
             Besieged
             must
             expect
             to
             be
             presently
             assaulted
             ,
             which
             they
             must
             maintaine
             and
             make
             good
             as
             long
             as
             possibly
             they
             can
             ,
             by
             defending
             the
             breach
             couragiously
             ,
             in
             doing
             whereof
             ,
             they
             must
             throw
             downe
             from
             the
             top
             of
             it
             ,
             abundance
             of
             these
             Sqare
             tanter-nailes
             spoken
             of
             in
             the
             chapter
             before
             ,
             for
             to
             annoy
             and
             prick
             the
             Enemy
             ,
             when
             he
             seeks
             to
             mount
             up
             and
             to
             enter
             it
             .
          
           
             Vpon
             the
             top
             of
             the
             Breach
             also
             ,
             if
             they
             have
             time
             they
             may
             cast
             up
             a
             brest-worke
             ,
             as
             Sir
             
               Francis
               Vere
            
             did
             in
             Ostend
             ,
             or
             set
             up
             some
             turn-pikes
             ,
             to
             hinder
             the
             Enemy
             for
             entring
             ,
             and
             to
             strike
             in
             some
             Palissadoes
             upon
             the
             top
             of
             it
             ,
             having
             Clubs
             ,
             Flails
             ,
             Stones
             :
             and
             Ashes
             ,
             to
             offend
             them
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             necessary
             ,
             when
             the
             Enemy
             strives
             to
             enter
             it
             ,
             that
             the
             souldiers
             fight
             couragiously
             ,
             &
             that
             the
             officers
             should
             encourage
             them
             with
             their
             presence
             to
             carry
             themselvs
             like
             brave
             men
             ,
             that
             being
             a
             place
             to
             gaine
             honour
             in
             ,
             by
             giveing
             them
             also
             premisses
             of
             reward
             ,
             and
             when
             they
             grow
             weary
             ,
             to
             see
             that
             they
             be
             seconded
             with
             fresh
             men
             ,
             which
             stand
             in
             readinesse
             behinde
             the
             Rampard
             ,
             to
             relieve
             them
             .
          
           
             When
             they
             are
             not
             able
             to
             maintaine
             and
             defend
             the
             breach
             any
             longer
             ,
             then
             they
             must
             retire
             into
             the
             cutting
             off
             ,
             and
             take
             a
             new
             courage
             ,
             and
             a
             heart
             of
             grace
             ,
             in
             fighting
             behinde
             a
             new
             Rampard
             in
             makeing
             resistance
             as
             long
             as
             ever
             they
             are
             able
             ,
             and
             thus
             much
             for
             the
             second
             part
             .
          
           
           
             
               Two
               divisions
               of
               25
               files
               of
               Pikes
               standing
               in
               their
               order
               in
               Ranke
               &
               file
               making
               500
               men
               .
            
          
           
             
               Ordre
               de
               Bataille
               de
               24000
               d'Infanterie
               ,
               et
               6000
               de
               Cavaillerie
               ,
               Ordonné
               en
               trois
               Brigades
               ,
               duquel
               le
               Front
               de
               A.
               B.
               a
               5054
               pieds
               .
            
          
           
             
               Ordre
               de
               Bataille
               en
               Flandres
               vers
               Nieuport
               ,
               dressée
               l'An
               1600.
               le
               2e
               .
               Iuillet
               .
               par
               le
               Prince
               d'Orange
               Maurice
               .
            
          
           
             
               Ordre
               de
               Bataille
               de
               l'Archeduc
               Albert
               en
               Flanders
               vers
               Nieuport
               le
               2e
               Iuillet
               l'An
               1600.
               
            
          
           
             
               Ordre
               de
               bataille
               d'Infanterie
               ,
               ordonné
               par
               le
               feu
               Prince
               d'Orange
               Maurice
               ,
               de
               tres
               boute
               memoire
               l'An
               160●
               .
            
          
           
             
               Premiere
               forme
               de
               l'Ordre
               de
               Bataille
               devant
               Rees
               ,
               le
               23e
               .
               Septembre
               1605.
               
            
          
           
             
               Ordre
               de
               Bataille
               de
               37
               Compaignies
               de
               Cavaillerie
               devant
               Rees
               ,
               le
               23.
               
               Septemb.
               1614.
               
            
          
           
             
               Premiere
               forme
               d'ordre
               de
               Bataille
               devant
               Iuliers
               dressée
               l'an
               1610.
               e
               marchant
               depuis
               Vorstenberg
               .
            
          
           
             
               Seconde
               forme
               de
               lordre
               de
               Bataille
               dressée
               depuis
               Vorstenberg
               vers
               Iuliers
               le
               22e
               Aoeust
               1620
            
          
           
             
               A
               Forme
               of
               Horse
               Embattailed
               before
               Gulick
               Anno
               1610.
               
               Ordre
               de
               Bataille
               de
               Cavaillerie
               devant
               Iuliers
               l'An
               mille
               six
               cent
               et
               dix
            
          
           
             
               An
               other
               forme
               of
               Embattailing
               Horse
               shoune
               before
               Rees
               by
               his
               Exce
               1621
               Ordre
               de
               Bataille
               de
               Cavaillerie
               devant
               Rees
               ,
               ordonné
               par
               son
               Excce
               .
               en
               octob
               1621.
               
            
          
           
             
               Ordre
               d'Infanterie
               en
               bataille
               devant
               Rees
               l'An
               1614
               duquel
               le
               front
               est
               :
               long
               2200
               pieds
               ,
               et
               la
               bauteur
               740
               pieds
               .
            
          
           
             
               Autre
               Ordre
               d'Infanterie
               en
               Bataille
               devant
               Rees
               l'an
               1614
               duquel
               le
               front
               est
               long
               2750.
               pieds
               ,
               et
               la
               bauteur
               1160.
               pieds
               .
            
          
           
             
               Premiere
               Ordre
               d'Infanterie
               en
               Bataille
               devant
               Doormick
               l'An
               1621.
               
            
          
           
             
               Seconde
               Ordre
               de
               Bataille
               de
               Cavaillerie
               ,
               et
               Infanterie
               ,
               Ordonné
               par
               Son
               Excce
               .
               devant
               Doornick
               le
               ●e
               .
               de
               Septemb.
               
            
          
           
             
               Infanterie
               en
               Bataille
               .
            
          
           
             
               Autre
               Ordre
               d'Infanterie
               en
               Bataille
               .
            
          
           
             
               Ordre
               d'Infanterie
               en
               Bataille
               pres
               Nimmege
               .
               1624.
               
            
          
           
             
               Ordre
               de
               Bataille
               Ordonné
               par
               le
               Prince
               Henry
               à
               Walwic
               .
            
          
           
             
               Ordre-de-Bataille
               de
               toute
               L'Armeé
               ,
               Ordonné
               par
               Son
               Altezze
               ,
               devant
               le
               sort
               de
               Voren
               le
               4e
               .
               de
               Iuin
               1642.
               
            
          
           
             
               The
               forme
               of
               the
               Battle
               ,
               which
               his
               Highnesse
               showed
               before
               Breda
               anno
               1634.
               the
               Front
               is
               8495.
               foote
               .
            
          
           
             
               The
               forme
               of
               Battle
               showne
               by
               his
               Highnesse
               at
               Maersen
               the
               10e
               .
               of
               Iune
               1635
               :
               the
               Front
               is
               5050
               foote
               .
            
          
           
             
               Quartier
               d'un
               〈◊〉
               d'Infanterie
               de
               dix
               Compaignies
               ,
               selon
               l'Ordre
               de
               son
               Altezze
               :
               le
               front
               à
               434
               pieds
               .
            
          
           
             
               Quartier
               d'un
               Regiment
               de
               Cavaillerie
               de
               5.
               
               Compaignies
               selon
               l'ordre
               de
               son
               Altezze
               le
               front
               à
               430
               pieds
               .
            
          
           
             
               Figure
               d'Une
               Armée
               en
               Campaigne
               ;
               avec
               ques
               sa
               Cavaillerie
               et
               Infanterie
               ,
               selon
               l'Ordre
               du
               feu
               Prince
               d'Orange
               .